Sei sulla pagina 1di 500

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

CHAPTER 21
LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES

CHAPTER
SUBJECT
List of
Effective
Page

Table of
Contents

21-00-00

21-10-00
21-11-00
CONFIG.2

PAGE

CHAPTER
SUBJECT

DATE

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8

Nov.
Nov.
Nov.
Nov.
Nov.
Nov.
Nov.
Nov.

15/14
15/14
15/14
15/14
15/14
15/14
15/14
15/14

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8

Nov.
Nov.
Nov.
Nov.
Nov.
Nov.
Nov.
Nov.

15/14
15/14
15/14
15/14
15/14
15/14
15/14
15/14

1
2
201
202
203
204
205
206

Dec.
Dec.
May
May
May
May
May
May

15/08
15/08
15/12
15/12
15/12
15/12
15/12
15/12

1
2

Sep. 01/94
Sep. 01/94

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8

Dec.
Dec.
Dec.
Dec.
Dec.
Dec.
Dec.
Dec.

Effectivity: OM01

15/07
15/07
15/07
15/07
15/07
15/07
15/07
15/07

CONFIG.2

21-11-00
CONFIG.1

PAGE

DATE

9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30

Dec.
Dec.
Dec.
Dec.
Dec.
Dec.
Dec.
Dec.
Dec.
Dec.
Dec.
Dec.
Dec.
Dec.
Dec.
Dec.
Dec.
Dec.
Dec.
Dec.
Dec.
Dec.

15/07
15/07
15/07
15/07
15/07
15/07
15/07
15/07
15/07
15/07
15/07
15/07
15/07
15/07
15/07
15/07
15/07
15/07
15/07
15/07
15/07
15/07

101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114

Sep.
Sep.
Sep.
Sep.
Sep.
Sep.
Sep.
Sep.
Sep.
Sep.
Sep.
Sep.
Sep.
Sep.

01/94
01/94
01/94
01/94
01/94
01/94
01/94
01/94
01/94
01/94
01/94
01/94
01/94
01/94

201
202
203

Dec. 15/10
Dec. 15/10
Dec. 15/10

21 - LEP

Pag. 1
Nov. 15/14

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


CHAPTER
SUBJECT

PAGE
204

21-11-00
CONFIG.2

21-11-00

21-11-11
CONFIG.2

21-11-13
CONFIG.2

21-11-14
CONFIG.2

21-11-14
21-11-15
CONFIG.2

CHAPTER
SUBJECT

DATE
Dec. 15/10

PAGE

DATE

401
402
403
404

Dec.
Dec.
Dec.
Dec.

01/09
01/09
01/09
01/09

21-11-17

401
402
403
404

Dec.
Dec.
Dec.
Dec.

15/07
15/07
15/07
15/07

21-11-18

401
402
403
404

Jul.
Jul.
Jul.
Jul.

31/06
31/06
31/06
31/06

401
402
403
404

Dec.
Dec.
Dec.
Dec.

01/09
01/09
01/09
01/09

401
402
403
404

May
May
May
May

15/12
15/12
15/12
15/12

21-11-16
CONFIG.2

501
502
503
504
505
506
507
508
509
510

Dec.
Dec.
Dec.
Dec.
Dec.
Dec.
Dec.
Dec.
Dec.
Dec.

15/07
15/07
15/07
15/07
15/07
15/07
15/07
15/07
15/07
15/07

601
602
603
604
605
606

Dec.
Dec.
Dec.
Dec.
Dec.
Dec.

15/10
15/10
15/10
15/10
15/10
15/10

401
402
403
404

Dec.
Dec.
Dec.
Dec.

01/09
01/09
01/09
01/09

21-11-20
CONFIG.2

401
402
403
404

Jul.
Jul.
Jul.
Jul.

15/04
15/04
15/04
15/04

21-11-21

401
402
403
404

Dec.
Dec.
Dec.
Dec.

15/07
15/07
15/07
15/07

21-11-22
401
402
403
404

May
May
May
May

15/12
15/12
15/12
15/12

401
402
403
404

Nov.
Nov.
Nov.
Nov.

15/14
15/14
15/14
15/14

21-11-23
601
602

Nov. 15/14
Nov. 15/14

401
402
403
404

Dec.
Dec.
Dec.
Dec.

15/07
15/07
15/07
15/07

401
402
403
404

Mar.
Mar.
Mar.
Mar.

31/00
31/00
31/00
31/00

21-11-19
CONFIG.1

21-20-00
CONFIG.2

1
2

Sep. 01/94
Sep. 01/94

21-21-00
Effectivity: OM01

21 - LEP

Pag. 2
Nov. 15/14

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


CHAPTER
SUBJECT
CONFIG.3

21-21-00
CONFIG.1

PAGE

DATE

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10

Oct.
Oct.
Oct.
Oct.
Oct.
Oct.
Oct.
Oct.
Oct.
Oct.

CHAPTER
SUBJECT
15/00
15/00
15/00
15/00
15/00
15/00
15/00
15/00
15/00
15/00

101
102

Jul. 15/04
Jul. 15/04

CONFIG.1

501
502
503
504

Jul.
Jul.
Jul.
Jul.

15/04
15/04
15/04
15/04

21-21-11

401
402
403
404

Dec.
Dec.
Dec.
Dec.

15/07
15/07
15/07
15/07

21-21-16

401
402
403
404

Jul.
Jul.
Jul.
Jul.

31/06
31/06
31/06
31/06

21-21-17

401
402
403
404

Jul.
Jul.
Jul.
Jul.

15/04
15/04
15/04
15/04

21-21-20

401
402
403
404

Mar.
Mar.
Mar.
Mar.

31/00
31/00
31/00
31/00

21-22-00
CONFIG.2
21-22-11
CONFIG.1

1
2
401
402
403

Effectivity: OM01

Sep. 01/94
Sep. 01/94
Mar. 31/00
Mar. 31/00
Mar. 31/00

PAGE
404

21-24-00
CONFIG.1

DATE
Mar. 31/00

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8

Jul.
Jul.
Jul.
Jul.
Jul.
Jul.
Jul.
Jul.

15/10
15/10
15/10
15/10
15/10
15/10
15/10
15/10

CONFIG.1

101
102
103
104
105
106

Nov.
Nov.
Nov.
Nov.
Nov.
Nov.

30/97
30/97
30/97
30/97
30/97
30/97

CONFIG.1

501
502
503
504
505
506

Jul.
Jul.
Jul.
Jul.
Jul.
Jul.

01/09
01/09
01/09
01/09
01/09
01/09

401
402
403
404
405
406

Jul.
Jul.
Jul.
Jul.
Jul.
Jul.

01/09
01/09
01/09
01/09
01/09
01/09

21-24-12

401
402
403
404

Dec.
Dec.
Dec.
Dec.

15/07
15/07
15/07
15/07

21-30-00

1
2

Jul. 15/04
Jul. 15/04

1
2
3
4
5

Dec.
Dec.
Dec.
Dec.
Dec.

21-24-11
CONFIG.1

21-31-00
CONFIG.1

01/03
01/03
01/03
01/03
01/03

21 - LEP

Pag. 3
Nov. 15/14

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


CHAPTER
SUBJECT

CONFIG.1

CONFIG.1

CHAPTER
SUBJECT

PAGE

DATE

6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26

Dec.
Dec.
Dec.
Dec.
Dec.
Dec.
Dec.
Dec.
Dec.
Dec.
Dec.
Dec.
Dec.
Dec.
Dec.
Dec.
Dec.
Dec.
Dec.
Dec.
Dec.

01/03
01/03
01/03
01/03
01/03
01/03
01/03
01/03
01/03
01/03
01/03
01/03
01/03
01/03
01/03
01/03
01/03
01/03
01/03
01/03
01/03

101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116

Jul.
Jul.
Jul.
Jul.
Jul.
Jul.
Jul.
Jul.
Jul.
Jul.
Jul.
Jul.
Jul.
Jul.
Jul.
Jul.

15/04
15/04
15/04
15/04
15/04
15/04
15/04
15/04
15/04
15/04
15/04
15/04
15/04
15/04
15/04
15/04

501
502
503
504
505
506
507
508
509

Jul.
Jul.
Jul.
Jul.
Jul.
Jul.
Jul.
Jul.
Jul.

30/08
30/08
30/08
30/08
30/08
30/08
30/08
30/08
30/08

Effectivity: OM01

21-31-11

21-31-12
CONFIG.1

21-31-13

21-31-14
CONFIG.1

21-31-15

21-31-16
CONFIG.1

21-31-17
CONFIG.1

CONFIG.1

PAGE

DATE

510
511
512

Jul. 30/08
Jul. 30/08
Jul. 30/08

401
402
403
404

Mar.
Mar.
Mar.
Mar.

31/00
31/00
31/00
31/00

401
402
403
404

Dec.
Dec.
Dec.
Dec.

15/07
15/07
15/07
15/07

401
402
403
404

Mar.
Mar.
Mar.
Mar.

31/00
31/00
31/00
31/00

401
402
403
404

Mar.
Mar.
Mar.
Mar.

31/00
31/00
31/00
31/00

401
402
403
404

Dec.
Dec.
Dec.
Dec.

15/07
15/07
15/07
15/07

401
402
403
404

Mar.
Mar.
Mar.
Mar.

31/00
31/00
31/00
31/00

301
302
303
304

Mar.
Mar.
Mar.
Mar.

31/00
31/00
31/00
31/00

401
402
403
404
405

Feb.
Feb.
Feb.
Feb.
Feb.

28/02
28/02
28/02
28/02
28/02

21 - LEP

Pag. 4
Nov. 15/14

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


CHAPTER
SUBJECT

PAGE

CHAPTER
SUBJECT

DATE

406

Feb. 28/02

701
702
703
704

Nov.
Nov.
Nov.
Nov.

30/02
30/02
30/02
30/02

401
402
403
404
405
406
407
408

Feb.
Feb.
Feb.
Feb.
Feb.
Feb.
Feb.
Feb.

28/02
28/02
28/02
28/02
28/02
28/02
28/02
28/02

701
702
703
704
705
706

Nov.
Nov.
Nov.
Nov.
Nov.
Nov.

30/02
30/02
30/02
30/02
30/02
30/02

401
402
403
404

Mar.
Mar.
Mar.
Mar.

31/00
31/00
31/00
31/00

401
402
403
404

Mar.
Mar.
Mar.
Mar.

31/00
31/00
31/00
31/00

21-31-23

401
402
403
404
405
406

Dec.
Dec.
Dec.
Dec.
Dec.
Dec.

15/07
15/07
15/07
15/07
15/07
15/07

21-50-00

1
2

CONFIG.1

21-31-18
CONFIG.1

CONFIG.1

21-31-21
CONFIG.1

21-31-22
CONFIG.1

21-51-00
CONFIG.1

Effectivity: OM01

PAGE

DATE

2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16

Sep.
Sep.
Sep.
Sep.
Sep.
Sep.
Sep.
Sep.
Sep.
Sep.
Sep.
Sep.
Sep.
Sep.
Sep.

01/99
01/99
01/99
01/99
01/99
01/99
01/99
01/99
01/99
01/99
01/99
01/99
01/99
01/99
01/99

CONFIG.1

101
102
103
104

Sep.
Sep.
Sep.
Sep.

01/99
01/99
01/99
01/99

21-51-13

401
402
403
404

Dec.
Dec.
Dec.
Dec.

15/07
15/07
15/07
15/07

21-51-20

301
302
303
304
305
306
307
308
309
310
401
402
403
404
405
406
407
408

Jul.
Jul.
Jul.
Jul.
Jul.
Jul.
Jul.
Jul.
Jul.
Jul.
Nov.
Nov.
Nov.
Nov.
Nov.
Nov.
Nov.
Nov.

31/06
31/06
31/06
31/06
31/06
31/06
31/06
31/06
31/06
31/06
15/14
15/14
15/14
15/14
15/14
15/14
15/14
15/14

21-51-21

401
402
403

May
May
May

15/12
15/12
15/12

Sep. 01/94
Sep. 01/94
Sep. 01/99

21 - LEP

Pag. 5
Nov. 15/14

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


CHAPTER
SUBJECT

PAGE

CHAPTER
SUBJECT

DATE

404
405
406
407
408

May
May
May
May
May

15/12
15/12
15/12
15/12
15/12

21-51-23

401
402
403
404
405
406

May
May
May
May
May
May

15/12
15/12
15/12
15/12
15/12
15/12

21-51-24

401
402
403
404
405
406

May
May
May
May
May
May

15/12
15/12
15/12
15/12
15/12
15/12

21-51-25

401
402
403
404
405
406

May
May
May
May
May
May

15/12
15/12
15/12
15/12
15/12
15/12

301
302
303
304
401
402
403
404

Mar.
Mar.
Mar.
Mar.
Mar.
Mar.
Mar.
Mar.

31/00
31/00
31/00
31/00
31/00
31/00
31/00
31/00

301
302

Nov. 15/14
Nov. 15/14

401
402
403
404

May
May
May
May

21-51-26

21-51-27
21-51-27
CONFIG.1

21-60-00

1
2

Effectivity: OM01

21-61-00
CONFIG.1

CONFIG.1

21-61-00
CONFIG.2

15/12
15/12
15/12
15/12

Sep. 01/94
Sep. 01/94

21-61-11

PAGE

DATE

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22

Jul.
Jul.
Jul.
Jul.
Jul.
Jul.
Jul.
Jul.
Jul.
Jul.
Jul.
Jul.
Jul.
Jul.
Jul.
Jul.
Jul.
Jul.
Jul.
Jul.
Jul.
Jul.

15/10
15/10
15/10
15/10
15/10
15/10
15/10
15/10
15/10
15/10
15/10
15/10
15/10
15/10
15/10
15/10
15/10
15/10
15/10
15/10
15/10
15/10

101
102
103
104
105
106

Nov.
Nov.
Nov.
Nov.
Nov.
Nov.

30/97
30/97
30/97
30/97
30/97
30/97

501
502
503
504
505
506
507
508
509
510
511
512

Mar.
Mar.
Mar.
Mar.
Mar.
Mar.
Mar.
Mar.
Mar.
Mar.
Mar.
Mar.

31/00
31/00
31/00
31/00
31/00
31/00
31/00
31/00
31/00
31/00
31/00
31/00

401
402
403

May
May
May

15/12
15/12
15/12

21 - LEP

Pag. 6
Nov. 15/14

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


CHAPTER
SUBJECT

PAGE

CHAPTER
SUBJECT

DATE

404
405
406

May
May
May

15/12
15/12
15/12

21-61-12

401
402
403
404

Jul.
Jul.
Jul.
Jul.

15/04
15/04
15/04
15/04

21-61-13

401
402
403
404

May
May
May
May

15/12
15/12
15/12
15/12

21-61-14

401
402
403
404

Dec.
Dec.
Dec.
Dec.

01/09
01/09
01/09
01/09

21-61-16

401
402
403
404

May
May
May
May

15/12
15/12
15/12
15/12

21-61-17

401
402
403
404

Mar.
Mar.
Mar.
Mar.

31/00
31/00
31/00
31/00

401
402
403
404
405
406
407
408

Dec.
Dec.
Dec.
Dec.
Dec.
Dec.
Dec.
Dec.

01/09
01/09
01/09
01/09
01/09
01/09
01/09
01/09

401
402
403
404

May
May
May
May

15/12
15/12
15/12
15/12

401
402

May
May

15/13
15/13

21-61-18
CONFIG.1

21-61-19
CONFIG.2

21-61-20
CONFIG.1

Effectivity: OM01

PAGE
403
404

DATE
May
May

15/13
15/13

21 - LEP

Pag. 7
Nov. 15/14

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

Effectivity: OM01

21 - LEP

Pag. 8
Nov. 15/14

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


CHAPTER 21
TABLE OF CONTENTS

SUBJECT

CHAPTER/
SECTION

AIR CONDITIONING

21-00-00

PAGE

All

Description/Operation

Maintenance Practices

201

COMPRESSION

21-10-00

Description/Operation
COMPRESSION SYSTEM

All
1

21-11-00

SERIES 100

Description/Operation

CONFIG.2

Troubleshooting

CONFIG.2

101

COMPRESSION SYSTEM

21-11-00

Maintenance Practices

CONFIG.1

COMPRESSION SYSTEM

21-11-00

Adjustment/Test

CONFIG.2

COMPRESSION SYSTEM

21-11-00

Inspection/Check
BLEED AIR HIGH PRESSURE SWITCH,
HF41 (HF42)
Removal/Installation

Effectivity: OM01

EFF.

All
201
SERIES 100
501
All
601

21-11-11
CONFIG.2

SERIES 100
401

21 - TOC

Pag. 1
Nov. 15/14

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

SUBJECT
HIGH PRESSURE SHUT-OFF VALVE, HF53
(HF54)
Removal/Installation
LOW PRESSURE CHECK VALVE
Removal/Installation
LOW PRESSURE CHECK VALVE

CHAPTER/
SECTION
21-11-13
CONFIG.2

CONFIG.2

Removal/Installation
BLEED CROSS-OVER VALVE, HF70
Removal/Installation
BLEED OVERPRESSURE SWITCH, HF45
(HF46)

Removal/Installation
LOW PRESSURE BLEED AIR VENTURI
Removal/Installation

Effectivity: OM01

SERIES 100
401
SERIES 100
601

21-11-15
CONFIG.2

SERIES 100
401

21-11-16
CONFIG.2

SERIES 100
401

21-11-17

All
401

21-11-18

Removal/Installation
BLEED AIR LOW PRESSURE SWITCH,
HF101 (HF108) (HF102)

401

21-11-14

Removal/Installation
AIR CONDITIONING CONTROL PANEL,
ZD124

EFF.
SERIES 100

21-11-14

Inspection/Check
PRESSURE REGULATOR AND SHUT-OFF
VALVE, HF51 (HF52)

PAGE

All
401

21-11-19
CONFIG.1

SERIES 100
POST.SB.235-30-14M
401

21-11-20
CONFIG.2

SERIES 100
401

21 - TOC

Pag. 2
Nov. 15/14

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

SUBJECT
DUCT OVERTEMPERATURE SWITCH, HF47
(HF48)

CHAPTER/
SECTION
21-11-21

Removal/Installation
CAVITY OVERTEMPERATURE SWITCH, HF87
(HF88), HF89 (HF90)

Description/Operation
DISTRIBUTION AND RECIRCULATION
SYSTEM
Description/Operation
DISTRIBUTION AND RECIRCULATION
SYSTEM

All

21-11-22

All
401

21-11-23

Removal/Installation
DISTRIBUTION

All
401

21-20-00
CONFIG.2

21-21-00
CONFIG.3

21-21-00

SERIES 100

Troubleshooting

CONFIG.1

101

Adjustment/Test

CONFIG.1

501

RECIRCULATION FAN, HF49 (HF50)

21-21-11

Removal/Installation
FACE OUTLET

Effectivity: OM01

All
401

21-21-16

Removal/Installation
FOOT WARMER BUTERFLY VALVE

EFF.

401

Removal/Installation
BLEED AIR OVERTEMPERATURE SWITCH,
HF43 (HF44)

PAGE

All
401

21-21-17

All

21 - TOC

Pag. 3
Nov. 15/14

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

SUBJECT

CHAPTER/
SECTION

Removal/Installation
PILOT AIR OUTLET

Description/Operation
DUCT ASSEMBLY

21-21-20

S/N 063999
401

21-22-00
CONFIG.2

21-22-11

Removal/Installation

CONFIG.1

AVIONICS AND ELECTRONIC BAY


VENTILATION

21-24-00

Description/Operation

CONFIG.1

Troubleshooting

CONFIG.1

101

Adjustment/Test

CONFIG.1

501

ELECTRONIC BAY FAN HF73

21-24-11

Removal/Installation

CONFIG.1

AVIONIC - BAY FAN, HF93 (HF94)

401
All
401

21-30-00

Description/Operation
PRESSURIZATION CONTROL SYSTEM

401

21-24-12

Removal/Installation
PRESSURIZATION CONTROL

All
1

21-31-00

SERIES 100

Description/Operation

CONFIG.1

Troubleshooting

CONFIG.1

101

Effectivity: OM01

EFF.

401

Removal/Installation
INDIVIDUAL OUTLET-PASSENGER CABIN

PAGE

21 - TOC

Pag. 4
Nov. 15/14

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

SUBJECT
Adjustment/Test
CABIN PRESSURE SELECTOR, HE2

CHAPTER/
SECTION

PAGE

CONFIG.1

501

21-31-11

Removal/Installation
CABIN PRESSURE CONTROLLER, HE5
Removal/Installation
CABIN PRESSURE INDICATOR, DN2

Removal/Installation
VACUUM CONTROL VALVE

21-31-12
CONFIG.1

SERIES 100
401

21-31-13

All
401

21-31-14
CONFIG.1

SERIES 100
401

21-31-15

Removal/Installation
DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE TRANSDUCER,
DN3

All
401

Removal/Installation
SOLENOID VALVE, HE17

OM01 POST.SB.235-21-12M
401

21-31-16

Removal/Installation

CONFIG.1

PRIMARY OUTFLOW VALVE, HE7

21-31-17

SERIES 100
401
SERIES 100

Servicing

CONFIG.1

301

Removal/Installation

CONFIG.1

401

Cleaning/Painting

CONFIG.1

701

SECONDARY OUTFLOW VALVE, HE8

21-31-18

SERIES 100

Removal/Installation

CONFIG.1

401

Cleaning/Painting

CONFIG.1

701

Effectivity: OM01

EFF.

21 - TOC

Pag. 5
Nov. 15/14

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

SUBJECT

CHAPTER/
SECTION

JET PUMP

21-31-21

Removal/Installation
AIR CHECK VALVE
Removal/Installation
MICROSWITCH HE13, HE14, HE15, HE16

CONFIG.1

CONFIG.1

401
SERIES 100
401

21-31-23

All
401

21-50-00

Description/Operation
AIR COOLING SYSTEM

All
1

21-51-00

S/N 001197

Description/Operation

CONFIG.1

Troubleshooting

CONFIG.1

101

CHECK VALVE (HOT AIR BY-PASS)

21-51-13

Removal/Installation
AIR CYCLE MACHINE

All
401

21-51-20

All

Servicing

301

Removal/Installation

401

HEAT EXCHANGER

21-51-21

Removal/Installation
MIXING BOX ASSEMBLY
Removal/Installation

Effectivity: OM01

EFF.
SERIES 100

21-31-22

Removal/Installation
COOLING

PAGE

All
401

21-51-23

All
401

21 - TOC

Pag. 6
Nov. 15/14

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

SUBJECT

CHAPTER/
SECTION

CONDENSER AND MIXER

21-51-24

Removal/Installation
WATER COLLECTOR

All

21-51-25

All
401

21-51-26

S/N 001197

Servicing

301

Removal/Installation

401

SPRAY NOZZLE

21-51-27

Servicing
SPRAY NOZZLE
Removal/Installation
TEMPERATURE CONTROL

All
301

21-51-27
CONFIG.1

S/N 001197
401

21-60-00

Description/Operation

All
1

TEMPERATURE CONTROL SYSTEM

21-61-00

Description/Operation

CONFIG.1

Troubleshooting

CONFIG.1

101

TEMPERATURE CONTROL SYSTEM


Adjustment/Test
DUAL TEMPERATURE CONTROL VALVE,
HF39 (HF40)
Removal/Installation

Effectivity: OM01

EFF.

401

Removal/Installation
WATER FILTER

PAGE

21-61-00
CONFIG.2

SERIES 100
SERIES 100

501

21-61-11

All
401

21 - TOC

Pag. 7
Nov. 15/14

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

SUBJECT

CHAPTER/
SECTION

TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER, HF7 (HF8)

21-61-12

Removal/Installation
TEMPERATURE SENSOR, HF55 (HF56)

21-61-14

Removal/Installation
FLIGHT COMPARTMENT TEMPERATURE
SENSOR, HF77
Removal/Installation
PASSENGER COMPARTMENT TEMPERATURE
SENSOR, HF64
Removal/Installation

Effectivity: OM01

SERIES 100
401

21-61-16

All
401

21-61-17

Removal/Installation
FREE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR, DM4
(DM5)

All
401

Removal/Installation
TEMPERATURE INDICATOR DM2

All

21-61-13

Removal/Installation
CABIN SUPPLY OVERTEMPERATURE
SWITCH, HF57 (HF58)

EFF.

401

Removal/Installation
MICROFAN HF102

PAGE

All
401

21-61-18
CONFIG.1

401

21-61-19
CONFIG.2

SERIES 100
401

21-61-20
CONFIG.1

401

21 - TOC

Pag. 8
Nov. 15/14

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


AIR CONDITIONING
DESCRIPTION/OPERATION

1. General (Fig. 1)
The aircraft air conditioning system includes two independent air
conditioning systems which use bleed air from the LH and RH engines
engines respectively. Each system includes a chilled recirculation air
stage which is designed to keep to a minimum engine bleed air
requirements. A bleed air crossover facility lets both systems be fed from
either engine if required.
The flight compartment and passenger compartment have independent air
distribution and temperature selection systems. The temperature control is
from the AIR CONDITIONING control unit, on the flight compartment. The
normal range of the temperature control is between 65F and 85F (18,3C
and 29,4C) .
The aircraft pressurization system keeps a positive differential pressure.
This is equivalent to an aircraft cabin altitude lower than the true
aircraft altitude. A cabin pressure controller regulates the outflow of
air conditioning through two outflow/safety valves. The normal control of
the pressurization system is automatic. There is a manual control to use
if a malfunction in the automatic mode of operation occurs.
A propeller braking facility on the No. 2 (RH) engine lets the engine be
used on the ground as an auxiliary power unit (APU) to give air
conditioning bleed air requirements (Ref. 71-00-00, P. Block 1).
The aircraft air conditioning system includes five subsystems:
- Compression (Ref. 21-10-00, P. Block 1)
- Distribution (Ref. 21-20-00, P. Block 1)
- Pressurization Control (Ref. 21-30-00, P. Block 1)
- Cooling (Ref. 21-50-00, P. Block 1)
- Temperature Control (Ref. 21-60-00, P. Block 1).

Effectivity: See TOC

21-00-00

Pag. 1
Dec. 15/08

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


Air Conditioning System - Block Diagram

CM1.21.00.00.0AO.00.00-00

Fig. 1 Air Conditioning System - Block Diagram

Effectivity: See TOC

21-00-00

Pag. 2
Dec. 15/08

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


AIR CONDITIONING
MAINTENANCE PRACTICES
WARNING:

YOU MUST OBEY ALL THE SAFETY PROCEDURES WHEN YOU DO WORK IN OR NEAR
A FUEL TANK (Ref.28-10-00, P. Block 301). IF YOU DO NOT OBEY THE
SAFETY PROCEDURES THERE RISK OF:
- DEATH OR INJURY TO PERSONS
- DAMAGE TO THE AIRCRAFT OR TO OTHER EQUIPMENT.

WARNING:

PUT WARNING NOTICES IN THE FLIGHT COMPARTMENT BEFORE YOU START THE
MAINTENANCE WORK ON THE FUEL SYSTEM OR ITS RELATED COMPONENTS. THIS
WILL PREVENT THE ACCIDENTAL CONNECTION OF ON BOARD EQUIPMENT.

WARNING:

BEFORE POWER IS SUPPLIED TO THE AIRCRAFT, MAKE SURE THAT THE


ELECTRICAL CIRCUITS UPON WHICH WORK IS PROGRESS ARE ISOLATED.

1. Reason for the Job


A.

Reason for the Job


To remove and install the expansion joints to prevent damage to the
bleed duct seals and leakage.
NOTE:

B.

Part of this maintenance procedure is a Fuel Tank Safety


critical item, and classified as ALI (Airworthiness
Limitation Item) item by the aircraft OEM. The contents of
the Fuel Tank Safety critical section(s) must be maintained
to ensure that unsafe conditions do not develop by
maintenance. Strictly adhere to the procedures mentioned in
the Fuel Tank Safety critical section(s).

Equipment and Material


ITEM

DESIGNATION

A.

Standard Tool

Servicing Platform, 3m (10ft)

B.

Standard Tool

Warning Notices

Effectivity: See TOC

21-00-00

Pag. 201
May 15/12

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


Referenced Procedures:
- 06-41-54,
- 06-41-57,
- 28-00-00,
- 28-10-00,
C.

P.
P.
P.
P.

Block
Block
Block
Block

1
1
201
301

- Access - Nacelles
- Access - Wings
- Fuel
- Fuel Storage

Procedure (Fig. 201)


(1) Job Set-Up
(a) Put warning notices.
(b) Put the servicing platform in position.
(c) Remove the necessary access panels to get access to the
bleed air system pipes.
(d) If required, on the center wing area, remove the necessary
thermal insulation to get access to the pipe connections of
the bleed air system.
(2) Removal (Fig. 201)
(a) Get access to the affected connection of the engine air
bleed pipe.
NOTE:

CDCCL - Refer to the task: Airworthiness Limitation


Precautions (Ref.28-00-00, P. Block 201) for
important information on Critical Design
Configuration Control Limitations (CDCCLs).

(b) Remove the clamp (4).


(c) Remove the bushing (3).
(d) Remove and discard the seal (1).
(3) Preparation of the Replacement Component (Fig. 201)
(a)
CAUTION:

REMOVE THE NEW SEAL (1) FROM THE PACKAGE


IMMEDIATELY BEFORE YOU INSTALL IT. MAKE SURE THAT
YOU DO NOT CAUSE CONTAMINATION OF THE NEW SEAL
(1) WITH CHEMICAL OR DUST PARTICLES DURING THE
INSTALLATION.

Examine the new seal (1) for dust, dirt or any signs of
damage.
(b) Install the outer ring (5) into the duct groove.
Effectivity: See TOC

21-00-00

Pag. 202
May 15/12

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


(c) Follow the steps, as shown on (Fig. 202), to carefully
install the duct groove (6) with the spring on the pressure
side.
(4) Preparation for the Installation (Fig. 201)
(a) Examine the clamp (4), the bushing (3) and the end of the
pipes (2) for dust, dirt, lubricant or any signs of damage,
deformation or wear.
(b) If there is dust, dirt or lubricant on the clamp (4), the
bushing (3) or the end of the pipes (2), clean, flush and
dry the surfaces before install a new seal (1).
(c) Repair or replace the components that are damaged.
(5) Installation (Fig. 201)
(a) Install the new seal (1) in its correct position as shown on
detail A of the Fig. 201.
CAUTION:

MAKE SURE THAT THE SEAL (1) IS CORRECTLY


INSTALLED AS SHOWN ON DETAIL A OF THE(Fig. 201)
OPEN END OF THE SEAL MUST POINT OUT OF THE
RELATED END OF THE PIPE (2). IF NOT, A DAMAGE CAN
OCCUR ON THE ENGINE AIR BLEED CONNECTIONS.

(b) Install the bushing (3) on one end of the pipe (2).
(c) Align the end of the pipes (2) and put the bushing (3) in
the correct position.
(d) Put the clamp (4) around the bushing (3) and close it.
NOTE:

If the bushing (3) is correct installed, you can


close the clamp (4) easily.

CAUTION:

MAKE SURE THAT THE CLAMP (4) CAN ROTATE FREELY


ABOVE THE BUSHING (3), IF NOT A DAMAGE CAN OCCUR
ON THE ENGINE AIR BLEED CONNECTIONS.

CAUTION:

MAKE SURE THAT THE CLAMP (4) CAN ROTATE FREELY


ABOVE THE BUSHING (3), IF NOT A DAMAGE CAN OCCUR
ON THE ENGINE AIR BLEED CONNECTIONS.

Effectivity: See TOC

21-00-00

Pag. 203
May 15/12

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


(6) Close-Up
(a) If required, on the center wing area, install the necessary
thermal insulation on the pipe connections of the bleed air
system.
(b) Install the necessary access panels previously removed
(Ref.06-41-54, P. Block 1) and (Ref.06-41-57, P. Block 1).
(c) Remove the servicing platform.
(d) Remove the warning notices.
(e) Make sure that the work area is clean and clear of tools and
miscellaneous equipment.

Effectivity: See TOC

21-00-00

Pag. 204
May 15/12

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


Installation of the Seal on the Pipe Connections of the Bleed Air System

CM1.21.00.00.2AO.00.00-00

Fig. 201 Installation of the Seal on the Pipe Connections of the Bleed Air
System

Effectivity: See TOC

21-00-00

Pag. 205
May 15/12

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


Installation of the New Seal

CM1.21.00.00.2BO.00.00-00

Fig. 202 Installation of the New Seal

Effectivity: See TOC

21-00-00

Pag. 206
May 15/12

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


COMPRESSION
DESCRIPTION/OPERATION

1. General
Compression includes those units and components of the air conditioning
system necessary to supply and control engine bleed air to the cooling
system at the correct pressure and temperature.

Effectivity: See TOC

21-10-00

Pag. 1
Sep. 01/94

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

Effectivity: See TOC

21-10-00

Pag. 2
Sep. 01/94

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


COMPRESSION SYSTEM
DESCRIPTION/OPERATION

1. General
Each air conditioning system has a compression system that uses bleed air
supplied from the LH or RH engine.
The compression system gets high pressure and low pressure bleed air from
its respective engine and supplies it at correct temperature and pressure
to the cooling system.
A cross-feed valve lets either engine supply both LH and RH systems if
bleed air supply fails from one side.
2. Component Location (Fig. 1)
ITEM

FIN

DESIGNATION

ZONE

ACCESS
PANEL

REFERENCE

1.

HF70

Bleed Air
Cross-over Valve

911

911AT

21-11-16

2.

HF45
(HF46)

Bleed Air
Overpressure Switch

911
(912)

911BT
(912AT)

21-11-17

3.

Low Pressure
Check Valve

413
(423)

413BR
(423BR)

21-11-14

4.

HF51
(HF52)

Pressure Regulator
and Shut-off Valve

414
(424)

414AT
(424AT)

21-11-15

5.

HF53
(HF54)

High Pressure
Shut-off Valve

413
(423)

413AR
(423AR)

21-11-13

6.

HF41
(HF42)

Bleed Air High


Pressure Switch

413
(423)

413AL
(423AL)

21-11-11

7.

Low Pressure
Bleed Air Venturi
Switch

413
(423)

413AR
(423AR)

21-11-20

8.

ZD124

213

21-11-18

Effectivity: See TOC

Air Conditioning
Panel

21-11-00

CONFIG. 2
Pag. 1
Dec. 15/07

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


Compression System - Component Location

CM1.21.11.00.0AO.01.02-03

Fig. 1 Compression System - Component Location (Sheet 1 of 4)

Effectivity: See TOC

21-11-00

CONFIG. 2
Pag. 2
Dec. 15/07

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

CM1.21.11.00.0AO.02.02-01

Fig. 1 Compression System - Component Location (Sheet 2 of 4)

Effectivity: See TOC

21-11-00

CONFIG. 2
Pag. 3
Dec. 15/07

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

CM1.21.11.00.0AO.03.02-01

Fig. 1 Compression System - Component Location (Sheet 3 of 4)

Effectivity: See TOC

21-11-00

CONFIG. 2
Pag. 4
Dec. 15/07

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


ITEM

FIN

9.

HF43
(HF44)

10.

DESIGNATION

Bleed Air
Overtemperature
Switch

HF87 (HF88) Cavity Overtemp.


HF89 (HF90) Switch

ZONE

ACCESS
PANEL

REFERENCE

931
(932)

931AT
(932AT)

21-11-23

911
(912)
414
(424)

911BT
(912AT)
414
(424AT)

21-11-22

11.

HF47
(HF48)

Duct Overtemp.
Switch

911
(912)

911AT

21-11-21

12.

ZD101

Relay Box (LH)

221

221CL

24-58-14

222

222CR

213

24-58-11

HF11, HF13
HF81, HF83
13.

ZD102
HF12, HF14
HF80, HF84

14.

Relay
Relay Box (RH)
Relay

PC14

MISCELLANEOUS C/B
Panel

HF1
(HF2)

5A CB Air
Conditioning

24-58-14

** On A/C: TK04A-04, TK04B-06, SERIES 100 POST.SB.235-30-14M


15.

HF101
(HF108)

Bleed Air Low


Pressure Switch

413
(423)

413AL
(423AL)

21-11-19

** On A/C: CLO2 POST.SB.235-30-14M, FRO2 (09-13) POST.SB.235-30-14M,


POST.SB.235-30-14
15.

HF101
(HF102)

Bleed Air Low


Pressure Switch

413
(423)

413AL
(423AL)

21-11-19

** On A/C: All

3. Description
High pressure (HP) bleed air from the engine goes to the HP shut-off valve
HF53 (HF54) and then to the pressure regulator and shut-off valve HF51
(HF52) for delivery to the cooling system.
Low pressure (LP) bleed air from the engine goes through a check valve to
join the HP supply line upstream of the pressure regulator and shut-off
valve HF51 (HF52).

Effectivity: See TOC

21-11-00

CONFIG. 2
Pag. 5
Dec. 15/07

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


The LP check valve is installed in the low pressure bleed duct at the
connection duct to the pressure regulator valve HF51 (HF52). An index pin
on the valve makes sure that installation and flow direction are correct.
The bleed air HP switch HF41 (HF42) senses HP bleed air upstream of the HP
shut-off valve HF53 (HF54).
** On A/C: TK04A-04, TK04B-06, SERIES 100 POST.SB.235-30-14M
The bleed air LP switch HF101 (HF108) senses the LP bleed air on an engine
LP port.
** On A/C: CLO2 POST.SB.235-30-14M, FR02 (09-13) POST.SB.235-30-14M,
POST.SB.235-30-14
The bleed air LP switch HF101 (HF102) senses the LP bleed air on an engine
LP port.
** On A/C: All
The bleed overpressure switch HF45 (HF46) senses duct delivery pressure
upstream of the cooling system.
The single bleed air cross-over valve HF70 connects the cross-feed line
between the LH and RH air conditioning systems.
The duct overtemperature switch HF47 (HF48) is in the compressor outlet
duct, between the air cycle machine and the secondary heat exchanger
inlet. The switch senses overtemperature in the compressor outlet duct.
The cavity overtemperature switches HF87, HF89 (HF88, HF90) operate in an
overtemperature condition of free air.
The relays HF11 (HF12), HF13 (HF14), HF81 (HF80) and HF83 (HF84),
installed in the LH and RH relay box ZD101 (ZD102), control the operation
of the valves and indicators.
The air conditioning control panel ZD124 has switches and indicators for
the control of the air conditioning system.
28VDC is supplied through circuit breaker HF1 (HF2) on the MISCELLANEOUS
circuit breaker panel.

Effectivity: See TOC

21-11-00

CONFIG. 2
Pag. 6
Dec. 15/07

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


4. Component Description
A.

Bleed Air Cross-over Valve, HF70 (Fig. 2)


The bleed air cross-over valve includes a butterfly valve driven by a
two-position electrical actuator installed on the valve with an
insulating block separating the two assemblies. An electrical
receptacle installed on the actuator cover supplies 28VDC system
electrical power for operation of the valve from fully open to fully
closed.

B.

Bleed Air Overpressure Switch, HF45 (HF46) (Fig. 3)


The bleed overpressure switch is a pneumatic pressure sensing device
having diaphragm-operated electrical contacts.
Sensed pressure that increases to more than the preset operating
point causes the diaphragm-operated contacts B and C to open and
simultaneously close contacts A and B. The switch therefore controls
the power supply to the solenoid in the HP shut-off valve, HF53
(HF54), pressure regulator and shut-off valve, HF51 (HF52), and
supplies power to the relevant flight compartment warning
annunciator.

C.

Low Pressure Check Valve


The low pressure check valve, has a flat double-flap type valve of
corrosion resistant steel. The flappers rotate approximately 80
against a stop to prevent valve flutter. An index pin on the valve
makes sure that installation and flow direction are correct. The
valve is installed to stop HP air entering the LP engine system when
the HP system is selected.

Effectivity: See TOC

21-11-00

CONFIG. 2
Pag. 7
Dec. 15/07

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


Bleed Air Cross-over Valve

CM1.21.11.00.0BO.00.02-00

Fig. 2 Bleed Air Cross-over Valve


Bleed Air Overpressure Switch

CM1.21.11.00.0CO.00.02-00

Fig. 3 Bleed Air Overpressure Switch

Effectivity: See TOC

21-11-00

CONFIG. 2
Pag. 8
Dec. 15/07

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


D.

Pressure Regulator and Shut-off Valve, HF51 (HF52) (Fig. 4)


The pressure regulator and shut-off valve includes a butterfly valve
operated and controlled by an actuator assembly installed on the
valve.
The actuator assembly includes a solenoid, pressure sensing
controller and altitude bias bellows used to maintain the bleed air
flow schedule. A filter prevents contamination in the servo air line.
The actuator piston is spring loaded to close butterfly valve when
servo bleed air is vented from the large side of the piston.
When the solenoid is energized, servo air vents to atmosphere letting
the spring force close the butterfly valve. When the solenoid is
de-energized, the ball valve closes the vent and lets servo pressure
rise, overcoming the spring force and moving actuator piston to open
the butterfly valve.
When duct differential pressure is too low, servo air is vented to
atmosphere and the butterfly valve closes by action of the actuator
piston and spring.
Flow differentials are sensed by the pneumatic control which adjusts
the bleed of servo pressure to reposition the butterfly valve and
maintain the desired flow.

E.

High Pressure Shut-off Valve, HF53 (HF54) (Fig. 5)


The high pressure shut-off valve includes a butterfly valve
controlled by a solenoid operated actuator assembly.
Actuator piston is spring loaded to close the butterfly valve when
servo bleed air pressure is vented to atmosphere.

Effectivity: See TOC

21-11-00

CONFIG. 2
Pag. 9
Dec. 15/07

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


Pressure Regulator and Shut-off Valve

CM1.21.11.00.0DO.00.02-00

Fig. 4 Pressure Regulator and Shut-off Valve

Effectivity: See TOC

21-11-00

CONFIG. 2
Pag. 10
Dec. 15/07

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


High Pressure Shut-off Valve

CM1.21.11.00.0EO.00.02-00

Fig. 5 High Pressure Shut-off Valve

Effectivity: See TOC

21-11-00

CONFIG. 2
Pag. 11
Dec. 15/07

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


When the solenoid energizes, the servo bleed air from upstream of the
valve is supplied to the large side of actuator piston, overcomes
spring force and opens the butterfly valve. When the action of one
pressure switch removes the electrical supply to the high pressure
shut-off valve, the solenoid de-energizes. The ball valve operates
and lets the large side of piston vent to atmosphere. Spring force
moves the piston to close the butterfly valve.
A filter prevents contamination in the servo air line.
F.

Bleed High Pressure Switch HF41 (HF42) (Fig. 6)


The bleed air high pressure switch is a pneumatic sensing device with
diagram operated electrical contacts
When HP bleed air pressure is more than the preset operating point of
5,31 bar (77 psi) the diagraphragm-operated contacts open and remove
the electrical power from the HP shut-off valve HF53 (HF54).

G.

Low Pressure Bleed Air Venturi (Fig. 7)


The low pressure bleed air venturi is a steel venturi installed to
the engine low pressure bleed outlet and connects to the air
conditioning system.

** On A/C: TK04A-04, TK04B-06, SERIES 100 POST.SB.235-30-14M


H.

Bleed Air Low Pressure Switch, HF101 (HF108)


The bleed air low pressure switch is installed on an engine LP port.
When it senses that the bleed air pressure, on the engine LP port, is
more than the preset operating point of 23 psi (1,58 bar) its
contacts open and remove the electrical supply from the HP shut-off
valve HF53 (HF54). When the pressure is less than 20 psi (1,37 bar)
its contacts close and energize the valve again.

Effectivity: See TOC

21-11-00

CONFIG. 2
Pag. 12
Dec. 15/07

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


** On A/C: CLO2 POST.SB.235-30-14M, FR02 (09-13) POST.SB.235-30-14M,
POST.SB.235-30-14
H.

Bleed Air Low Pressure Switch, HF101 (HF102)


The bleed air low pressure switch is installed on an engine LP port.
When it senses that the bleed air pressure, on the engine LP port, is
more than the preset operating point of 23 psi (1,58 bar) its
contacts open and remove the electrical supply from the HP shut-off
valve HF53 (HF54). When the pressure is less than 20 psi (1,37 bar)
its contacts close and energize the valve again.

** On A/C: All
J.

Air Conditioning Control Panel, ZD124 (Fig. 8)


The air conditioning control panel ZD124 is installed in the overhead
panel of the flight compartment. The upper half of the panel has
switches and indicators that control the compression system of the LH
and RH air conditioning systems.
The magnetic indicator (1) HF19 (HF20) line bar symbol goes "in line"
when the selector switch (3) HF25 (HF26) is set to ON. If an
overpressure/overtemperature condition occurs, the line bar symbol
goes "cross line" to indicate the pressure regulator and shut-off
valve HF51 (HF52) is energized closed.
The caption PCKG BLEED in lighted switch (2) HF27 (HF28) comes on
automatically if an overpressure/overtemperature condition occurs. It
indicates that the HP shut-off valve HF53 (HF54) is de-energized
closed. Operation of the switch resets the LH/RH system to normal and
the PCKG BLEED caption goes off.
The single pole ON/OFF switch (3) HF25 (HF26) controls the operation
of the air conditioning system through the pressure regulator and
shut-off valve HF51 (HF52).

Effectivity: See TOC

21-11-00

CONFIG. 2
Pag. 13
Dec. 15/07

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


Bleed air High Pressure Switch

CM1.21.11.00.0FO.00.02-00

Fig. 6 Bleed air High Pressure Switch


Low Pressure Bleed Air Venturi

CM1.21.11.00.0GO.00.02-00

Fig. 7 Low Pressure Bleed Air Venturi

Effectivity: See TOC

21-11-00

CONFIG. 2
Pag. 14
Dec. 15/07

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


Air Conditioning Control Panel ZD124

CM1.21.11.00.0HO.00.02-01

Fig. 8 Air Conditioning Control Panel ZD124

Effectivity: See TOC

21-11-00

CONFIG. 2
Pag. 15
Dec. 15/07

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


The caption BLEED O/TEMP in lighted switch (4) HF29 (HF30) comes on
automatically if the bleed air overtemperature switch HF43 (HF44)
operates.
The APU X BLEED lighted switch (5) HF71 controls the operation of the
bleed cross-over valve HF70. When pushed to on, the bleed cross-over
valve HF70 is electrically driven to the open position. The ON
caption comes on and the line bar symbol goes "in line" to indicate
that the bleed cross-over valve HF70 is open.
When the HP VALVES lighted switch (6) HF103 operates, the two HP
shut-off valves close. This gives an air conditioning supply with a
low ITT value.
K.

Overtemperature switch, HF47 (HF48), HF43 (HF44) (Fig. 9)


The duct overtemperature switch and bleed air overtemperature switch
are similar.
(1) Duct Overtemperature Switch, HF47 (HF48)
The duct overtemperature switch is a single-pole, normally open,
non-latching thermal switch with a bimetallic element. The unit
is installed in the compressor outlet duct between the ACM and
the secondary heat exchanger inlet. The switch is set to close at
an increasing temperature of 435 10 F and to open at a
decreasing temperature of 420 F minimum.
(2) Bleed Air Overtemperature Switch, HF43 (HF44)
The bleed air overtemperature switch is
open, non-latching, thermal switch with
switch is set to close at an increasing
and to open at a decreasing temperature

a single-pole, normally
a bimetallic element. The
temperature of 550 10F
of 535F minimum.

When air temperature increases to more than the set point, the
electrical switch closes to complete an electrical circuit which
automatically operates the HP shut-off valve and operates a
warning annunciator in the flight compartment.

Effectivity: See TOC

21-11-00

CONFIG. 2
Pag. 16
Dec. 15/07

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


Overtemperature Switch

CM1.21.11.00.0JO.00.02-00

Fig. 9 Overtemperature Switch


Cavity Overtemperature Switch

CM1.21.11.00.0KO.00.02-00

Fig. 10 Cavity Overtemperature Switch

Effectivity: See TOC

21-11-00

CONFIG. 2
Pag. 17
Dec. 15/07

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


L.

Cavity Overtemperature Switches, HF87, HF89 (HF88, HF90) (Fig. 10)


The cavity overtemperature switches HF87, HF89 (HF88, HF90) are
single pole, normally open, nonlatching thermal switches with a
bimetallic element. The units are installed in free air locations in
the forward part of the center wing. The switches set to 212 10F.

5. Operation (Fig. 11,

Fig. 11A, Fig. 12, Fig. 12A, Fig. 12B and

Fig. 13)

Operation of the system depends on the setting of selector switch HF25


(HF26):
A.

When the selector switch HF25 (HF26) on the air conditioning control
unit ZD124, is set to the OFF.
- The 28VDC from GEN BUS No. 1 ( GEN BUS No. 2) through circuit
breaker HF1 (HF2), the contacts of de-energized relays HF11 (HF12),
HF83 (HF84) on relays box ZD101 (ZD102), through BPU No. 1 (BPU No.
2) closes the pressure regulator and shut-off valve HF51 (HF52).
- The magnetic indicator HF19 (HF20) on the air conditioning control
unit is energized and the line bar symbol goes "cross line".

** On A/C: PRE.SB.235-30-14M, IB02 PRE.SB.235-30-14, AL04, QC02


PRE.SB.235-30-14
- The HP shut-off valve HF53 (HF54) is closed.
** On A/C: TK04A-04, TK04B-06, SERIES 100 POST.SB.235-30-14M
- The 28VDC from circuit breakers HF1 (HF2) through the contacts of
de-energized relays HF11 (HF12), HF13 (HF14), HF83 (HF84) of the
relays box ZD101 (ZD102), and the contacts of the relay HC81 (HC82)
(Ref.30-21-00, P. Block 1) and pressure switch HF41 (HF42) or HF101
(HF108) opens the HP shut-off valve HF53 (HF54).
The HP shut-off valve HF53 (HF54) lets the HP bleed air flow to the
related systems. But the pressure regulator and shut-off valve, HF51
(HF52), does not let the bleed air flow to the air cooling system.
** On A/C: CL02 POST.SB.235-30-14M, FR02 (09-13) POST.SB.235-30-14M,
POST.SB.235-30-14
- The 28VDC from circuit breakers HF1 (HF2) through the contacts of
de-energized relays HF11 (HF12), HF13 (HF14), HF83 (HF84) of the
relays box ZD101 (ZD102), and the contacts of the relay HC81 (HC82)
(Ref.30-21-00, P. Block 1) and pressure switch HF41 (HF42) or HF101
(HF102) opens the HP shut-off valve HF53 (HF54).

Effectivity: See TOC

21-11-00

CONFIG. 2
Pag. 18
Dec. 15/07

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


The HP shut-off valve HF53 (HF54) lets the HP bleed air flow to the
related systems. But the pressure regulator and shut-off valve, HF51
(HF52), does not let the bleed air flow to the air cooling system.
** On A/C: All
B.

When the selector switch HF25 (HF26) is set to ON:

** On A/C: PRE.SB.235-30-14M, IB02 PRE.SB.235-30-14, AL04, QC02


PRE.SB.235-30-14
- The 28VDC from circuit breakers HF1 (HF2) through the contacts of
de-energized relays HF11 (HF12), HF13 (HF14), HF83 (HF84) of the
relays box ZD101 (ZD102), contacts of the bleed air HP switch HF41
(HF42) opens the HP shut-off valve HF53 (HF54).
** On A/C: POST.SB.235-30-14M, TK04A-04, TK04B-06, POST.SB.235-30-14
- The HP shut-off valve HF53 (HF54) stays in the open position.
** On A/C: All
- The 28VDC is removed from the pressure regulator and shut-off valve
HF51 (HF52) which then opens.
- The 28VDC is removed from the magnetic indicator HF19 (HF20) and the
line bar symbol goes "in line".
The pressure regulator and shut-off valve HF51 (HF52) when open, lets the
bleed air flow to the cooling system.
The engine LP bleed air also flows to the cooling system through a venturi
and the pressure regulator and shut-off valve.
When the engine speed increases above FLIGHT IDLE, the system has a
sufficient supply with the LP bleed. Then, the HP bleed automatically
stops with the operation of the HP switch, HF41 (HF42). Thus, the HP
shut-off valve, HF53 (HF54), de-energizes and closes.
** On A/C: TK04A-04, TK04B-06, SERIES 100 POST.SB.235-30-14M
But, if the engine air inlet anti-icing system (Ref.30-21-00, P. Block 1)
operates, the valve HF53 (HF54) energizes and opens, through the contacts
of the energized relay HC81 (HC82) and LP switch HF101 (HF108).
** On A/C: CL02 POST.SB.235-30-14M, FR02 (09-13) POST.SB.235-30-14M,
POST.SB.235-30-14
But, if the engine air inlet anti-icing system (Ref.30-21-00, P. Block 1)
operates, the valve HF53 (HF54) energizes and opens, through the contacts
of the energized relay HC81 (HC82) and LP switch HF101 (HF102).

Effectivity: See TOC

21-11-00

CONFIG. 2
Pag. 19
Dec. 15/07

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


Compression System - Mechanical Schematic

CM1.21.11.00.0LO.00.02-02

Fig. 11 Compression System - Mechanical Schematic

Effectivity: PRE.SB.235-30-14M, IB02 PRE.SB.235-30-14


AL04, QC02 PRE.SB.235-30-14

21-11-00

CONFIG. 2
Pag. 20
Dec. 15/07

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

CM1.21.11.00.0LA.00.02-01

Compression System - Mechanical Schematic


Fig. 11A Compression System - Mechanical Schematic

Effectivity: POST.SB.235-30-14M, TK04A-04,


TK04B-06, POST.SB.235-30-14

21-11-00

CONFIG. 2
Pag. 21
Dec. 15/07

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


** On A/C: All
If the pressure goes over its upper limit in the delivery ducting to the
cooling system or an overtemperature condition in the refrigeration pack,
the overpressure switch, HF45 (HF46) or overtemperature switch HF47 (HF48)
will operate. When the overpressure switch and/or overtemperature switch
operate, relay HF81 (HF80) is energized and causes relay HF11 (HF12) to
energize.
When relay HF11 (HF12) energizes:
- The pressure regulator and shut-off valve HF51 (HF52) energizes and
closes. The magnetic indicator HF19 (HF20) goes " cross line ".
- The 28VDC is removed from the HP shut-off valve HF53 (HF54). The HP
shut-off valve then closes.
- The PCKG/BLEED lighted switch HF27 (HF28) comes on.
The relay HF11 (HF12) stays on with a 28VDC supply through the contacts of
the lighted switch, HF27 (HF28).
When pressure in the delivery ducting to the cooling system and/or
temperature in the compressor duct of the refrigeration pack goes back to
normal, the system can be reset to normal operation. The operation of the
PCKG BLEED switch HF27 (HF28) de-energizes relay HF11 (HF12) which causes:
- The 28VDC supply is removed from the pressure regulator and shut-off
valve HF51 (HF52) which de-energizes and opens. At the same time the
magnetic indicator HF19 (HF20) goes " in line ".
- The 28VDC supply is reconnected to the HP shut-off valve HF53 (HF54)
which opens.
- The PCKG BLEED caption on the lighted switch HF27 (HF28) goes off.
Similarly, if an overtemperature condition occurs in the center wing
cavities, the cavity overtemperature switches HF87, HF89 (HF88, HF90) will
operate, energizing relay HF83 (HF84).
If the bleed air overtemperature switch HF43 (HF44) operates, 28VDC is
sent to relay HF13 (HF14) and the BLEED HOT caption in the warning panel
WA5 (WA4) comes on.
When relay HF13 (HF14) energizes:
- The 28VDC supply is removed from the HP shut-off valve HF53 (HF54),
which closes to shut-off engine HP bleed air to the cooling system.
- The BLEED O/TEMP caption in the lighted switch HF29 (HF30) comes on,
with a dc supply from switch lighting system.

Effectivity: See TOC

21-11-00

CONFIG. 2
Pag. 22
Dec. 15/07

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


The relay HF13 (HF14) stays on with a 28VDC supply through the contacts of
the lighted switch, HF29 (HF30).
When the supply duct temperature to the cooling system goes back to normal
temperature, the system can be reset to normal operation. The operation of
the BLEED O/TEMP lighted switch HF29 (HF30) de-energizes the relay HF13
(HF14) which causes:
- The 28VDC supply goes to the HP shut-off valve, HF53 (HF54), which
opens.
- The BLEED O/TEMP caption on the lighted switch HF29 (HF30) goes off.
When switch HF103 is operated, 28VDC is removed from the HP shut-off valve
HF53 (HF54) which closes.
When the lighted switch HF71 is pushed to operate, the ON caption comes on
and 28VDC is supplied from circuit breaker HF1 through relay HF97 on the
air conditioning control unit ZD124. The relay HF97 is energized when the
Gust Lock Lever is up, then 28VDC is supplied through cross-over valve
HF70 which operates is a clockwise direction to open. the line bar symbol
of the lighted switch HF71 goes "in line" and cross-feed engine bleed air
is between the LH and RH air conditioning systems.
When switch HF71 is pushed to off, the ON caption goes off, the line bar
symbol goes "cross line". The bleed air cross-over valve HF70 operates in
a counterclockwise direction to close and shut-off the cross-feed of
engine bleed air to the LH and RH air conditioning systems.
6. Interfaces
The compression system has interfaces with these systems:
- Air Cooling System (Ref.21-51-00, P. Block 1).
- Electrical Load Distribution (Ref.24-50-00, P. Block 1).
** On A/C: POST.SB.235-30-14M, TK04A-04, TK04B-06, POST.SB.235-30-14
- Engine Air Inlet Anti-Icing System (Ref.30-21-00, P. Block 1).
** On A/C: All
- Flight Warning System (Ref.31-51-00, P. Block 1).
- Instruments and Panel Lighting (Ref.33-12-00, P. Block 1).

Effectivity: See TOC

21-11-00

CONFIG. 2
Pag. 23
Dec. 15/07

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


Compression System - Electrical Schematic

CM1.21.11.00.0MO.01.02-06

Fig. 12 Compression System - Electrical Schematic (Sheet 1 of 2)

Effectivity: PRE.SB.235-30-14M, IB02 PRE.SB.235-30-14,


AL04, QC02 PRE.SB.235-30-14

21-11-00

CONFIG. 2
Pag. 24
Dec. 15/07

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

CM1.21.11.00.0MO.02.02-07

Fig. 12 Compression System - Electrical Schematic (Sheet 2 of 2)

Effectivity: PRE.SB.235-30-14M, IB02 PRE.SB.235-30-14,


AL04, QC02 PRE.SB.235-30-14

21-11-00

CONFIG. 2
Pag. 25
Dec. 15/07

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

CM1.21.11.00.0MA.01.02-00

Compression System - Electrical Schematic


Fig. 12A Compression System - Electrical Schematic (Sheet 1 of 2)

Effectivity: TK04A-04, TK04B-06,


SERIES 100 POST.SB.235-30-14M

21-11-00

CONFIG. 2
Pag. 26
Dec. 15/07

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

CM1.21.11.00.0MA.02.02-01

Fig. 12A Compression System - Electrical Schematic (Sheet 2 of 2)

Effectivity: TK04A-04, TK04B-06,


SERIES 100 POST.SB.235-30-14M

21-11-00

CONFIG. 2
Pag. 27
Dec. 15/07

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

CM1.21.11.00.0MB.01.02-00

Compression System - Electrical Schematic


Fig. 12B Compression System - Electrical Schematic (Sheet 1 of 2)

Effectivity: CL02 POST.SB.235-30-14M,FR02(09-13)


POST.SB.235-30-14M,POST.SB.235-30-14

21-11-00

CONFIG. 2
Pag. 28
Dec. 15/07

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

CM1.21.11.00.0MB.02.02-00

Fig. 12B Compression System - Electrical Schematic (Sheet 2 of 2)

Effectivity: CL02 POST.SB.235-30-14M,FR02(09-13)


POST.SB.235-30-14M,POST.SB.235-30-14

21-11-00

CONFIG. 2
Pag. 29
Dec. 15/07

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


Crossover System - Electrical Schematic

CM1.21.11.00.0NO.00.02-00

Fig. 13 Crossover System - Electrical Schematic

Effectivity: POST.SB.235-30-14M, TK4A-04,


TK04B-06, POST.SB.235-30-14

21-11-00

CONFIG. 2
Pag. 30
Dec. 15/07

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


COMPRESSION SYSTEM
TROUBLESHOOTING

1. General
This section contains troubleshooting procedures for the air conditioning
compression system and should be used in conjunction with troubleshooting
procedures detailed in the cooling, distribution and temperature control
sections of this chapter.
A.
CROSS FEED FACILITY
INOPERATIVE.

SUPPORT EQUIPMENT REQUIRED:


- MULTIMETER
- SERVICING PLATFORM
- EXTERNAL POWER SUPPLY

ON OVERHEAD MISCELLANEOUS
CIRCUIT BREAKER PANEL, LOOK AT
AIR CONDIT CIRCUIT BREAKER HF1.

INVESTIGATE REASONS FOR OPEN


CIRCUIT BEFORE CLOSING CIRCUIT
BREAKER.

YES

IS CIRCUIT BREAKER OPEN?


NO
DISCONNECT ELECTRICAL CONNECTOR
AT CROSS-OVER VALVE, AND WITH
APU X BLEED SWITCH HF71 ON
FLIGHT COMPARTMENT OVERHEAD AIR
CONDITIONING PANEL ZD124 SET TO
ON, TEST POWER SUPPLY BETWEEN
PIN E AND PIN A AT CONNECTOR
HF70a.

REPLACE CROSS-OVER VALVE


ASSEMBLY HF70
(Ref. 21-11-16, P. Block 401).
YES

ARE RESULTS SATISFACTORY?

NO
1

Effectivity: See TOC

SEE NEXT PAGE

21-11-00

CONFIG. 2
Pag. 101
Sep. 01/94

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


1

FROM PREVIOUS PAGE

NO
DISCONNECT ELECTRICAL CONNECTOR
ZD124a. DO A CONTINUITY TEST
BETWEEN ELECTRICAL CONNECTORS
ZD124a (A) AND HF70a PIN 13-B,
14-A, 15-C AND 16-D.

YES

REPAIR OR REPLACE WIRING


BETWEEN AIR CONDITIONING
CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR ZD124a
AND CROSS-OVER VALVE CONNECTOR
HF70a
(Ref. 24-00-10, P. Block 401).

IS THERE AN OPEN CIRCUIT?

NO
ON AIR CONDITIONING CONTROL
UNIT, DO A CONTINUITY TEST
BETWEEN ZD124a WAFER A PINS 18
AND 14, AND BETWEEN PIN 16 AND
GROUND.

APU X BLEED ANNUNCIATOR/ SWITCH


HF71 IS SUSPECT.
YES

IS THERE AN OPEN CIRCUIT?

REPLACE ANNUNCIATOR/SWITCH HF71


OR AIR CONDITIONING CONTROL
UNIT ZD124
(Ref. 21-11-18, P. Block 401).

NO
ON ELECTRICAL CONNECTOR ZD124a
(A) PIN 18, TEST ELECTRICAL
SUPPLY FROM CIRCUIT BREAKER
HF1.

YES

REPAIR OR REPLACE WIRING


BETWEEN CIRCUIT BREAKER HF1 AND
AIR CONDITIONING CONTROL UNIT
CONNECTOR ZD124a
(Ref. 24-00-10, P. Block 401).

IS ELECTRICAL SUPPLY FAULTY?

Effectivity: See TOC

21-11-00

CONFIG. 2
Pag. 102
Sep. 01/94

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


B.
NO BLEED AIR SUPPLY FROM
COMPRESSION SYSTEM WITH
SELECTOR SWITCH HF25 (HF26) SET
TO ON,AND SWITCH HF103 SET TO
OFF POSITION.

SUPPORT EQUIPMENT REQUIRED:


- MULTIMETER
- SERVICING PLATFORM
- EXTERNAL POWER SUPPLY

INSPECT ANNUNCIATOR/SWITCH PCKG


BLEED HF27 (HF28).

DO TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURE
PARA C.

HAS ANNUNCIATOR/SWITCH PCKG


BLEED HF27 (HF28) COME ON?

YES

NO
INSPECT DUCTING BETWEEN ENGINE
CONNECTIONS AND AIR
CONDITIONING PACK.

REPAIR OR REPLACE
DUCTING/DUCTING CONNECTIONS.
YES

IS ANY LEAKAGE APPARENT?


NO
INSPECT BLEED OVERTEMPERATURE
ANNUNCIATOR/ SWITCH HF29
(HF30).
HAS OVERTEMPERATURE ANNUNCIATOR
SWITCH LIGHT COME ON?

YES

DO TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURE
DETAILED IN TEMPERATURE CONTROL
SYSTEM
(Ref. 21-61-00, P. Block 101).

NO
1

Effectivity: See TOC

SEE NEXT PAGE

21-11-00

CONFIG. 2
Pag. 103
Sep. 01/94

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


1

FROM PREVIOUS PAGE

NO
ON OVERHEAD MISCELLANEOUS
CIRCUIT BREAKER PANEL, LOOK AT
AIR CONDIT CIRCUIT BREAKER HF1
(HF2).

YES

INVESTIGATE REASONS FOR OPEN


CIRCUIT BEFORE CLOSING CIRCUIT
BREAKER.

IS CIRCUIT BREAKER OPEN?


NO
DISCONNECT ELECTRICAL CONNECTOR
AT HP SHUT-OFF VALVE HF53
(HF54) AND TEST POWER SUPPLY AT
CONNECTOR PIN A, AND EARTH
CONTINUITY AT PIN B.

YES

CONNECT ELECTRICAL CONNECTOR


AND OPERATE SELECTOR SWITCH
HF25 (HF26). MONITOR OPERATION
OF HP SHUT-OFF VALVE HF53
(HF54).

ARE RESULTS SATISFACTORY?


IS OPERATION SATISFACTORY?
NO

NO
REPLACE HP SHUT-OFF VALVE
ASSEMBLY HF53 (HF54)
(Ref. 21-11-13, P. Block 401).

NO
REPAIR OR REPLACE WIRING
BETWEEN HP SHUT-OFF VALVE HF53
(HF54) AND HP SWITCH HF41
(HF42)
(Ref. 24-00-10, P. Block 401).

DISCONNECT ELECTRICAL
CONNECTORS AT HP SWITCH HF41
(HF42) AND HP SHUT-OFF VALVE
HF53 (HF54).
AT HP SHUT-OFF VALVE CONNECTOR,
TEST EARTH CONTINUITY AT PIN B,
AND CONTINUITY FROM PIN A TO HP
SWITCH CONNECTOR PIN C.

YES

IS THERE AN OPEN CIRCUIT?


NO
1

Effectivity: See TOC

SEE NEXT PAGE

21-11-00

CONFIG. 2
Pag. 104
Sep. 01/94

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


1

FROM PREVIOUS PAGE

NO
TEST POWER SUPPLY TO PIN B OF
HP SWITCH HF41 (HF42)
CONNECTOR.

REPLACE HP SWITCH HF41 (HF42)


(Ref. 21-11-11, P. Block 401).
YES

IS SUPPLY SATISFACTORY?
NO
DISCONNECT ELECTRICAL CONNECTOR
ZD101f (ZD102e) AND TEST
CONTINUITY BETWEEN CONNECTOR
ZD101f (B1) PIN 1 (ZD102e (B)
PIN 7) AND HF41a (HF42a) PIN B.

YES

REPAIR OR REPLACE WIRING


BETWEEN RELAY BOX CONNECTOR
ZD101f (ZD102e) AND HP SWITCH
HF41 (HF42)
(Ref. 24-00-10, P. Block 401).

IS THERE AN OPEN CIRCUIT?

NO
DISCONNECT ELECTRICAL CONNECTOR
AT PRESSURE REGULATOR VALVE
HF51 (HF52) AND MAKE CERTAIN
THAT THERE IS NO SUPPLY AT
CONNECTOR HF51a (HF52a) PIN A.

PHYSICALLY INSPECT POSITION OF


BUTTERFLY VALVE IN PRESSURE
REGULATOR AND SHUT-OFF VALVE.
YES

IS BUTTERFLY VALVE OPEN?

ARE RESULTS SATISFACTORY?


NO

NO
REPLACE PRESSURE REGULATOR AND
SHUT-OFF VALVE ASSEMBLY HF51
(HF52)
(Ref. 21-11-15, P. Block 401).

Effectivity: See TOC

SEE NEXT PAGE

21-11-00

CONFIG. 2
Pag. 105
Sep. 01/94

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


1

FROM PREVIOUS PAGE

DISCONNECT BPU No. 1 (BPU No.


2) ELECTRICAL CONNECTOR PC3c
(PC2c) AND MAKE CERTAIN THAT
THERE IS NO SUPPLY AT CONNECTOR
PIN B.

YES

INVESTIGATE REASON FOR BPU No.


1 (BPU No. 2) CIRCUIT
PROTECTION SOLENOID OPERATION.
REPAIR FAULT
(Ref. 24-50-00, P. Block 1).

ARE RESULTS SATISFACTORY?


NO
TEST SUPPLY TO RELAY BOX
CONNECTOR ZD101f (A) (ZD102e
(A) AT PIN 2 (4).

YES

DEFECTIVE RELAY HF13 (HF14) OR


HF11 (HF12) IS SUSPECT. REPLACE
RELAY BOX ZD101 OR ZD102
(Ref. 24-58-14, P. Block 401).

IS SUPPLY SATISFACTORY?
NO
DISCONNECT ELECTRICAL CONNECTOR
ZD124a (ZD124b) AT AIR
CONDITIONING CONTROL UNIT ZD124
AND DO CONTINUITY TEST BETWEEN
ZD124a (B) PIN 13 (ZD124b) (B)
PIN 3) AND CONNECTOR ZD101f (A)
PIN 2 (ZD102e (A) PIN 4).

YES

REPAIR OR REPLACE WIRING


BETWEEN AIR CONDITIONING
CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR ZD124a
(ZD124b) AND RELAY BOX
CONNECTOR ZD101f(a) (ZD102e)
(A))
(Ref. 24-00-10, P. Block 401).

IS THERE AN OPEN CIRCUIT?

NO
1

Effectivity: See TOC

SEE NEXT PAGE

21-11-00

CONFIG. 2
Pag. 106
Sep. 01/94

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


1

FROM PREVIOUS PAGE

NO
TEST POWER SUPPLY AT CONNECTOR
ZD124a (B) PIN 14 (ZD124b) (B)
PIN 4.

YES

IS SUPPLY FAULTY?

REPAIR OR REPLACE WIRING


BETWEEN AIR CONDITIONING
CONTROL UNIT AND CIRCUIT
BREAKER, HF1 (HF2)
(Ref. 24-00-10, P. Block 401).

NO
SELECTOR SWITCH HF25 (HF26) IS
SUSPECT. REPLACE AIR
CONDITIONING CONTROL UNIT ZD124
(Ref. 21-11-18, P. Block 401).

ON AIR CONDITIONING CONTROL


UNIT ZD124, DO CONTINUITY TEST
BETWEEN CONNECTOR ZD124a (B)
PIN 13 AND 14 (ZD124b) (A) PIN
2 (B) PIN 4.
NOTE: MAKE CERTAIN THAT
SELECTOR HF25 (HF26) REMAINS
SET TO ON.

YES

IS THERE AN OPEN CIRCUIT?

C.
PCKG/BLEED ANNUNCIATOR/ SWITCH
HF27 (HF28) COMES ON WITH
SELECTOR SWITCH HF25 (HF26) SET
TO ON.

Effectivity: See TOC

SUPPORT EQUIPMENT REQUIRED:


- MULTIMETER
- SERVICING PLATFORM
- EXTERNAL POWER SUPPLY

SEE NEXT PAGE

21-11-00

CONFIG. 2
Pag. 107
Sep. 01/94

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


1

FROM PREVIOUS PAGE

PUSH ANNUNCIATOR/SWITCH HF27


(HF28) TO RESET SYSTEM.

SYSTEM IS NORMAL.
YES

DOES SYSTEM RESET


SATISFACTORILY?
NO
DISCONNECT RELAY BOX ELECTRICAL
CONNECTOR ZD101f (B1) (ZD102e
(B)) AND TEST FOR SHORT CIRCUIT
BETWEEN PINS 3-4, 3-7 (2-9,
2-6).

YES

IS THERE A SHORT CIRCUIT?

REPAIR OR REPLACE WIRING


BETWEEN ELECTRICAL CONNECTOR
ZD101f (ZD102e) AND O/TEMP
SWITCH HF47 (HF47) (HF48),
OVERPRESSURE SWITCH HF45 (HF46)
OR BLEED AIR O/TEMP SWITCH HF43
(HF44).

NO
DISCONNECT RELAY BOX ELECTRICAL
CONNECTOR ZD101f (A) (ZD102e
(A). TEST FOR SHORT CIRCUIT ON
RELAY BOX RECEPTACEL ZD101f(A)
(ZD102e(A)) BETWEEN PINS 5-1,
5-2 (6-4, 6-1).

REPLACE RELAY BOX ZD101 OR


ZD102
(Ref. 24-58-14, P. Block 401).
YES

IS THERE A SHORT CIRCUIT?

NO
1

Effectivity: See TOC

SEE NEXT PAGE

21-11-00

CONFIG. 2
Pag. 108
Sep. 01/94

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


1

FROM PREVIOUS PAGE

NO
DISCONNECT AIR CONDITIONING
CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR ZD124a
(ZD124b) TEST FOR SHORT CIRCUIT
ON RELAY BOX CONNECTOR BETWEEN
ZD101f(A) (ZD102e(A)) PINS 5-1,
5-2 (6-4, 6-1).

YES

REPAIR OR REPLACE WIRING


BETWEEN RELAY BOX ZD101 (ZD102)
AND AIR CONDITIONING CONTROL
UNIT ZD124)
(Ref. 24-00-10, P. Block 401).

IS THERE A SHORT CIRCUIT?


NO
REPLACE AIR CONDITIONING
CONTROL UNIT ZD124
(Ref. 21-11-18, P. Block 401).
D.
LOW BLEED AIR SUPPLY FROM
COMPRESSION SYSTEM WITH APU X
BLEED SWITCH HF71 OFF AND
SELECTOR SWITCH HF25 (HF26) SET
TO ON.

SUPPORT EQUIPMENT REQUIRED:


- ACCESS PLATFORM
- MULTIMETER
- EXTERNAL POWER SUPPLY

INSPECT DUCTING AND CONNECTIONS


FOR SIGNS OF LEAKAGE.

INVESTIGATE REASONS FOR


LEAKAGE. REPAIR OR REPLACE
DUCTING AND CONNECTIONS.

ARE ANY LEAKS APPARENT?

YES

NO
1

Effectivity: See TOC

SEE NEXT PAGE

21-11-00

CONFIG. 2
Pag. 109
Sep. 01/94

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


1

FROM PREVIOUS PAGE

NO
INSPECT HP SHUT-OFF VALVE HF53
(HF54) VISUAL INDICATOR.
DOES INDICATOR SHOW THAT
BUTTERFLY VALVE IS STUCK
PARTIALLY OPEN?

DISCONNECT HP SHUT-OFF VALVE


HF53 (HF54) ELECTRICAL
CONNECTOR. TEST ELECTRICAL
SUPPLY ON HF53a (HF54a) PIN A
AND GROUND ON PIN B.

REPLACE HP SHUT-OFF VALVE HF53


(HF54)
(Ref. 21-11-13, P. Block 401).
YES

YES

RECONNECT HP SHUT-OFF VALVE


HF53 (HF54) ELECTRICAL
CONNECTOR. OPERATE AIR
CONDITIONING CONTROL UNIT ZD124
SELECTOR SWITCH HF25 (HF26)
SEVERAL TIMES.

ARE RESULTS SATISFACTORY?


DOES HP SHUT-OFF VALVE HF53
(HF54) VISUAL INDICATOR SHOW
THAT BUTTERFLY VALVE MOVES FROM
CLOSED POSITION.
NO

NO
SWITCH OFF AIR CONDITIONING
SYSTEM AND SHUT DOWN ENGINE.
EMOVE FILTER FROM HP SHUT-OFF
VALVE HF53 (HF54).
IS FILTER CLEAN?
NO
CLEAN OR REPLACE FILTER, OR
REPLACE HP SHUT-OFF VALVE HF53
(HF54)
(Ref. 21-11-13, P. Block 401).

Effectivity: See TOC

SEE NEXT PAGE

21-11-00

CONFIG. 2
Pag. 110
Sep. 01/94

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


1

FROM PREVIOUS PAGE

NO
DISCONNECT ELECTRICAL CONNECTOR
AT HP SWITCH HF41 (HF42). AT HP
SHUT-OFF VALVE HF53 (HF54)
ELECTRICAL CONNECTOR, TEST
GROUND CONTINUITY ON PIN B, AND
CONTINUITY FROM PIN A TO HP
SWITCH HF41 (HF42) ELECTRICAL
CONNECTOR PIN C.

REPAIR OR REPLACE WIRING


BETWEEN HP SHUT-OFF VALVE HF53
(HF54) AND HF SWITCH HF41
(HF42).
YES

IS THERE AN OPEN CIRCUIT?

NO
TEST POWER SUPPLY TO PIN B OF
HP SWITCH HF41 (HF42)
CONNECTOR.

REPLACE HP SWITCH HF41 (HF42)


(Ref. 21-11-11, P. Block 401).
YES

IS SUPPLY SATISFACTORY?
NO
DISCONNECT RELAY BOX ELECTRICAL
CONNECTOR ZD101f (ZD102e) AND
TEST CONTINUITY BETWEEN ZD101f
(B1) PIN 1 (ZD102e (B) PIN 7)
AND HP SWITCH CONNECTOR HF41a
(HF42a) PIN B.

YES

REPAIR OR REPLACE WIRING


BETWEEN RELAY BOX CONNECTOR
ZD101f (B1) (ZD102e (B) AND HP
SWITCH SWITCH HF41 (HF42)
(Ref. 24-00-10, P. Block 401).

IS THERE AN OPEN CIRCUIT?

NO
1

Effectivity: See TOC

SEE NEXT PAGE

21-11-00

CONFIG. 2
Pag. 111
Sep. 01/94

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


1

FROM PREVIOUS PAGE

NO
TEST SUPPLY TO RELAY BOX
CONNECTOR ZD101f (A) PIN 2
(ZD102e (A) PIN 4).

YES

RELAY HF11 (HF12) OR HF13


(HF14) IS SUSPECT. REPLACE
RELAY BOX ZD101 OR ZD102
(Ref. 24-58-14, P. Block 401).

IS SUPPLY SATISFACTORY?
NO
DISCONNECT ELECTRICAL CONNECTOR
ZD124a (ZD104b) AT AIR
CONDITIONING CONTROL UNIT AND
DO CONTINUITY TEST BETWEEN
ZD124a (B) PIN 13 (ZD124b (B)
PIN 3) AND RELAY BOX CONNECTOR
ZD101f (A) PIN 2 (ZD102e(A) PIN
4).

YES

REPAIR OR REPLACE WIRING


BETWEEN AIR CONDITIONING
CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR ZD124a
(ZD124b) AND RELAY BOX
CONNECTOR ZD101f(A) (ZD102e
(A))
(Ref. 24-00-10, P. Block 401).

IS THERE AN OPEN CIRCUIT?


NO
INSPECT LP CHECK VALVE.
IS VALVE STUCK OPEN?

YES

REPLACE LP CHECK VALVE


(Ref. 21-11-14, P. Block 401).

NO
1

Effectivity: See TOC

SEE NEXT PAGE

21-11-00

CONFIG. 2
Pag. 112
Sep. 01/94

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


1

FROM PREVIOUS PAGE

NO
INSPECT PRESSURE REGULATOR AND
SHUT-OFF VALVE HF51 (HF52).
IS BUTTERFLY VALVE STUCK IN
PARTIALLY OPEN POSITION?

YES

REPLACE PRESSURE REGULATOR AND


SHUT-OFF VALVE HF51 (HF52)
(Ref. 21-11-15, P. Block 401).

NO
SYSTEMATICALLY INSPECT DUCTING
FROM ENGINE HP CONNECTION TO
CROSS-OVER VALVE INTERCONNECT
DUCT FOR BLOCKAGE. INVESTIGATE
REASONS FOR ANY DEFECT FOUND.

Effectivity: See TOC

21-11-00

CONFIG. 2
Pag. 113
Sep. 01/94

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

Effectivity: See TOC

21-11-00

CONFIG. 2
Pag. 114
Sep. 01/94

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


COMPRESSION SYSTEM
MAINTENANCE PRACTICES
WARNING:

YOU MUST OBEY ALL THE SAFETY PROCEDURES WHEN YOU DO WORK IN OR NEAR
A FUEL TANK (Ref.28-10-00, P. Block 301).IF YOU DO NOT OBEY THE
SAFETY PROCEDURES THERE RISK OF:
- DEATH OR INJURY TO PERSONS
- DAMAGE TO THE AIRCRAFT OR TO OTHER EQUIPMENT.

WARNING:

PUT WARNING NOTICES IN THE FLIGHT COMPARTMENT BEFORE YOU START THE
MAINTENANCE WORK ON THE FUEL SYSTEM OR ITS RELATED COMPONENTS. THIS
WILL PREVENT THE ACCIDENTAL CONNECTION OF ONBOARD EQUIPMENT.

WARNING:

BEFORE POWER IS SUPPLIED TO THE AIRCRAFT, MAKE SURE THAT THE


ELECTRICAL CIRCUITS UPON WHICH WORK IS PROGRESS ARE ISOLATED.

1. Reason for the Job


To replace the seal of the engine air bleed connections.
NOTE:

This maintenance procedure (or part of) is a Fuel Tank Safety


critical item, and classified as ALI (Airworthiness Limitation
Item) item by the aircraft OEM. The contents of the Fuel Tank
Safety critical section(s) must be maintained to ensure that
unsafe conditions do not develop by maintenance. Strictly adhere
to the procedures mentioned in the Fuel Tank Safety critical
section(s).

2. Equipment and Material


ITEM

DESIGNATION

A.

ITEM 12-00-10

Servicing Platform, 3m (10ft)

B.

Standard Tool

Warning Notices

C.

CAN67395-24

Seal

D.

CAN67395-32

Seal

Reference Procedures:
- 06-41-54,
- 06-41-57,
- 28-00-00,
- 28-10-00,

P.
P.
P.
P.

Block
Block
Block
Block

Effectivity: See TOC

1
1
201
301

- Access - Nacelles
- Access - Wings
- Fuel
- Fuel Storage

21-11-00

CONFIG. 1
Pag. 201
Dec. 15/10

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


3. Procedure (Fig. 201)
A.

Job Set-Up
(1) Put the warning notices in the correct position.
(2) Put the servicing platform in position.
(3) Remove the neccesary access panels to get access to the bleed air
system pipes.

** On A/C:

POST.SB.235-21-18/18M

(4) If required, on the center wing area, remove the necessary


thermal insulation to get access to the pipe connections of the
bleed air system.
** On A/C: All
B.

Removal (Fig. 201)


(1) Get access to the affected connection of the engine air bleed
pipe.
NOTE:

CDCCL - Refer to the task: Airworthiness Limitation


Precautions (Ref.28-00-00, P. Block 201), for important
information on Critical Design Configuration Control
Limitations (CDCCLs).

(2) Remove the clamp (4).


(3) Remove the bushing (3).
(4) Remove and discard the seal (1) (CAN67395-24 or CAN67395-32).
C.

Preparation of the Replacement Component (Fig. 201)


(1) Examine the new seal (1) (CAN67395-24 or CAN67395-32) for dust,
dirt or any signs of damage.

D.

Preparation for the Installation (Fig. 201)


(1) Examine the clamp (4), the bushing (3) and the end of the pipes
(2) for dust, dirt or any signs of damage.

Effectivity: See TOC

21-11-00

CONFIG. 1
Pag. 202
Dec. 15/10

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


E.

Installation (Fig. 201)


(1) Install the new seal (1) (CAN67395-24 or CAN67395-32) in its
correct position according to detail A of the Fig. 201.
(2) Install the bushing (3) on one end of the pipe (2).
(3) Align the end of the pipes (2) and put the bushing (3) in the
correct position.
(4) Put the clamp (4) around the bushing (3) and close it.
NOTE:

If the bushing (3) is correct installed, you can close


the clamp (4) easily.

CAUTION:

F.

MAKE SURE THAT THE CLAMP (4) CAN ROTATE FREELY ABOVE
THE BUSHING (3), IF NOT A DAMAGE CAN OCCUR ON THE
ENGINE AIR BLEED CONNECTIONS.

Close-Up

** On A/C: POST.SB.235-21-18/18M
(1) If required, on the center wing area, install the necessary
thermal insulation on the pipe connections of the bleed air
system.
** On A/C: All
(2) Install the neccesary access panels previously removed
(Ref.06-41-54, P. Block 1) and (Ref.06-41-57, P. Block 1).
(3) Remove the servicing platform.
(4) Remove the warning notices.
(5) Make sure that the work area is clean and clear of tools and
miscellaneous equipment.

Effectivity: See TOC

21-11-00

CONFIG. 1
Pag. 203
Dec. 15/10

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


Installation of the Seal on the pipe connections of the Bleed Air System

CM1.21.11.00.2AO.00.01-00

Fig. 201 Installation of the Seal on the pipe connections of the Bleed Air
System

Effectivity: See TOC

21-11-00

CONFIG. 1
Pag. 204
Dec. 15/10

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


COMPRESSION SYSTEM
ADJUSTMENT/TEST
WARNING:

BEFORE POWER IS SUPPLIED TO THE AIRCRAFT, MAKE SURE THAT ELECTRICAL


CIRCUITS UPON WHICH WORK IS IN PROGRESS ARE ISOLATED.

1. Compression System Operational Test


A.

Equipment and Materials


ITEM

DESIGNATION

(1)

Warning Notices

(2)

ITEM 24-40-01 or
ITEM 24-40-02

Ground Power Unit (GPU)

Referenced Procedures:
- 24-40-00, P. Block 201
- 71-00-00, P. Block 501
B.

- External Power
- Powerplant

Procedure
(1) Job Set-Up
(a) Put warning notices in and around aircraft telling personnel
that test is in progress.
(b) Connect GPU and switch on aircraft electrical system
(Ref. 24-40-00, P. Block 201) .
(c) Close these circuit breakers:
PANEL

SERVICE

FIN

MISCELLANEOUS

AIR CONDITIONING

HF1 (HF2)

** On A/C: POST.SB.235-30-14M, FR03 (03-99), TK04A-04, TK04B-06,


POST.SB.235-30-14
MISCELLANEOUS

L (R) ENG ANTI-ICE


INLET

HC1 (HC2)

** On A/C: All

Effectivity: See TOC

21-11-00

CONFIG. 2
Pag. 501
Dec. 15/07

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


(d) On the control quadrant, set the GUST LOCK lever to the
locked position.
(2) Test
ACTION

RESULT

(a) Do engine start procedure


using No. 2 engine and
propeller braking facility
(Ref. 71-00-00, P. Block 501)
NOTE:

For compression system functional test on components


related only between LH engine and crossover valve, do
engine start procedure on No. 1 engine.

(b) On AIR CONDITIONING control


RIGHT ENGINE bleed air
unit, ZD124, set RIGHT ENGINE magnetic indicator goes "in
bleed air selector switch to
line"
ON.
(c) Push and release APU X BLEED
annunciator switch.

APU X BLEED annunciator comes


on.
Passenger and flight
compartment conditioned
airflow starts.

(d) Push and release HP VALVES


switch, HF103.

The caption CLSD comes on.

(e) Push and release HP VALVES


switch, HF103.

The caption CLSD goes off.

(f) Push and release APU X BLEED


annunciator switch.

The APU X BLEED annunciator


goes off.

Effectivity: See TOC

21-11-00

CONFIG. 2
Pag. 502
Dec. 15/07

ACTION

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


RESULT

** On A/C: TK04A-04, TK04B-06,


POST.SB.235-30-14M,
POST.SB.235-30-14M,
POST.SB.235-30-14M,

CLO1 POST.SB.235-30-14M, IR01


KR01 POST.SB.235-30-14M, TK01 (08-30)
TK04 POST.SB.235-30-14M, TK04A (01-03)
TK04B (01-05) POST.SB.235-30-14M

(g) On the control quadrant:


- Set the GUST LOCK lever to
the unlocked position

The HP shut-off valve HF53


(HF54) closes. You sense that
the airflow decreases through
the air outlets.

- Set the power lever lightly


above the FLIGHT IDLE
position.
(h) On the ANTI-ICE control unit,
ZD130, push the ON/FAIL L AIR
INLET lighted switch, HC3 or
ON/FAIL R AIR INLET lighted
switch, HC4.

The HP shut-off valve HF53


(HF54) opens. You sense that
the airflow increases through
the air outlets.

** On A/C: FR03 (03-99), AL01 POST.SB.235-30-14M, AL02 POST.SB.235-30-14M,


AL03 POST.SB.235-30-14M, AL05 POST.SB.235-30-14M, AL06
POST.SB.235-30-14M, CL02 POST.SB.235-30-14M, TH01
POST.SB.235-30-14M, OM01 POST.SB.235-30-14M, EA02
POST.SB.235-30-14M, FR01 POST.SB.235-30-14M, FR02
POST.SB.235-30-14M, FR03 (01-02) POST.SB.235-30-14M, GA01
POST.SB.235-30-14M, NG01 POST.SB.235-30-14M, MJ01
POST.SB.235-30-14M, MS04 POST.SB.235-30-14M, PA01
POST.SB.235-30-14M, TK02 POST.SB.235-30-14M, TK03
POST.SB.235-30-14M, TK01(01-07) POST.SB.235-30-14M, QC02
POST.SB.235-30-14, IB02 POST.SB.235-30-14
(g) On the control quadrant:
- Set the GUST LOCK lever to
the unlocked position

The HP shut-off valve HF53


(HF54) closes. You sense that
the airflow decreases through
the air outlets.

- Set the power lever lightly


above the FLIGHT IDLE
position.
(h) On the AIR INLET ANTI-ICE
control unit, ZD130, set the
L ENG (R ENG) switch, HC3
(HC4), to the L ENG (R ENG)
position.

The HP shut-off valve HF53


(HF54) opens. You sense that
the airflow increases through
the air outlets.

** On A/C: All

Effectivity: See TOC

21-11-00

CONFIG. 2
Pag. 503
Dec. 15/07

ACTION

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


RESULT

(j) Set RIGHT ENGINE bleed air


selector switch, HF26, to
OFF.

The RIGHT ENGINE bleed air


magnetic indicator HF20 goes
"cross line".
Conditioned airflow stops.

(3) Close-Up
(a) Do shut down procedure (Ref. 71-00-00, P. Block 501).
(b) Remove warning notices.
(c) Make sure that the work area is clean and clear of tools and
miscellaneous equipment.
(d) Switch off aircraft electrical system and disconnect GPU
(Ref. 24-40-00, P. Block 201) .

Effectivity: See TOC

21-11-00

CONFIG. 2
Pag. 504
Dec. 15/07

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


2. Compression System Functional Test
A.

Equipment and Materials


ITEM

DESIGNATION

(1)

Warning Notices

(2)

ITEM 24-40-01 or
ITEM 24-40-02

Ground Power Unit (GPU)

(3)

Servicing Platform, 2 m (6,5 ft)

(4)

ITEM 20-00-01

Multimeter

Referenced Procedures:
- 24-40-00, P. Block 201
B.

- External Power

Procedure
(1) Job Set-Up
(a) Put warning notices in and around aircraft telling personnel
that test is in progress.
(b) Connect GPU and switch on aircraft electrical system
(Ref. 24-40-00, P. Block 201) .
(c) Close the following circuit breakers:
PANEL

SERVICE

FIN

L MISCELLANEOUS

INS. LTG

LF1, LF3

R MISCELLANEOUS

INS. LTG

LF4, LF6

BATTERY BUS 1

WARNING 1

QB47

BATTERY BUS 1

WARNING SYS.

WA1

BATTERY BUS 2

WARNING 1

QB46

BATTERY BUS 2

WARNING SYS.

WA2

MISCELLANEOUS

AIR CONDITIONING

HF1

MISCELLANEOUS

AIR CONDITIONING

HF2

Effectivity: See TOC

21-11-00

CONFIG. 2
Pag. 505
Dec. 15/07

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


(2) Test
ACTION

RESULT

(a) On Air Conditioning control


panel, set selector switch
HF25 (HF26) to ON.

On Air Conditioning control


panel, magnetic indicator
HF19 (HF20) goes "in line".

(b) Push and release APU X BLEED


switch, HF71.

On APU X BLEED switch, the


caption ON comes on and line
bar symbol goes "in line".

(c) Push and release HP VALVES


switch, HF103.

On CLSD switch, HF103, the


caption comes on.

(d) Push and release again switch The caption CLSD goes off.
HF103.
(e) Open circuit breaker HF1
(HF2).
(f) Disconnect the electrical
connector HF43a (HF44a) from
bleed/overtemperature switch
and install shorting link
across pins A and B.
(g) Close circuit breaker HF1
(HF2).

The caption BLEED/0.TEMP on


switch HF29 (HF30) comes on.
BLEED HOT annunciator on LH
warning display comes on.

(h) Open circuit breaker HF1


(HF2).

BLEED HOT annunciator on LH


warning display goes off. The
caption BLEED/O.TEMP on
switch HF29 (HF30) goes off.

(j) Remove shorting link from


connector HF43a (HF44a) and
reconnect to switch HF43
(HF44).
(k) Close circuit breaker HF1
(HF2).
(l) Push switch HF29 (HF30).

Effectivity: See TOC

21-11-00

CONFIG. 2
Pag. 506
Dec. 15/07

ACTION

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


RESULT

(m) Open circuit breaker HF1


(HF2).
(n) Disconnect the electrical
connector HF45a (HF46a) from
BLEED O/PRESS switch and
install shorting link across
pin A and B.
(p) Close circuit breaker HF1
(HF2).

The caption PCKG/BLEED on


switch HF27 (HF28) comes on.

(q) Open circuit breaker HF1


(HF2).
(r) Disconnect the electrical
connector HF53a (HF54a),
HF51a (HF52a) and install
multimeter between pin A and
ground of each connector.
(s) Close circuit breaker HF1
(HF2).

There is no supply at
connector HF53a (HF54a).
There is supply at connector
HF51a (HF52a). The line bar
symbol on magnetic indicator
HF19 (HF20) goes "cross
line".

(t) Open circuit breaker HF1


(HF2).
(u) Remove shorting link from
connector HF45a (HF46a) and
reconnect connector.
(v) Close circuit breaker HF1
(HF2).

Effectivity: See TOC

The caption PCKG/BLEED on


switch HF27 (HF28) goes off.

21-11-00

CONFIG. 2
Pag. 507
Dec. 15/07

ACTION

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


RESULT

(w) Push and release switch HF27


(HF28).

There is supply at connector


HF53a (HF54a), between pin A
and ground. There is no
supply at connector HF51a
(HF52a), between pin A and
ground. The line bar symbol
of indicator HF19 (HF20) goes
"in line".

(x) Repeat steps (m) to (w) with


connector HF47a (HF48a).
(y) Remove multimeter and
reconnect connectors HF51a
(HF52a), HF53a (HF54a).
(z) Open circuit breaker HF1
(HF2).
(aa) Disconnect connectors HF87a
(HF88a), HF89a (HF90a) and
install shorting link across
pins A and B of each
connector.
(bb) Close circuit breaker HF1
(HF2).

On LH warning display WA5,


the caption WING OVERHEAT
comes on.

(cc) Open circuit breakers HF1


(HF2).
(dd) Reconnect connector HF87a
(HF88a), HF89a (HF90a).
(ee) Do operational test
(Ref. 21-11-00, P. Block 501)

Effectivity: See TOC

21-11-00

CONFIG. 2
Pag. 508
Dec. 15/07

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


(3) Close-Up
(a) Remove warning notices.
(b) Make sure that the work area is clean and clear of tools and
miscellaneous equipment.
(c) Switch off aircraft electrical system and disconnect GPU
(Ref. 24-40-00, P. Block 201) .

Effectivity: See TOC

21-11-00

CONFIG. 2
Pag. 509
Dec. 15/07

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

Effectivity: See TOC

21-11-00

CONFIG. 2
Pag. 510
Dec. 15/07

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


COMPRESSION SYSTEM
INSPECTION/CHECK
WARNING:

YOU MUST OBEY ALL THE SAFETY PROCEDURES WHEN YOU DO WORK IN OR NEAR
A FUEL TANK (Ref.28-10-00, P. Block 301). IF YOU DO NOT OBEY THE
SAFETY PROCEDURES THERE A RISK OF:
- DEATH OR INJURY TO PERSONS
- DAMAGE TO THE AIRCRAFT OR TO OTHER EQUIPMENT.

WARNING:

PUT WARNING NOTICES IN THE FLIGHT COMPARTMENT BEFORE YOU START THE
MAINTENANCE WORK ON THE FUEL SYSTEM OR ITS RELATED COMPONENTS. THIS
WILL PREVENT THE ACCIDENTAL CONNECTION OF ONBOARD EQUIPMENT.

WARNING:

BEFORE POWER IS SUPPLIED TO THE AIRCRAFT, MAKE SURE THAT ELECTRICAL


CIRCUITS UPON WHICH WORK IS IN PROGRESS ARE ISOLATED.

1. Inspection of Bleed Air System


A.

Reason of the Job


- Inspect the engine bleed air system gaskets for a premature
deterioration which results in air system leaks.
- To do the 21.10.00.06 MRB task, "Operational check of High and Low
Pressure Bleed System by visually inspecting for leaks the system
ducts."
- To do the 75.002 MRB task, "Check for leaks engine high and low
pressure bleed system ducts".
NOTE:

This maintenance procedure (or part of) is a Fuel Tank Safety


critical item, and classified as ALI (Airworthiness
Limitation Item) item by the aircraft OEM. The contents of
the Fuel Tank Safety critical section(s) must be maintained
to ensure that unsafe conditions do not develop by
maintenance. Strictly adhere to the procedures mentioned in
the Fuel Tank Safety critical section(s).

Effectivity: See TOC

21-11-00

Pag. 601
Dec. 15/10

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


B.

Equipment and Material


ITEM

DESIGNATION

(1)

Warning Notices

(2)

Servicing Platform, 3 m (10 ft)

(3)

Aluminum Paper

Referenced Procedures:
- 06-41-54,
- 06-41-57,
- 21-11-00,
- 28-00-00,
- 28-10-00,
- 71-00-00,
C.

P.
P.
P.
P.
P.
P.

Block
Block
Block
Block
Block
Block

1
1
201
201
301
501

- Access - Nacelles
- Access - Wings
- Compression System
- Fuel
- Fuel Storage
- Powerplant

Procedure (Fig. 601) and (Fig. 601A)


(1) Job Set-Up
(a) Put the warning notices in flight compartment telling
personnel not to ground run engines.
(b) Put the servicing platform in position.
(c) Remove the access panels 413AL (423AL), 413AR (423AR) and
414AT (424AT) (Ref. 06-41-54, P. Block 1), and the access
panels 911AT and 941AL (942AR) (Ref.06-41-57, P. Block 1)
to get access to the bleed air system pipes.

** On A/C: SERIES 10
(d) Remove the access panels 413BL (423BL) and 413BR (423BR)
(Ref. 06-41-54, P. Block 1) to get access to the bleed air
system pipes.
** On A/C: S/N 001062
(e) Remove the access panels 911BT (912AT)
(Ref.06-41-57, P. Block 1) to get access to the bleed air
system pipes.
** On A/C: POST.SB.235-21-18/18M
(f) On the center wing area, remove the necessary thermal
insulation to get access to the pipe connections of the
bleed air system.

Effectivity: See TOC

21-11-00

Pag. 602
Dec. 15/10

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


** On A/C: All
(g) Place aluminum paper warping up the pipe connections of the
bleed air system (in both engines), pressing it at the ends
to avoid paper detachment without external actions.
(h) Close the access panels previously removed
(Ref. 06-41-54, P. Block 1) and (Ref.06-41-57, P. Block 1).
(j) Start both engines (Ref. 71-00-00, P. Block 501).
(k) Operate aircraft air conditioning system during 15 minutes.
(l) Cut off air conditioning and shut down engines.
(2) Inspection/Check
(a) Open access panels and check if aluminium paper has blown
out or there is any indication of air leakage.
NOTE:

CDCCL - Refer to the task: Airworthiness Limitation


Precautions (Ref.28-00-00, P. Block 201), for
important information on Critical Design
Configuration Control Limitations (CDCCLs).

(b) In this case, remove the affected connection and replace the
gasket using a new one (Ref.21-11-00, P. Block 201).

Effectivity: See TOC

21-11-00

Pag. 603
Dec. 15/10

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


Compression System - Pipe Connections to be Checked

CM1.21.11.00.6AO.00.00-02

Fig. 601 Compression System - Pipe Connections to be Checked

Effectivity: SERIES 10

21-11-00

Pag. 604
Dec. 15/10

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

CM1.21.11.00.6AA.00.00-01

Compression System - Pipe Connections to be Checked


Fig. 601A Compression System - Pipe Connections to be Checked

Effectivity: SERIES 100, SERIES 200, SERIES 300

21-11-00

Pag. 605
Dec. 15/10

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


(3) Close-Up
(a) Remove aluminium paper previously placed.
** On A/C: POST.SB.235-21-18/18M
(b) Install the thermal insulation on the pipe connections of
the bleed air system previously removed.
** On A/C: All
(c) Make sure that the work area is clean and clear of tools and
miscellaneous equipment.
(d) Install the access panels previously removed
(Ref. 06-41-54, P. Block 1) and (Ref.06-41-57, P. Block 1).
(e) Remove servicing platform.
(f) Remove warning notices.

Effectivity: See TOC

21-11-00

Pag. 606
Dec. 15/10

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


BLEED AIR HIGH PRESSURE SWITCH,

HF41 (HF42)

REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
WARNING:

BEFORE POWER IS SUPPLIED TO THE AIRCRAFT, MAKE SURE THAT ELECTRICAL


CIRCUITS UPON WHICH WORK IS IN PROGRESS ARE ISOLATED.

1. Reason for the Job


To remove and install the bleed air high pressure switch, HF41 (HF42),
when it is unserviceable or to get access to other components.
2. Equipment and Material
ITEM

DESIGNATION

A.

ITEM 12-00-01

Servicing Platform, 2 m (6,5 ft)

B.

ITEM 20-15-01

Circuit Breaker Safety Clips and Tags

C.

MS9385-04

Preformed Packing

D.

Standard Tool

Warning Notice

E.

Standard Tool

Pipe Blanks

F.

Standard Tool

Protective Caps

Referenced Procedures:
- 06-41-54, P. Block 1
- 20-21-00, P. Block 1
- 21-11-00, P. Block 501

- Access Provision - Nacelles


- Standard Torques
- Compression System

3. Procedure
A.

Job Set-Up
(1) Put warning notices in flight compartment to tell personnel not
to ground run engines.
(2) Open safety clip and tag with ITEM 20-15-01 these circuit
breakers:
PANEL

SERVICE

FIN

BATTERY BUS 1

START

KA1

Effectivity: See TOC

21-11-11

CONFIG. 2
Pag. 401
Dec. 01/09

PANEL

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


SERVICE

MISCELLANEOUS

AIR CONDITIONING

FIN

HF1 (HF2)

(3) Put servicing platform ITEM 12-00-01 in the correct position.


(4) Remove access panel 413AL (423AL) to get access to high pressure
switch (Ref. 06-41-54, P. Block 1).
B.

Removal (Fig. 401)


(1) Disconnect electrical connector (10) and install protective caps
to connector (10) and receptacle (9).
(2) Disconnect sensing pipe nut (1).
(3) Remove retaining screws (8) and washers (7) and remove switch
assembly (6) and union (2) from mounting bracket (4).
(4) Install blank to sensing pipe nut (1).
(5) Remove union (2) switch orifice (5). Remove and discard preformed
packing MS9385-04 (3) and install blank on exposed switch orifice
(5).

C.

Preparation of Replacement Component (Fig. 401)


(1) Install new performed packing MS9385-04 (3) on union (2).
(2) Remove blank from switch orifice (5) and connect union (2) to
switch orifice (5). Torque the union (2) to the standard value
(Ref.20-21-00, P. Block 1).

D.

Preparation for the Installation (Fig. 401)


(1) Make sure that the mating surfaces are clean.

E.

Installation (Fig. 401)


(1) Install switch assembly (6) on mounting bracket (4) with washers
(7) and screws (8). Torque the screws (8) to the standard value
(Ref.20-21-00, P. Block 1).
(2) Remove blank and connect sensing pipe nut (1) to union (2).
Torque the pipe nut (1) to the standard value
(Ref.20-21-00, P. Block 1).

Effectivity: See TOC

21-11-11

CONFIG. 2
Pag. 402
Dec. 01/09

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


High Pressure Switch

CM1.21.11.11.4AO.00.02-00

Fig. 401 High Pressure Switch

Effectivity: See TOC

21-11-11

CONFIG. 2
Pag. 403
Dec. 01/09

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


(3) Remove protective caps and connect electrical connector (10) to
receptacle (9).
F.

Test
(1) Remove the safety clip and tag ITEM 20-15-01 and close these
circuit breakers:
PANEL

SERVICE

FIN

BATTERY BUS 1

START

KA1

MISCELLANEOUS

AIR CONDITIONING

HF1 (HF2)

(2) Do adjustment/test procedure (Ref. 21-11-00, P. Block 501) for


the Compression System and inspect installation for leaks.
G.

Close-Up
(1) Install access panel 413AL (423AL) (Ref. 06-41-54, P. Block 1).
(2) Remove servicing platform ITEM 12-00-01.
(3) Remove warning notices.
(4) Make sure that work area is clean and clear of tools and
miscellaneous equipment.

Effectivity: See TOC

21-11-11

CONFIG. 2
Pag. 404
Dec. 01/09

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


HIGH PRESSURE SHUT-OFF VALVE,

HF53 (HF54)

REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
WARNING:

BEFORE POWER IS SUPPLIED TO THE AIRCRAFT, MAKE SURE THAT ELECTRICAL


CIRCUITS UPON WHICH WORK IS IN PROGRESS ARE ISOLATED.

1. Equipment and Materials


ITEM

DESIGNATION

A.

ITEM 20-15-01

Circuit Breaker Safety Clips and Tags

B.

Warning Notices

C.

Servicing Platform

D.

Pipe Blanks

E.

Protective Caps

F.

69494J906

Preformed Packing

Referenced Procedures:
- 06-41-54, P. Block 1
- 21-11-00, P. Block 501

- Access Provision - Nacelles


- Compression System

2. Procedure
A.

Job Set-Up
(1) Open, safety and tag the following circuit breakers:
PANEL

SERVICE

FIN

BATTERY BUS 1

START

KA1

MISCELLANEOUS

AIR CONDITIONING

HF1 (HF2)

(2) Put warning notice in flight compartment telling personnel not to


ground run engines.
(3) Put servicing platform in position.
(4) Remove access panel to get to high pressure shut-off valve
(Ref. 06-41-54, P. Block 1).

Effectivity: See TOC

21-11-13

CONFIG. 2
Pag. 401
Jul. 15/04

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


B.

Removal (Fig. 401)


(1) Disconnect electrical connector (11) and install protective caps
to connector (11) and receptacle (10).
(2) Remove clamps (2) and (4) and install blanks to exposed ducts (1)
and (5) and valve orifices.
(3) Remove nuts (14), washers (13) and screws (12).
(4) Remove plug (9) from high pressure valve (3) and discard
preformed packing (8), remove spring (7) and filter (6).
(5) Install blank to valve orifice (15).

C.

Preparation of Replacement Component (Fig. 401)


(1) Remove blank from orifice (15).
(2) Put new filter (6). Install spring (7) and new preformed packing
(8) on plug (9). Torque tighten plug to 15 - 20 lbf.in.

D.

Preparation for installation (Fig. 401)


(1) Remove blanks from ducts (1) and (5) and valve orifices.
(2) Make certain that mating surfaces are clean.
(3) Remove protective caps from connector (11) and receptacle (10).

E.

Installation (Fig. 401)


(1) Put valve assembly (3) on mounting bracket (16) and fasten with
screws (12), washers (13) and nuts (14). Tighten nuts (14).
(2) Install clamps (2) and (4) to ducts (1), (5) and valve (3).
Tighten clamps.
(3) Connect electrical connector (11) to receptacle (10).

Effectivity: See TOC

21-11-13

CONFIG. 2
Pag. 402
Jul. 15/04

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


High Pressure Shut-off Valve

CM1.21.11.13.4AO.00.02-00

Fig. 401 High Pressure Shut-off Valve

Effectivity: See TOC

21-11-13

CONFIG. 2
Pag. 403
Jul. 15/04

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


F.

Test
(1) Do adjustment/test procedure (Ref. 21-11-00, P. Block 501) and
inspect installation for leaks.

G.

Close-Up
(1) Make sure that work area is clean and clear of tools and
miscellaneous equipment.
(2) Install access panel (Ref. 06-41-54, P. Block 1).
(3) Remove servicing platform.
(4) Remove warning notice.

Effectivity: See TOC

21-11-13

CONFIG. 2
Pag. 404
Jul. 15/04

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


LOW PRESSURE CHECK VALVE
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

1. Removal/Installation of the Low Pressure Check Valve


A.

Reason for the Job


To remove and install the low pressure check valve when it is
unserviceable or to get access to other components.

B.

Equipment and Materials


ITEM

DESIGNATION

A.

ITEM 20-15-01

Circuit Breaker Safety Clips and Tags

B.

Standard Tool

Servicing Platform, 2 m (6,5 ft)

C.

Standard Tool

Warning Notices

D.

Standard Tool

Pipe Blanks

E.

35-71102-0201

Joint

F.

35-71110-1201

Joint

Referenced Procedures:
- 06-41-54, P. Block 1
- 21-00-00, P. Block 201
- 21-11-00, P. Block 501
C.

- Access Provision - Nacelles


- Air Conditioning
- Compression System

Procedure
(1) Job Set-Up
(a) Put warning notice in flight compartment telling personnel
not to ground run engines.
(b) Open, safety clip and tag with ITEM 20-15-01 this circuit
breaker:
PANEL

SERVICE

FIN

BATTERY BUS 1

START

KA1

Effectivity: See TOC

21-11-14

CONFIG. 2
Pag. 401
May 15/12

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


(c) Put servicing platform in position.
(d) Remove access panel 413AR (423AR) to get access to low
pressure check valve (Ref. 06-41-54, P. Block 1).
(2) Removal (Fig. 401)
(a) Remove clamps (5) and (7) from ducts assy (1) and (6).
(b) Install blanks on exposed ducts.
(c) Remove and discard the joint (4)
(Ref.21-00-00, P. Block 201).
(d) Remove the low pressure check valve (3).
(e) Remove and discard the joint (2)
(Ref.21-00-00, P. Block 201).
(3) Preparation of Replacement Component (Fig. 401)
(a) Examine the low pressure check valve (3) for sign of damage
or corrosion.
(4) Preparation for Installation (Fig. 401)
(a) Remove blanks from ducts assy.
(b) Examine the duct assy (1) and (6), and clamps (5) for sign
of damage or corrosion.
(5) Installation (Fig. 401)
(a) Install a new joint 35-71102-0201 (2)
(Ref.21-00-00, P. Block 201) to check valve (3).
(b) Put check valve (3) on duct assy (1). Make sure that dowel
of check valve is inserted in locating hole in duct (1) and
that valve body is correctly installed in duct flange.
(c) Put together the check valve (3), duct (1), a new joint
35-71110-1201 (4) (Ref.21-00-00, P. Block 201), duct (6)
and loosely secure clamp (5).
(d) Install duct assy (1) on engine with clamp (7). Torque the
clamp (7) to between 3,95 and 5,08 Nm (35 and 45 lbfin) .
(e) Torque the clamp (5) to 4,52 Nm (40 lbfin) .

Effectivity: See TOC

21-11-14

CONFIG. 2
Pag. 402
May 15/12

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


Low Pressure Check Valve

CM1.21.11.14.4AO.00.02-00

Fig. 401 Low Pressure Check Valve

Effectivity: See TOC

21-11-14

CONFIG. 2
Pag. 403
May 15/12

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


(6) Test
(a) Remove safety clip and tag ITEM 20-15-01 and close this
circuit breaker:
PANEL

SERVICE

FIN

BATTERY BUS 1

START

KA1

(b) Do adjustment/test procedure (Ref. 21-11-00, P. Block 501)


for the Compression System and inspect installation for
leaks.
(7) Close-Up
(a) Install access panel 413AR (423AR)
(Ref. 06-41-54, P. Block 1).
(b) Remove servicing platform.
(c) Remove warning notice.
(d) Make sure that work area is clean and clear of tools and
miscellaneous equipment.

Effectivity: See TOC

21-11-14

CONFIG. 2
Pag. 404
May 15/12

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


LOW PRESSURE CHECK VALVE
INSPECTION/CHECK

1. Inspection of the Low Pressure Check Valve


A.

Reason for the Job


- To do a visual inspection of the low pressure check valve for
damage.
- To do the 21.10.00.03 MRB task (MRB Document PV02M) , "Remove and
perform detailed visual inspection of Low Pressure Check
(Non-Return) Valve".

B.

Equipment and Material


ITEM
(1)

DESIGNATION
Standard Tool

Flashlight

Referenced Procedures:
- 21-11-14, P. Block 401
C.

- Low Pressure Check Valve

Procedure
(1) Job Set-Up
Remove the low pressure check valve
(Ref.21-11-14, P. Block 401).
(2) General Inspection
(a) Do an inspection, with a flashlight, of the low pressure
check valve for:
- Corrosion
- Cracks
- Surface finish damage
- Pitting
- Wear

Effectivity: See TOC

21-11-14

Pag. 601
Nov. 15/14

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


- Dents
- Deep scratches.
(b) Do an inspection of the valve attaching clamps to the ducts
for leakage.
(3) Close-Up
(a) Install the low pressure check valve
(Ref. 21-11-14, P. Block 401).
(b) Remove all tools and equipment from the work area. Make sure
that the work area is clean

Effectivity: See TOC

21-11-14

Pag. 602
Nov. 15/14

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


PRESSURE REGULATOR AND SHUT-OFF VALVE,

HF51 (HF52)

REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
WARNING:

BEFORE POWER IS SUPPLIED TO AIRCRAFT, MAKE CERTAIN THAT ELECTRICAL


CIRCUITS UPON WHICH WORK IS IN PROGRESS ARE ISOLATED.

1. Equipment and Materials


ITEM

DESIGNATION

A.

ITEM 20-15-01

Circuit Breaker Safety Clips and Tags

B.

Warning Notice

C.

Servicing Platform, 2 m (6,5 ft)

D.

Pipe Blanks

E.

Protective Caps

F.

69494J906
MS9385-04

Preformed Packings

Referenced Procedures:
- 06-41-54, P. Block 1
- 21-11-00, P. Block 501

- Access Provision - Nacelles


- Compression System

2. Procedure
A.

Job Set-Up
(1) Open, safety and tag the following circuit breakers:
PANEL

SERVICE

FIN

BATTERY BUS 1

START

KA1

MISCELLANEOUS

AIR CONDITIONING

HF1 (HF2)

(2) Put warning notice in flight compartment telling personnel not to


ground run engines.
(3) Put servicing platform in position.
(4) Remove access panel to get to pressure regulating and shut-off
valve (Ref. 06-41-54, P. Block 1).

Effectivity: See TOC

21-11-15

CONFIG. 2
Pag. 401
Mar. 31/00

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


B.

Removal (Fig. 401)


(1) Disconnect electrical connector (10) and install protective caps
to connector (10) and receptacle (11).
(2) Remove pipe (9), union (8) and packing (7) from valve orifice.
Install blanks on exposed pipe and valve orifice.
(3) Remove clamps (1). Install blanks on exposed ducting.
(4) Remove nuts (2), washer (3) and screws (5) and remove valve
assembly (6).
(5) Remove plug (15) from valve (6), discard packing (14), remove
spring (13) and filter (12).

C.

Preparation of Replacement Components (Fig. 401)


(1) Remove blanks from valve orifices.
(2) Install new filter (12) if needed, spring (13) and new packing
(14) on plug (15). Torque tighten plug (15) to 15 - 20 lbf.in.
(3) Install new packing (7) on union (8) and install on valve (6).
Tighten union (8).

D.

Installation (Fig. 401)


(1) Remove blanks from ducts and valve orifices.
(2) Make sure that mating surfaces are clean.
(3) Install valve assembly (6) on mounting bracket (4) and fasten
with screws (5), washers (3) and nuts (2). Tighten nuts (2).
(4) Install clamps (1) on valve (6) and ducts. Tighten clamp (1).
(5) Install pipe (9) on union (8). Tighten pipe nuts.
(6) Remove protective caps and connect electrical connector (10) to
receptacle (11).

Effectivity: See TOC

21-11-15

CONFIG. 2
Pag. 402
Mar. 31/00

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


Pressure Regulator and Shut-off Valve

CM1.21.11.15.4AO.00.02-00

Fig. 401 Pressure Regulator and Shut-off Valve

Effectivity: See TOC

21-11-15

CONFIG. 2
Pag. 403
Mar. 31/00

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


E.

Test
(1) Do adjustment/test procedure (Ref. 21-11-00, P. Block 501) and
inspect installation for leaks.

F.

Close-Up
(1) Make sure that work area is clean and clear of tools and
miscellaneous equipment.
(2) Install access panel (Ref. 06-41-54, P. Block 1).
(3) Remove servicing platform.
(4) Remove warning notice.

Effectivity: See TOC

21-11-15

CONFIG. 2
Pag. 404
Mar. 31/00

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


BLEED CROSS-OVER VALVE,

HF70

REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
WARNING:

BEFORE POWER IS SUPPLIED TO THE AIRCRAFT, MAKE SURE THAT ELECTRICAL


CIRCUITS UPON WHICH WORK IS IN PROGRESS ARE ISOLATED.

1. Reason for the Job


To remove and install the bleed cross-over valve when it is unserviceable
or to get access to other components.
2. Equipment and Materials
ITEM

DESIGNATION

A.

ITEM 12-00-01

Servicing Platform, 2 m (6,5 ft)

B.

ITEM 20-15-01

Circuit Breaker Safety Clips and Tags

C.

Standard Tool

Warning Notices

D.

Standard Tool

Pipe Blanks

E.

Standard Tool

Protective Caps

Referenced Procedures:
- 06-41-57, P. Block 1
- 20-21-00, P. Block 1
- 21-11-00, P. Block 501

- Access Provision - Wings


- Standard Torques
- Compression System

3. Procedure
A.

Job Set-Up
(1) Put warning notices in flight compartment to tell personnel not
to ground run engines.
(2) Open, safety clip and tag with ITEM 20-15-01 these circuit
breakers:
PANEL

SERVICE

FIN

BATTERY BUS 1

START

KA1

MISCELLANEOUS

AIR CONDITIONING

HF1 (HF2)

Effectivity: See TOC

21-11-16

CONFIG. 2
Pag. 401
Dec. 01/09

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


(3) Put servicing platform ITEM 12-00-01 in position.
(4) Remove access panel 911AT (Ref. 06-41-57, P. Block 1).
B.

Removal (Fig. 401)


(1) Disconnect electrical connector (4) and install protective caps
to connector (4) and receptacle (5).
(2) Remove clamps (1).
(3) Remove nuts (6), washers (7) and screws (2), and remove bleed
cross-over valve (3).
(4) Install blanks to exposed ducts and valve orifices.

C.

Preparation of Replacement Component (Fig. 401)


(1) Examine the bleed cross-over valve (3) for signs of damage and
corrosion.

D.

Preparation for Installation (Fig. 401)


(1) Remove blanks from ducts and valve orifices.
(2) Examine ducts and clamps (1) for signs of damage and corrosion.

E.

Installation (Fig. 401)


(1) Install valve assembly (3) to mounting bracket and fasten with
screws (2), washers (7) and nuts (6). Torque the nuts (6) to the
standard value (Ref.20-21-00, P. Block 1).
(2) Attach the valve (3) to the inlet and outlet connections with the
clamps (1). Torque the clamps (1) to the standard value
(Ref.20-21-00, P. Block 1).
(3) Remove protective caps and connect electrical connector (4) to
receptacle (5).

Effectivity: See TOC

21-11-16

CONFIG. 2
Pag. 402
Dec. 01/09

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


Bleed Cross-over Valve, HF70

CM1.21.11.16.4AO.00.02-00

Fig. 401 Bleed Cross-over Valve, HF70

Effectivity: See TOC

21-11-16

CONFIG. 2
Pag. 403
Dec. 01/09

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


F.

Test
(1) Check visually the rotation of the valve shaft.
(2) Remove the safety clip and tag ITEM 20-15-01 and close these
circuit breakers:
PANEL

SERVICE

FIN

BATTERY BUS 1

START

KA1

MISCELLANEOUS

AIR CONDITIONING

HF1 (HF2)

(3) Do adjustment/test (Ref. 21-11-00, P. Block 501) for the


Compression System and inspect crossover valve for leaks.
G.

Close-Up
(1) Install access panel 911AT

(Ref. 06-41-57, P. Block 1).

(2) Remove servicing platform ITEM 12-00-01.


(3) Remove warning notices.
(4) Make sure that the work area is clean and clear of tools and
miscellaneous equipment.

Effectivity: See TOC

21-11-16

CONFIG. 2
Pag. 404
Dec. 01/09

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


BLEED OVERPRESSURE SWITCH,

HF45 (HF46)

REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
WARNING:

YOU MUST OBEY ALL THE SAFETY PROCEDURES WHEN YOU DO WORK IN OR NEAR
A FUEL TANK (Ref.28-10-00, P. Block 301). IF YOU DO NOT OBEY THE
SAFETY PROCEDURES THERE IS A RISK OF:
- DEATH OR INJURY TO PERSONS
- DAMAGE TO THE AIRCRAFT OR TO OTHER EQUIPMENT.

WARNING:

BEFORE POWER IS SUPPLIED TO THE AIRCRAFT, MAKE SURE THAT ELECTRICAL


CIRCUITS UPON WHICH WORK IS IN PROGRESS ARE ISOLATED.

1. Equipment and Materials


ITEM

DESIGNATION

A.

Servicing Platform, 2 m (6,5 ft)

B.

ITEM 20-15-01

Circuit Breaker Safety Clips and Tags

C.

Warning Notice

D.

Pipe Blanks

E.

Protective Caps

F.

CAN67374L012

Preformed Packing

Referenced Procedures:
- 06-41-57,
- 20-21-00,
- 20-28-00,
- 20-61-00,
- 21-11-00,
- 28-10-00,
- 28-11-00,

P.
P.
P.
P.
P.
P.
P.

Block
Block
Block
Block
Block
Block
Block

Effectivity: See TOC

1
1
601
601
501
301
601

- Access Provision - Wings


- Standard Torques
- Electrical Bonding - General
- Check of Areas Adjacent to the Fuel Tanks
- Compression System
- Fuel Storage
- Fuel Tanks

21-11-17

Pag. 401
Dec. 15/07

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


2. Procedure
A.

Job Set-Up
(1) Open, safety and tag the following circuit breaker:
PANEL

SERVICE

FIN

MISCELLANEOUS

AIR CONDITIONING

HF1 (HF2)

(2) Put warning notice in flight compartment telling personnel not to


use air conditioning system.
(3) Put servicing platform in position.
(4) Remove access panel 911AT to get to bleed overpressure switches
(Ref. 06-41-57, P. Block 1).
B.

Removal (Fig. 401)


(1) Disconnect electrical connector (4) and fit protective caps to
connector (4) and receptacle (5).
(2) Disconnect sensing pipe nut (11).
(3) Loosen nuts (6) and bolts (1) and remove switch (3) complete with
union (10).
(4) Install blank on sensing pipe nut (11).
(5) Remove union (10) from switch sensing port (8).
(6) Remove and discard preformed packing (9).
(7) Install blank on pressure switch sensing port (8).

C.

Preparation of Replacement Component (Fig. 401)


(1) Remove blank from switch sensing port (8).
(2) Install new preformed packing (9).
(3) Connect union (10) to switch sensing port (8). Torque the union
(10) to the standard value (Ref.20-21-00, P. Block 1).

Effectivity: See TOC

21-11-17

Pag. 402
Dec. 15/07

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


Bleed Overpressure Switch

CM1.21.11.17.4AO.00.00-01

Fig. 401 Bleed Overpressure Switch

Effectivity: See TOC

21-11-17

Pag. 403
Dec. 15/07

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


D.

Installation (Fig. 401)


(1) Put switch in position, align mounting clamp (2). Torque the nuts
(6) to the standard value (Ref.20-21-00, P. Block 1).
(2) Remove blank and connect sensing pipe nut (11) to union (10).
Torque the pipe nut (11) to the standard value
(Ref.20-21-00, P. Block 1).
(3) Remove protective caps and connect electrical connector (4) to
receptacle (5).

E.

Test
(1) Do a check of the of the continuity values of the switch
installation (Ref.20-28-00, P. Block 601).
(2) Do the check of the adjacent areas to the fuel tanks
(Ref.20-61-00, P. Block 601).
(3) Do the external inspection of fuel tank areas for fuel leakage
(Ref.28-11-00, P. Block 601).
(4) Do the adjustment/test (Ref. 21-11-00, P. Block 501) and inspect
overpressure switch for leaks.

F.

Close-Up
(1) Install access panel 911AT (Ref. 06-41-57, P. Block 1).
(2) Make sure that work area is clean and clear of tools and
miscellaneous equipment.
(3) Remove servicing platform.
(4) Remove warning notice.

Effectivity: See TOC

21-11-17

Pag. 404
Dec. 15/07

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


AIR CONDITIONING CONTROL PANEL,

ZD124

REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
WARNING:

BEFORE POWER IS SUPPLIED TO THE AIRCRAFT, MAKE SURE THAT ELECTRICAL


CIRCUITS UPON WHICH WORK IS IN PROGRESS ARE ISOLATED.

1. Equipment and Materials


ITEM

DESIGNATION

A.

ITEM 20-15-01

Circuit Breaker Safety Clips and Tags

B.

Protective Caps

C.

Warning Notice

Referenced Procedures:
- 21-11-00,
- 21-21-00,
- 21-51-00,
- 21-61-00,

P.
P.
P.
P.

Block
Block
Block
Block

501
501
501
501

- Compression System
- Distribution System
- Air Cooling System
- Temperature Control System

2. Procedure
A.

Job Set-Up
(1) Open, safety and tag the following circuit breakers:
PANEL

SERVICE

FIN

MISCELLANEOUS

AIR CONDITIONING

HF1 (HF2)

MISCELLANEOUS

AIR CONDITIONING

HF3 (HF4)

(2) Put warning notices in position.

Effectivity: See TOC

21-11-18

Pag. 401
Jul. 31/06

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


B.

Removal (Fig. 401 and Fig. 401A)


(1) Hold panel (6), loosen attachment screws (5) and remove panel (6)
sufficiently to get to electrical connections.
(2) Disconnect temperature indicator electrical connector (2) and
install protective caps to connector (2) and receptacle (4).
(3) Disconnect electrical connectors (8) and (9) and install
protective caps to connectors (8) and (9) and receptacles (3) and
(7).
(4) Remove air conditioning control panel (6).

C.

Installation (Fig. 401 and

Fig. 401A)

(1) Remove protective caps and connect temperature indicator


electrical connector (2) to receptacle (4).
(2) Remove protective caps and connect electrical connectors (8) and
(9) to their associated receptacles (3) and (7).
(3) Put control panel (6) at mounting (1) interface and fasten by
tightening attachment screws (5).
D.

Test
NOTE:

The air conditioning control panel ZD124 has control switches


and indicators which interface with other subsystems of the
air conditioning system:
- distribution system (Ref. 21-21-00, P. Block 501)
- air cooling system (Ref. 21-51-00, P. Block 501)
- temperature control system (Ref. 21-61-00, P. Block 501)

(1) Do adjustment/test procedure (Ref. 21-11-00, P. Block 501).


E.

Close-Up
(1) Make sure that work area is clean and clear of tools and
miscellaneous equipment.
(2) Remove warning notices.

Effectivity: See TOC

21-11-18

Pag. 402
Jul. 31/06

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


Air conditioning Control Panel ZD124

CM1.21.11.18.4AO.00.00-00

Fig. 401 Air conditioning Control Panel ZD124

Effectivity: SERIES 10

21-11-18

Pag. 403
Jul. 31/06

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

CM1.21.11.18.4AA.00.00-00

Air Conditioning Control Panel ZD124


Fig. 401A Air Conditioning Control Panel ZD124

Effectivity: SERIES 100, SERIES 200, SERIES 300

21-11-18

Pag. 404
Jul. 31/06

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


BLEED AIR LOW PRESSURE SWITCH,

HF101 (HF108) (HF102)

REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
WARNING:

PUT WARNING NOTICES IN THE FLIGHT COMPARTMENT BEFORE YOU START THE
MAINTENANCE WORK ON THE PNEUMATIC SYSTEM. THIS WILL PREVENT THE
ACCIDENTAL ENGINES GROUND OPERATION.

WARNING:

MAKE SURE THAT YOU ISOLATE ALL THE CIRCUITS IN MAINTENANCE BEFORE
YOU SUPPLY ELECTRICAL POWER TO THE AIRCRAFT.

1. Reason for the Job


To remove and install the bleed air low pressure switch when it is
unserviceable or to get access to other components.
2. Equipment and Material
ITEM

DESIGNATION

A.

ITEM 12-00-01

Servicing Platform, 2 m (6,5 ft)

B.

ITEM 20-15-01

Circuit Breaker Safety Clips and Tags

C.

Standard Tool

Protection Plugs and Caps

D.

Standard Tool

Warning Notices

Referenced Procedures:
- 06-41-54, P. Block 1
- 20-21-00, P. Block 1
- 21-11-00, P. Block 501

- Access Provisions - Nacelles


- Standard Torques
- Compression System

3. Procedure
A.

Job Set-Up
(1) Put warning notices in the flight compartment to prevent the
operation of the engines.
(2) Open, safety clip and tag with ITEM 20-15-01 these circuit
breakers:
PANEL

SERVICE

FIN

BATTERY BUS 1

START

KA1

Effectivity: See TOC

21-11-19

CONFIG. 1
Pag. 401
Dec. 01/09

PANEL

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


SERVICE

MISCELLANEOUS

AIR CONDITIONING

FIN

HF1 (HF2)

(3) Put the servicing platform ITEM 12-00-01 in the correct position.
(4) Remove the access panel 413AL (423AL)
(Ref. 06-41-54, P. Block 1).
B.

Removal (Fig. 401)


(1) Disconnect the electrical connector (1) from the receptacle (2).
(2) Put the protection plugs/caps on the connector (1) and receptacle
(2).
(3) Disconnect the pipe nut (7) from the pressure switch (3).
(4) Put the protection plugs/caps on the pipe nut (7) and the port of
the pressure switch (3).
(5) Remove the screws (6), washers (5) and spacers (9). Remove the
pressure switch (3) and clamp (4) from the mounting support (8).
(6) Remove the clamp (4) from the pressure switch (3).

C.

Preparation of the Replacement Component (Fig. 401)


(1) Remove the protection plug/cap from the pressure switch (3). Make
sure that the pressure inlet port is clean and not clogged.
(2) Examine the pins of the electrical receptacle for signs of damage
or corrosion.

D.

Preparation for Installation


(1) Clean and examine the mounting surface for signs of damage or
corrosion. Repair if necessary.

Effectivity: See TOC

21-11-19

CONFIG. 1
Pag. 402
Dec. 01/09

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


Bleed Air Low Pressure Switch, HF101 (HF108), (HF102)

CM1.21.11.19.4AO.00.01-00

Fig. 401 Bleed Air Low Pressure Switch, HF101 (HF108), (HF102)

Effectivity: See TOC

21-11-19

CONFIG. 1
Pag. 403
Dec. 01/09

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


E.

Installation (Fig. 401)


(1) Install the clamp (4) on the pressure switch (3).
(2) Put the pressure switch (3) with the clamp (4) in the correct
mounting position on the support (8). Attach with the screws (6),
washers (5) and spacers (9). Torque the screws (6) to the
standard value (Ref.20-21-00, P. Block 1).
(3) Remove the protection plugs/caps from the pipe nut (7) and the
port of the pressure switch (3).
(4) Connect the pipe nut (7) to the pressure switch (3).
(5) Remove the protection plugs/caps from the electrical connector
(1) and receptacle (2).
(6) Connect the electrical connector (1) to the receptacle (2).

F.

Test
(1) Remove the safety clip and tag ITEM 20-15-01 and close these
circuit breakers:
PANEL

SERVICE

FIN

BATTERY BUS 1

START

KA1

MISCELLANEOUS

AIR CONDITIONING

HF1 (HF2)

(2) Do the adjustment/test procedure of the Compression System


(Ref. 21-11-00, P. Block 501).
G.

Close-Up
(1) Install the access panel 413AL(423AL)
(Ref. 06-41-54, P. Block 1).
(2) Remove the servicing platform ITEM 12-00-01.
(3) Remove the warning notices.
(4) Remove all tools and equipment from the work area. Make sure that
the work area is clean.

Effectivity: See TOC

21-11-19

CONFIG. 1
Pag. 404
Dec. 01/09

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


LOW PRESSURE BLEED AIR VENTURI
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
WARNING:

BEFORE POWER IS SUPPLIED TO THE AIRCRAFT, MAKE SURE THAT ELECTRICAL


CIRCUITS UPON WHICH WORK IS IN PROGRESS ARE ISOLATED.

WARNING:

BEFORE STARTING MAINTENANCE WORK, MAKE SURE THAT WARNING NOTICE


TELLING PERSONNEL NOT TO GROUND RUN RELEVANT ENGINE IS DISPLAYED IN
FLIGHT COMPARTMENT.

1. Removal/Installation of the Low Pressure Bleed Air Venturi


A.

Reason for the Job


To remove and install the low pressure bleed air venturi when it is
unserviceable or to get access to other components.

B.

Equipment and Materials


ITEM

DESIGNATION

A.

ITEM 20-15-01

Circuit Breaker Safety Clips and Tags

B.

Standard Tool

Servicing Platform, 2 m (6,5 ft)

C.

Standard Tool

Warning Notices

D.

Standard Tool

Ducting Blanks

E.

CAN67395-24

Preformed Packing

Referenced Procedures:
- 06-41-54, P. Block 1
- 21-00-00, P. Block 201
- 21-11-00, P. Block 501
C.

- Access Provision - Nacelles


- Air Conditioning
- Compression System

Procedure
(1) Job Set-Up
(a) Put warning notices in flight compartment to tell personnel
not to run engines.

Effectivity: See TOC

21-11-20

CONFIG. 2
Pag. 401
May 15/12

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


(b) Open, safety clip and tag with ITEM 20-15-01 these circuit
breakers:
PANEL

SERVICE

FIN

BATTERY BUS 1

START

KA1

MISCELLANEOUS

AIR CONDITIONING

HF1 (HF2)

(c) Put servicing platform in position.


(d) Remove access panel 413AR (423AR) to get to the venturi to
be removed (Ref. 06-41-54, P. Block 1).
(2) Removal (Fig. 401)
(a) Remove the clamp (1) and bushing (2).
(b) Remove the clamp (5).
(c) Remove the venturi (4).
(d) Remove and discard preformed packings (3)
(Ref.21-00-00, P. Block 201).
(e) Install protective ducting blanks to exposed orifices.
(3) Preparation of Replacement Component (Fig. 401)
(a) Examine the venturi (4) for any signs of damage or
corrosion.
(4) Preparation for Installation (Fig. 401)
(a) Remove protective ducting blanks from all orifices.
(b) Examine the clamps (1) and (5), and bushing (2) for any
signs of damage or corrosion.

Effectivity: See TOC

21-11-20

CONFIG. 2
Pag. 402
May 15/12

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


Low Pressure bleed Air Venturi

CM1.21.11.20.4AO.00.02-00

Fig. 401 Low Pressure bleed Air Venturi

Effectivity: See TOC

21-11-20

CONFIG. 2
Pag. 403
May 15/12

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


(5) Installation (Fig. 401)
(a) Install new preformed packings CAN67395-24 (3) to venturi
(4) (Ref.21-00-00, P. Block 201).
(b) Install venturi (4) to aircraft with clamp (1) and bushing
(2).
(c) Install venturi (4) to engine with clamp (5).
(d) Torque the clamps (1) and (5) to a value between 3,95 and
5,08 Nm (35 and 45 lbf.in).
(6) Test
(a) Remove safety clip and tag ITEM 20-15-01 and close these
circuit breakers:
PANEL

SERVICE

FIN

BATTERY BUS 1

START

KA1

MISCELLANEOUS

AIR CONDITIONING

HF1 (HF2)

(b) Do a test of the Compression System


(Ref. 21-11-00, P. Block 501) and inspect duct installation
for leaks.
(7) Close-Up
(a) Install access panel 413AR (423AR)
(Ref. 06-41-54, P. Block 1).
(b) Remove servicing platform.
(c) Remove warning notices.
(d) Make sure that the working area is clean and clear of tools
and miscellaneous equipment.

Effectivity: See TOC

21-11-20

CONFIG. 2
Pag. 404
May 15/12

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


DUCT OVERTEMPERATURE SWITCH,

HF47 (HF48)

REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
WARNING:

BEFORE POWER IS SUPPLIED TO THE AIRCRAFT, MAKE SURE THAT ELECTRICAL


CIRCUITS UPON WHICH WORK IS IN PROGRESS ARE ISOLATED.

1. Equipment and Materials


ITEM

DESIGNATION

A.

Servicing Platform, 2 m (6,5 ft)

B.

ITEM 20-15-01

Circuit Breaker Safety Clips and Tags

C.

Warning Notice

D.

Protective Caps

E.

Pipe Blank

F.

69494J111

Preformed Packing

Referenced Procedures:
- 06-41-57, P. Block 1
- 21-11-00, P. Block 501

- Access Provision - Wings


- Compression System

2. Procedure
A.

Job Set-Up
(1) Put warning notice in flight compartment telling personnel not to
use the air conditioning system.
(2) Open, safety and tag these circuit breakers:
PANEL

SERVICE

FIN

MISCELLANEOUS

AIR CONDITIONING

HF1 (HF2)

(3) Put servicing platform in position.


(4) Remove access panel 911AT to get access to duct overtemperature
switches (Ref. 06-41-57, P. Block 1).

Effectivity: See TOC

21-11-21

Pag. 401
Dec. 15/07

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


Duct Overtemperature Switch

CM1.21.11.21.4AO.00.00-00

Fig. 401 Duct Overtemperature Switch

Effectivity: See TOC

21-11-21

Pag. 402
Dec. 15/07

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


B.

Removal (Fig. 401)


(1) Disconnect electrical connector (5) and install protective caps
on connector (5) and receptacle (4).
(2) Loosen and remove duct overtemperature switch (3).
(3) Remove and discard preformed packing (2).
(4) Install blanks on compressor duct mounting (1) and duct
overtemperature switch (3) probe.

C.

Installation (Fig. 401)


(1) Install new preformed packing (2) on duct overtemperature switch
(3).
(2) Remove blanks from compressor duct mounting (1) and duct
overtemperature switch (3) probe.
(3) Install duct overtemperature switch (3) into compressor duct
mounting (1). Torque tighten.
(4) Remove protective caps and connect threaded electrical connector
(5) to switch receptacle (4).

D.

Test
(1) Do adjustment/test procedure (Ref. 21-11-00, P. Block 501).

E.

Close-Up
(1) Make sure that work area is clean and clear of tools and
miscellaneous equipment.
(2) Install access panel 911AT (Ref. 06-41-57, P. Block 1).
(3) Remove servicing platform.
(4) Remove warning notice.

Effectivity: See TOC

21-11-21

Pag. 403
Dec. 15/07

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

Effectivity: See TOC

21-11-21

Pag. 404
Dec. 15/07

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


CAVITY OVERTEMPERATURE SWITCH,

HF87 (HF88), HF89 (HF90)

REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
WARNING:

BEFORE POWER IS SUPPLIED TO THE AIRCRAFT, MAKE SURE THAT ELECTRICAL


CIRCUITS UPON WHICH WORK IS IN PROGRESS ARE ISOLATED.

WARNING:

YOU MUST OBEY ALL THE SAFETY PROCEDURES WHEN YOU DO WORK IN OR NEAR
A FUEL TANK (Ref.28-10-00, P. Block 301). IF YOU DO NOT OBEY THE
SAFETY PROCEDURES THERE IS A RISK OF:
- DEATH OR INJURY TO PERSONS
- DAMAGE TO THE AIRCRAFT OR TO OTHER EQUIPMENT.

1. Removal/Installation of the Cavity Overtemperature Switch


A.

Reason for the Job


- To remove and install the overtemperature switch when it is
unserviceable or to get access to other components.
- To do the 21.10.00.07 MRB task (MRB Document PV02M) , "Remove
Overtemperature Switch (Engine zone) for functional check".

B.

Equipment and Materials


ITEM

DESIGNATION

(1)

ITEM 20-15-01

Circuit Breaker Safety Clips and Tags

(2)

Standard Tool

Protective Plugs and Caps

(3)

Standard Tool

Servicing Platform, 2 m (6.5 ft)

(4)

Standard Tool

Warning Notice

(5)

MS20995C32

Lockwire

Referenced Procedures:
- 06-41-54,
- 06-41-57,
- 20-28-00,
- 20-61-00,

P.
P.
P.
P.

Block
Block
Block
Block

1
1
601
601

- 21-11-00, P. Block 501


- 28-10-00, P. Block 301
- 28-11-00, P. Block 601

Effectivity: See TOC

- Access Provision - Nacelles


- Access Provision - Wings
- Electrical Bonding - General
- Check of Areas Adjacent to the Fuel
Tanks
- Compression System
- Fuel Storage
- Fuel Tanks

21-11-22

Pag. 401
Nov. 15/14

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


C.

Procedure
(1) Job Set-Up
(a) Put warning notices in the flight compartment telling
personnel not to use the air conditioning system.
(b) Open, safety and tag , with ITEM 20-15-01, these circuit
breakers:
PANEL

SERVICE

FIN

MISCELLANEOUS

AIR CONDITIONING

HF1 (HF2)

(c) Put servicing platform in position.


(d) Remove the access panels 414AT (424AT)
(Ref.06-41-54, P. Block 1) and 911AT
(Ref.06-41-57, P. Block 1) to get access to the cavity
overtemperature switches.
(2) Removal (Fig. 401)
(a) Disconnect the electrical connector (1) and install
protective caps on the connector (1) and receptacle (2).
(b) Remove and discard the lockwire that safeties the
overtemperature switch (3).
(c) Loosen and remove the switch (3) and washer (4).
NOTE:

If you removed the component to do the 21.10.00.07


MRB task, send it to the related shop for the
functional test. Refer to the related CMM.

(3) Installation (Fig. 401)


(a) Install the washer (4) on the overtemperature switch (3).
(b) Install the switch (3) on the related bracket.
CAUTION:

TORQUE THE SWITCH TO LESS THAN 25 lbf.in (2,8


Nm).

(c) Safety the switch (3) with a new lockwire, MS20995C32 .

Effectivity: See TOC

21-11-22

Pag. 402
Nov. 15/14

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


Cavity Overtemperature Switch

CM1.21.11.22.4AO.00.00-00

Fig. 401 Cavity Overtemperature Switch

Effectivity: See TOC

21-11-22

Pag. 403
Nov. 15/14

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


(d) Do a check of the continuity values of the switch
installation (Ref.20-28-00, P. Block 601).
(e) Remove protective caps and connect the electrical connector
(1) to switch receptacle (2).
(4) Test
(a) Do the check of the adjacent areas to the fuel tanks
(Ref.20-61-00, P. Block 601).
(b) Do the adjustment/test procedure of the Compression System
(Ref.21-11-00, P. Block 501).
(c) Do the external inspection of fuel tank areas for fuel
leakage (Ref.28-11-00, P. Block 601).
(5) Close-Up
(a) Remove the safety clips and tags, ITEM 20-15-01, and close
these circuit breakers:
PANEL

SERVICE

FIN

MISCELLANEOUS

AIR CONDITIONING

HF1 (HF2)

(b) Install the access panels 414AT (424AT)


(Ref.06-41-54, P. Block 1) and 911AT
(Ref.06-41-57, P. Block 1).
(c) Remove the servicing platform.
(d) Remove the warning notice.
(e) Remove all tools and equipment from the work area. Make sure
that the area is clean.

Effectivity: See TOC

21-11-22

Pag. 404
Nov. 15/14

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


BLEED AIR OVERTEMPERATURE SWITCH,

HF43 (HF44)

REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
WARNING:

BEFORE POWER IS SUPPLIED TO THE AIRCRAFT, MAKE SURE THAT ELECTRICAL


CIRCUITS UPON WHICH WORK IS IN PROGRESS ARE ISOLATED.

WARNING:

YOU MUST OBEY ALL THE SAFETY PROCEDURES WHEN YOU DO WORK IN OR NEAR
A FUEL TANK (Ref.28-10-00, P. Block 301). IF YOU DO NOT OBEY THE
SAFETY PROCEDURES THERE IS A RISK OF:
- DEATH OR INJURY TO PERSONS
- DAMAGE TO THE AIRCRAFT OR TO OTHER EQUIPMENT.

1. Equipment and Materials


ITEM

DESIGNATION

A.

Access Platform, 2 m (6,5 ft)

B.

ITEM 20-15-01

Circuit Breaker Safety Clips and Tags

C.

Warning Notice

D.

Pipe Blanks

E.

Protective Caps

F.

CAN67374L012

Preformed Packing

Referenced Procedures:
- 06-41-57,
- 20-21-00,
- 20-28-00,
- 20-61-00,
- 21-11-00,
- 28-10-00,
- 28-11-00,

P.
P.
P.
P.
P.
P.
P.

Block
Block
Block
Block
Block
Block
Block

Effectivity: See TOC

1
1
601
601
501
301
601

- Access Provisions - Wings


- Standard Torques
- Electrical Bonding - General
- Check of Areas Adjacent to the Fuel Tanks
- Compression System
- Fuel Storage
- Fuel Tanks

21-11-23

Pag. 401
Dec. 15/07

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


2. Procedure
A.

Job Set-Up
(1) Put warning notice in flight compartment telling personnel not to
use the air conditioning system.
(2) Open, safety and tag the following circuit breakers:
PANEL

SERVICE

FIN

MISCELLANEOUS

AIR CONDITIONING

HF1 (HF2)

MISCELLANEOUS

AIR CONDITIONING

HF3 (HF4)

(3) Put access platform in position.


(4) Remove access panel 911AT (Ref. 06-41-57, P. Block 1) to get
access to bleed overtemperature switches.
B.

Removal (Fig. 401)


(1) Disconnect electrical connector (5) and install protective caps
on connector (5) and receptacle (4).
(2) Loosen and remove overtemperature switch (3).
(3) Remove and discard preformed packing (2).
(4) Install blanks on duct mounting (1) and overtemperature switch
(3) probe.

C.

Installation (Fig. 401)


(1) Install new preformed packing (2) on switch (3).
(2) Remove blanks from duct mounting (1) and switch (3) probe.
(3) Install the switch (3) into duct mounting (1). Tighten to the
standard torque value (Ref.20-21-00, P. Block 1).
(4) Remove protective caps and connect threaded electrical connector
(5) to switch receptacle (4).
(5) Do a check of the continuity values of the switch installation
(Ref.20-28-00, P. Block 601).

Effectivity: See TOC

21-11-23

Pag. 402
Dec. 15/07

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


Bleed Air Overtemperature Switch

CM1.21.11.23.4AO.00.00-00

Fig. 401 Bleed Air Overtemperature Switch

Effectivity: See TOC

21-11-23

Pag. 403
Dec. 15/07

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


D.

Test
(1) Do the check of the adjacent areas to the fuel tanks
(Ref.20-61-00, P. Block 601).
(2) Remove the safety clips and tags. Close the circuit breakers
opened.
(3) Do temperature control system adjustment/test
(Ref. 21-11-00, P. Block 501).
(4) Do the external inspection of fuel tank areas for fuel leakage
(Ref.28-11-00, P. Block 601).

E.

Close-Up
(1) Make sure that working area is clean and clear of tools and
miscellaneous equipment.
(2) Install access panel 911AT (Ref. 06-41-57, P. Block 1).
(3) Remove access platform.
(4) Remove warning notice.

Effectivity: See TOC

21-11-23

Pag. 404
Dec. 15/07

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


DISTRIBUTION
DESCRIPTION/OPERATION

1. General
The aircraft air conditioning distribution system includes those units
necessary to distribute conditioned air.
A.

Conditioned air is supplied to the flight compartment and passenger


compartment via ducting, fixed outlets and individually adjustable
outlets. A recirculation system mixes passenger compartment air with
fresh conditioned air, thus decreasing the quantity of engine bleed
air required.

B.

The avionics bay area is cooled by a ventilation system which makes


certain there is a constant flow of air thru the avionics bay.

C.

Control of the air conditioning distribution system is by manually


operated devices, electrical switches and circuit breakers in the
flight compartment.

D.

The air conditioning distribution system includes the following


subsystems:
- Distribution and Recirculation System (Ref. 21-21-00, P. Block 1).
- Idividual Outlet-Passenger Compartment (Ref. 21-22-00, P. Block 1).
- Avionics and Electronic Bay Vent (Ref. 21-24-00, P. Block 1).

Effectivity: See TOC

21-20-00

CONFIG. 2
Pag. 1
Sep. 01/94

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

Effectivity: See TOC

21-20-00

CONFIG. 2
Pag. 2
Sep. 01/94

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


DISTRIBUTION AND RECIRCULATION SYSTEM
DESCRIPTION/OPERATION

1. General
Both the LH and RH distribution subsystems get conditioned air from their
respective condenser and mixer assemblies for distribution via ducting
throughout the passenger compartment and flight compartment areas.
When operating normally, the LH system distributes air to the flight
compartment and the passenger compartment area and the RH system
distributes air to the passenger compartment. Both systems are linked to
make certain that there is enough conditioned air distributed in the event
of failure of a single supply.
2. Component Location (Fig. 1)
ITEM

DESIGNATION

ZONE

ACCESS
PANEL

REFERENCE

1.

Face Outlet

211
212

21-21-16

2.

Foot Warmer Valve

212

21-21-17

Recirculation Fan

141
(142)

241BF
(242AF)

21-21-11

3.

FIN

HF49
(HF50)

4.

Ceiling Diffuser
Duct

221
252

5.

Pilot Air Outlet

211
212

6.

Foot Warmer

211
212

AIR CONDITIONING C/U

212

21-11-18

213

24-58-11

7.

ZD124
HF23
(HF24)

8.

Recirc. Fan Switch

PC14

MISCELLANEOUS C/B
Panel

HF3
(HF4)

Air Condit
Circuit Breaker

Effectivity: See TOC

21-21-00

21-21-20

CONFIG. 3
Pag. 1
Oct. 15/00

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


Distribution and Recirculation System - Component Location

CM1.21.21.00.0AO.00.03-02

Fig. 1 Distribution and Recirculation System - Component Location

Effectivity: See TOC

21-21-00

CONFIG. 3
Pag. 2
Oct. 15/00

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


3. Description
Conditioned air from LH and RH condenser and mixer assemblies is fed to
the pressurized cabin by ducts throughout the passenger-compartment and
flight compartment areas.
The LH system distributes air to the flight compartment and to the
passenger compartment, and the RH system distributes air to the passenger
compartment.
In the flight compartment there are air outlets to the wind shield and
pilots face and feet the latter are regulated by a butterfly valve in the
console.
Recirculation fans, installed on brackets between frames 20 and 21 at STA
9400, move air thru the ducting from the main passenger compartment to the
inlet side of each condenser and mixer assembly where it is mixed with
fresh conditioned air and recirculated thru the system.
Recirculation fans are controlled from the air conditioning control unit
ZD124 by switches HF23 RECIRC FAN LEFT and (HF24) RIGHT.
Switch, HF23, controls fan HF49, and switch, HF24, controls fan HF50. Each
switch has two selections: ON and OFF.
4. Component Description
A.

Face Outlet (Fig. 2)


The face outlets are installed on the LH and RH lateral panels of the
flight compartment to supply cooling air to the pilot and copilot
positions. Each outlet is made from aluminum alloy with an anodic
finish and has a ball and nozzle assembly installed in a housing
connected to the distribution system delivery ducting.

B.

Foot Warner Valve (Fig. 3)


The foot warmer valve includes a metal casing inside which a
butterfly valve is installed. Attached to the butterfly rod is a
control rod and knob. When the knob is turned, the position of the
butterfly valve is changed letting more or less warm conditioned air
be supplied to the feet warmer.

Effectivity: See TOC

21-21-00

CONFIG. 3
Pag. 3
Oct. 15/00

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


Face Outlet

CM1.21.21.00.0BO.00.03-00

Fig. 2 Face Outlet


Foot Warmer

CM1.21.21.00.0CO.00.03-00

Fig. 3 Foot Warmer

Effectivity: See TOC

21-21-00

CONFIG. 3
Pag. 4
Oct. 15/00

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


C.

Recirculation Fan HF49 (HF50) (Fig. 4)


(1) Description
Each recirculating fan includes an alloy case and an impeller
driven by a brushless 24V dc motor. Air flows thru the alloy
casing and cools the motor. The 24V dc output from the generator
bus-bar No. 1 (No. 2) is supplied to an integrated static
inverter, where it is changed into a regulated square wave pulsed
output.
The output of the static inverter is connected to the motor field
coils to give a rotating field which induces an electromagnetic
field in the rotor conductor bars and causes the rotor to turn.
The motor speed is proportional to the pulse frequency output of
the static inverter.
Maximum speed of the rotor is 11500 rpm.
(2) Operation
(a) The fan is equipped with two main security devices:

D.

A thermal switch stops the fan when the motor


temperature increases to 110 5 C, until temperature
decreases to 65 5 C.

A speed sensor gives speed information to an electronic


security device. When the motor speed stays lower than
60% of the nominal speed for mote than 17 seconds the
security device stops the fan.

Ceiling Diffuser Duct (Fig. 5)


The ceiling diffuser duct is installed over the ceiling frame of the
flight compartment. The assembly is formed by trapezial ducts. The
center of the assy has a connection duct. The upper part of the duct
sends the conditioned air from the LH Pack to the flight compartment
and to the passenger compartment. The lower part of duct sends the
air conditioned air from the RH Pack to the passenger compartment.

E.

Pilot Air Outlet (Fig. 6)


Two individual air outlets are installed in the flight compartment on
the ceiling. Each air outlet has a diffuser fastened to a case with a
cover. The diffuser slides on a bushing made from PTFE. The case is
connected to the distribution system delivery ducting.

Effectivity: See TOC

21-21-00

CONFIG. 3
Pag. 5
Oct. 15/00

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


Recirculation Fan

CM1.21.21.00.0DO.00.03-00

Fig. 4 Recirculation Fan

Effectivity: See TOC

21-21-00

CONFIG. 3
Pag. 6
Oct. 15/00

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


Ceiling Diffuser Duct - Distribution Schematic

CM1.21.21.00.0EO.00.03-00

Fig. 5 Ceiling Diffuser Duct - Distribution Schematic


Pilot Air Outlet

CM1.21.21.00.0FO.00.03-00

Fig. 6 Pilot Air Outlet

Effectivity: See TOC

21-21-00

CONFIG. 3
Pag. 7
Oct. 15/00

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

5. Operation (Fig. 7 and Fig. 8)


A.

Conditioned Air Distribution


When the aircraft system is operating, conditioned air from the LH
system condenser and mixer is supplied mainly to the flight
compartment. Conditioned air from the RH system condenser and mixer
is supplied mainly to the passenger compartment.
Conditioned air goes into the flight compartment via the main outlet,
secondary outlets are individual face outlets, feet warmer, outlets
and windshield outlets.
Conditioned air goes into the passenger compartment via central roof
level outlets.

B.

Recirculation
When the switch RECIRC FAN LEFT (RIGHT) HF23 (HF24) on the air
conditioning control unit ZD124 is set to ON, the control circuit in
the BPU No. 1 (No. 2) PC3 (PC2) supplies 28V dc to the brushless
motor of the LH (RH) recirculating fan HF49 (HF50).
When the recirculation fan operates, it removes the air with suction
out of the passenger compartment and moves it thru ducting to the
mixer section of the condenser and mixer assembly. In the mixer
section, the air from the passenger compartment mixes with fresh
conditioned air, for recirculation throughout the distribution
system.

6. Interfaces (Fig. 8)
The distribution and recirculation system interfaces with the electrical
power distribution system and the individual outlets distribution.

Effectivity: See TOC

21-21-00

CONFIG. 3
Pag. 8
Oct. 15/00

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


Distribution and Recirculation - Operation

CM1.21.21.00.0GO.00.03-04

Fig. 7 Distribution and Recirculation - Operation

Effectivity: See TOC

21-21-00

CONFIG. 3
Pag. 9
Oct. 15/00

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


Recirculation System - Functional Schematic

CM1.21.21.00.0HO.00.03-00

Fig. 8 Recirculation System - Functional Schematic

Effectivity: See TOC

21-21-00

CONFIG. 3
Pag. 10
Oct. 15/00

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


DISTRIBUTION AND RECIRCULATION SYSTEM
TROUBLESHOOTING
WARNING:

BEFORE POWER IS SUPPLIED TO THE AIRCRAFT, MAKE SURE THAT THE


ELECTRICAL CIRCUITS UPON WHICH WORK IS IN PROGRESS ARE ISOLATED.

1. General
This section contains the troubleshooting procedures for the distribution
and recirculation system.
A.
RECIRCULATION FAN HF49 (HF50)
DOES NOT OPERATE WHEN RECIRC.
FAN LEFT (RIGHT) SWITCH HF23
(HF24) ON FLIGHT COMPARTMENT
OVERHEAD AIR CONDITIONING PANEL
ZD124 IS SET TO ON.

SUPPORT EQUIPMENT REQUIRED:


- MULTIMETER

AT THE RECIRCULATION FAN HF49


(HF50), DO A DC SUPPLY TEST AT
ELECTRICAL CONNECTOR HF49a
(HF50).

RECIRCULATION FAN HF49 (HF50)


IS THE POSSIBLE CAUSE. REPLACE
THE RECIRCULATION FAN HF49
(HF50)
(Ref. 21-21-11, P. Block 401).

YES

IS THE DC SUPPLY SATISFACTORY?


NO
ON BPU No. 1 (BPU No. 2),
DISCONNECT THE ELECTRICAL
CONNECTOR PC3a (PC2a) AND DO A
DC SUPPLY TEST.

YES

REPAIR OR REPLACE THE WIRING OR


INTERCONNECTION BETWEEN
CONNECTOR PC3a (PC2a) AND PC14a
(PC14b)
(Ref. 24-00-10, P. Block 401).

IS THE SUPPLY DEFECTIVE?


NO
1

Effectivity: See TOC

SEE NEXT PAGE

21-21-00

CONFIG. 1
Pag. 101
Jul. 15/04

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


1

FROM PREVIOUS PAGE

NO
ON BPU No. 1 PC3 (BPU No. 2
PC2), DISCONNECT THE CONNECTOR
PC3a (PC2a) AND INSTALL
SHORTING LINK ACROSS PINS "b"
AND "a". DISCONNECT CONNECTOR
ZD124a AND DO A DC SUPPLY TEST.

YES

IS THE SUPPLY DEFECTIVE?

REPAIR OR REPLACE THE WIRING OR


INTERCONNECTION BETWEEN
CONNECTOR PC3a (PC2a) AND
ZD124a (ZD124b)
(Ref. 24-00-10, P. Block 401).
DO AGAIN A DC SUPPLY TEST.
IS THE RESULT SATISFACTORY?

NO

NO
BPU No. 1 PC3 (BPU No. 2 PC2)
IS THE POSSIBLE CAUSE. REPLACE
THE UNIT
(Ref. 24-50-02, P. Block 401).

AIR CONDITIONING PANEL ZD124 IS


THE POSSIBLE CAUSE. REPLACE THE
PANEL
(Ref. 21-11-18, P. Block 401).
IS THE SYSTEM SERVICEABLE?
NO
ON BPU No. 1 PC3 (BPU No. 2
PC2), DISCONNECT THE CONNECTOR
PC3c (PC2c) AND DO A DC SUPPLY
TEST.

YES

REPAIR OR REPLACE THE WIRING OR


INTERCONNECTION BETWEEN
CONNECTOR PC3c(PC2c) AND ZD124a
(ZD124b)
(Ref. 24-00-10, P. Block 401).

IS THE SUPPLY DEFECTIVE?


NO
BPU No. 1 PC3 (BPU No. 2 PC2)
IS THE POSSIBLE CAUSE. REPLACE
THE UNIT
(Ref. 24-50-02, P. Block 401).

Effectivity: See TOC

21-21-00

CONFIG. 1
Pag. 102
Jul. 15/04

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


DISTRIBUTION AND RECIRCULATION SYSTEM
ADJUSTMENT/TEST
WARNING:

BEFORE POWER IS SUPPLIED TO THE AIRCRAFT, MAKE SURE THAT ELECTRICAL


CIRCUITS UPON WHICH WORK IS IN PROGRESS ARE ISOLATED.

1. Functional Test
A.

Equipment and Material


ITEM
(1)

DESIGNATION
-

Warning Notices

Referenced Procedures:
- 53-24-20, P. Block 401
- 71-00-00, P. Block 501
B.

- Floor Panels
- Power Plant

Procedure
(1) Job Set-Up
(a) Put warning notices in position telling personnel that test
is in progress.
(b) Remove the floor panel to get access to the recirculation
fan (Ref. 53-24-20, P. Block 401).
(c) Close these circuit breakers:
PANEL

SERVICE

MISCELLANEOUS

AIR CONDITIONING

HF1

MISCELLANEOUS

AIR CONDITIONING

HF2

MISCELLANEOUS

AIR CONDITIONING

HF3

MISCELLANEOUS

AIR CONDITIONING

HF4

Effectivity: See TOC

FIN

21-21-00

CONFIG. 1
Pag. 501
Jul. 15/04

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


(2) Test
ACTION

RESULT

(a) Do engine start procedure


using No.1
(Ref. 71-00-00, P. Block 501)
.
(b) On air conditioning control
unit ZD124, set LEFT ENGINE
(RIGHT ENGINE) bleed air
selector switch HF25 (HF26)
to ON.

- LEFT ENGINE (RIGHT ENGINE)


bleed air magnetic indicator
HF19 (HF20) goes "in line".
- Passenger and flight
compartment conditioned air
flow starts.

(c) Inspect installation for


- No vibration.
vibration and excessive noise
- Noise level satisfactory.
level.
(d) On flight compartment open
foot warmer valve.

- The air flows through the


foot air outlets.

(e) Close foot warmer valve.

- The air flow from the foot


air outlets stop.

(f) On air conditioning control


unit ZD124, set LEFT ENGINE
(RIGHT ENGINE) bleed air
selector switch, HF25 (HF26)
to OFF.

- LEFT ENGINE (RIGHT ENGINE)


bleed air magnetic indicator
HF19 (HF20) goes "cross
line".

(g) Set RECIRC FAN LEFT (RIGHT)


switch HF23 (HF24) to ON.

- Relevant recirculation fan


LH (RH), HF49 (HF50)
operates.

- Air flow stops.

(h) Inspect installation for


- No vibration
vibration and excessive noise
- Noise level satisfactory.
level.
(j) On air conditioning control
unit ZD124, set RECIRC FAN
LEFT (RIGHT) switch HF23
(HF24) to OFF.

Effectivity: See TOC

- Relevant recirculation fan


LH (RH), HF49 (HF50) stops.

21-21-00

CONFIG. 1
Pag. 502
Jul. 15/04

ACTION

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


RESULT

(k) Do engine shutdown procedure


(Ref. 71-00-00, P. Block 501)
.

(3) Close-Up
(a) Make sure that work area is clean and clear of tools and
miscellaneous equipment.
(b) Install the floor panels (Ref. 53-24-20, P. Block 401).
(c) Remove the warning notices.

Effectivity: See TOC

21-21-00

CONFIG. 1
Pag. 503
Jul. 15/04

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

Effectivity: See TOC

21-21-00

CONFIG. 1
Pag. 504
Jul. 15/04

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


RECIRCULATION FAN,

HF49 (HF50)

REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
WARNING:

BEFORE POWER IS SUPPLIED TO THE AIRCRAFT, MAKE SURE THAT ELECTRICAL


CIRCUITS UPON WHICH WORK IS IN PROGRESS ARE ISOLATED.

1. Equipment and Materials


ITEM

DESIGNATION

A.

ITEM 20-15-01

Circuit Breaker Safety Clips and Tags

B.

Warning Notices

C.

Protective Caps

D.

Ducting Blanks

E.

LN9424-1F3504SA

Lockwire

Referenced Procedures:
- 06-41-51,
- 20-21-00,
- 21-21-00,
- 53-24-20,

P.
P.
P.
P.

Block
Block
Block
Block

1
1
501
401

- Access Provision - Interior


- Standard Torques
- Distribution System
- Center Fuselage Floor panels

2. Procedure
A.

Job Set-Up
(1) Put warning notice in flight compartment telling personnel not to
use the air conditioning system.
(2) Open, safety and tag the following circuit breakers:

(3)

PANEL

SERVICE

FIN

MISCELLANEOUS

AIR CONDITIONING

HF3 (HF4)

Remove the access panel 241BF (242AF) to get access to the


recirculation fan (Ref.06-41-51, P. Block 1) and
(Ref. 53-24-20, P. Block 401).

Effectivity: See TOC

21-21-11

Pag. 401
Dec. 15/07

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


B.

Removal (Fig. 401)


(1) Disconnect electrical connector (5) from receptacle (4) and
install protective caps to connector (5) and receptacle (4).
(2) Remove retaining nut (15) and washer (16) fastening earthing
strip (17) to ground point (18).
(3) Remove and keep clamp (9) and (13).

** On A/C: SA01,SA02,PA01,BW01
(4) Remove and keep check valve (12).
** On A/C: All
(5) Remove lockwire from bolts (1).
(6) Remove retaining bolts (1) and washers (2) fastening
recirculating fan (6) to mounting (3).
(7) Remove recirculating fan (6).
(8) Install blanks to recirculating fan ports (7), (11) and exposed
ducting (10), (14).
C.

Preparation for Installation (Fig. 401)

** On A/C: Except SA01, SA02, BW01, PA01


(1) Inspect recirculation fan (6) for signs of damage and corrosion.
** On A/C: SA01, SA02, BW01, PA01
(1) Inspect recirculation fan (6) and check valve (12) for signs of
damage and corrosion.
** On A/C: All
(2) Remove blanks from recirculating fan ports (7), (11) and ducting
(10), (14).
D.

Installation (Fig. 401)

** On A/C: SA01, SA02, BW01, PA01


(1) Install check valve (12) to ducting (14).

Effectivity: See TOC

21-21-11

Pag. 402
Dec. 15/07

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


Recirculation Fan HF49 (HF50)

CM1.21.21.11.4AO.00.00-02

Fig. 401 Recirculation Fan HF49 (HF50)

Effectivity: See TOC

21-21-11

Pag. 403
Dec. 15/07

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


** On A/C: All
(2) Install recirculating fan (6) loosely to mounting (3) with
washers (2) and retaining bolts (1).
(3) Make sure that ducting (10) is correctly aligned, and fasten to
recirculating fan port (7) clamp (9). Torque the clamp (9) to 50
lbfin (5,65 Nm).
** On A/C: SA01, SA02, BW01, PA01
(4) Make sure that check valve (12) is in the correct position.
** On A/C: All
(5) Make sure that ducting (14) is correctly aligned.
(6) Fasten ducting (14) to recirculating fan port (11) with clamp
(13). Torque the clamp (13) to 50 lbfin (5,65 Nm) .
(7) Torque the bolts (1) to the standard value
(Ref.20-21-00, P. Block 1) and safety vertical pairs with
lockwire LN9424-1F3504SA.
(8) Remove protective caps and connect electrical connector (5) to
receptacle (4).
E.

Test
(1) Do adjustment/test procedure (Ref. 21-21-00, P. Block 501).

F.

Close-Up
(1) Make sure that work area is clean and clear of tools and
miscellaneous equipment.
(2) Install the access panel 241BF (242AF) to get access to the
recirculation fan (Ref.06-41-51, P. Block 1) and
(Ref. 53-24-20, P. Block 401).
(3) Remove warning notice.

Effectivity: See TOC

21-21-11

Pag. 404
Dec. 15/07

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


FACE OUTLET
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

1. Equipment and Materials


ITEM

DESIGNATION

A.

ITEM 20-15-01

Circuit Breaker Safety Clips and Tags

B.

Duct Blank

2. Procedure
A.

Job Set-Up
(1) Open, safety and tag these circuit breakers:

B.

PANEL

SERVICE

FIN

MISCELLANEOUS

AIR CONDITIONING

HF1

MISCELLANEOUS

AIR CONDITIONING

HF2

Removal (Fig. 401)


(1) Remove screws (2) and remove retaining plate (3) with face outlet
(4) from panel (1).
(2) Disconnect face outlet (4) from retaining plate (3).

C.

Installation (Fig. 401)


(1) Connect face outlet (4) to retaining plate (3) and tighten.
(2) Install retaining plate (3) and face outlet (4) on panel (1) and
fasten with retaining screws (2).

D.

Test (Fig. 401)


(1) Test nozzle swivel action and make certain that outlet will open
and close satisfactorily by the action of knurled knob (5).

Effectivity: See TOC

21-21-16

Pag. 401
Jul. 31/06

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


E.

Close-Up
(1) Make sure that working area is clean and clear of tools and
miscellaneous equipment.
(2) Remove safety clips and tags.

Effectivity: See TOC

21-21-16

Pag. 402
Jul. 31/06

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


Face Outlet

CM1.21.21.16.4AO.00.00-00

Fig. 401 Face Outlet

Effectivity: See TOC

21-21-16

Pag. 403
Jul. 31/06

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

Effectivity: See TOC

21-21-16

Pag. 404
Jul. 31/06

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


FOOT WARMER BUTERFLY VALVE
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

1. Equipment and Materials


ITEM

DESIGNATION

A.

ITEM 20-15-01

Circuit Breaker Safety Clips and Tags

B.

Duct Blank

C.

Warning Notice

D.

CAN68089-2272

Straps

Referenced Procedures:
- 21-21-00, P. Block 501

- Distribution and Recirculation System

2. Procedure
A.

Job Set-Up
(1) Open, safety and tag the following circuit breakers:
PANEL

SERVICE

FIN

MISCELLANEOUS

AIR CONDITIONING

HF1 (HF2)

(2) Put warning notice in flight compartment telling personnel not to


use air conditioning system.
(3) Get to foot warmer valve.
B.

Removal (Fig. 401)


(1) Remove knob (1) from extension (8).
(2) Remove straps (6) and discard.
(3) Remove hoses (5).
(4) Remove screws (4) and washers (3) fastening valve (7) to support
(2).
(5) Carefully remove valve assembly (7).

Effectivity: See TOC

21-21-17

Pag. 401
Jul. 15/04

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


(6) Install blanks to hoses (5) and valve (7).
C.

Preparation for Installation (Fig. 401)


(1) Remove knob (1) from valve assembly (7).
(2) Remove blanks from hoses (5) and valve (7).

D.

Installation (Fig. 401)


(1) Install valve (7) so that extension (8) goes into hole (9) in
console (10).
(2) Line up holes in valve (7) mounting bracket with holes in support
(2) and fasten with washers (3) and screws (4). Torque tighten
screws (4) to standard torque value.
(3) Install hoses (5) to valve (7).
(4) Install new straps (6).
(5) Install knob (1) to extension (8).

E.

Test
(1) Do adjustment/test (Ref. 21-21-00, P. Block 501).

F.

Close-Up
(1) Make sure that working area is clean and clear of tools and
miscellaneous equipment.
(2) Install console panels previously removed.
(3) Remove warning notice.

Effectivity: See TOC

21-21-17

Pag. 402
Jul. 15/04

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


Foot Warmer Valve

CM1.21.21.17.4AO.00.00-03

Fig. 401 Foot Warmer Valve

Effectivity: See TOC

21-21-17

Pag. 403
Jul. 15/04

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

Effectivity: See TOC

21-21-17

Pag. 404
Jul. 15/04

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


PILOT AIR OUTLET
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

1. Equipment and Materials


ITEM

DESIGNATION

A.

ITEM 20-15-01

Circuit Breaker Safety Clips and Tags

B.

Duct blank

Referenced Procedures:
- 21-21-00, P. Block 501

- Distribution and Recirculation System

2. Procedure
A.

Job Set-Up
(1) Open, safety and tag the following circuit breaker:

B.

PANEL

SERVICE

FIN.

MISCELLANEOUS

AIR CONDITIONING

HF1 (HF2)

Removal (Fig. 401)


(1) Remove screws (1) and cover (2) with difusser (4) from panel (6).
(2) Separate plate (5), difusser (4) and bushing (3).
(3) Install, blank on exposed duct support (7).

C.

Preparation for installation (Fig. 401)


(1) Install difusser (4), bushing (3) and plate (5) on cover (2).

D.

Installation (Fig. 401)


(1) Remove duct blank from duct support (7).
(2) Line up holes in cover (2), ceiling panel (6) and duct support
(7), and fasten with screws (1).
(3) Tighten screws (1) to standard torque value.

Effectivity: See TOC

21-21-20

Pag. 401
Mar. 31/00

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


E.

Test
(1) Do distribution and recirculation system functional test
(Ref. 21-21-00, P. Block 501).

F.

Close-up
(1) Make sure that working area is clean and clear of tools and
miscellaneous equipment.
(2) Remove safety clips and tags.

Effectivity: See TOC

21-21-20

Pag. 402
Mar. 31/00

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


Pilot Air Outlet

CM1.21.21.20.4AO.00.00-00

Fig. 401 Pilot Air Outlet

Effectivity: See TOC

21-21-20

Pag. 403
Mar. 31/00

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

Effectivity: See TOC

21-21-20

Pag. 404
Mar. 31/00

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


INDIVIDUAL OUTLET-PASSENGER CABIN
DESCRIPTION/OPERATION

1. General
The individual distribution of the conditioned air is thru two
distribution ducts on passenger compartment area.
2. Component Location (Fig. 1)
ITEM

FIN

1.

DESIGNATION

ZONE

Duct Assembly

200

ACCESS
PANEL

REFERENCE

21-22-11

3. Description
Conditioned air from the recirculation system is sent thru a duct
assembly. This duct distributes the conditioning air along the passenger
compartment.
4. Component Description
The duct assembly is a long duct located in the passenger compartment area
and has a lot of holes to divide the conditioning air to the passenger.
5. Operation
When the recirculation fans are operated, the air is sent to the condenser
and mixer, but a part is sent to the passengers via the duct assembly with
holes.
6. Interfaces
The system interfaces with the recirculation and distribution system.

Effectivity: See TOC

21-22-00

CONFIG. 2
Pag. 1
Sep. 1/94

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


Individual Outlets - Component Location

CM1.21.22.00.0AO.00.02-00

Fig. 1 Individual Outlets - Component Location

Effectivity: See TOC

21-22-00

CONFIG. 2
Pag. 2
Sep. 1/94

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


DUCT ASSEMBLY
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
BEFORE POWER IS SUPPLIED TO THE AIRCRAFT, MAKE SURE THAT THE
ELECTRICAL CIRCUITS UPON WHICH WORK IS IN PROGRESS ARE ISOLATED.

WARNING:

1. Reason for the Job


To remove and install a duct assembly when it has a fault or to get access
to other equipment.
2. Equipment and Materials
ITEM

DESIGNATION

A.

ITEM 20-15-01

Circuit Breaker Safety Clips and Tags

B.

Ducting Blanks

C.

Warning Notices

D.

CAN36046-1

Tape

3. Procedure
A.

Job Set-Up
(1) Open, safety and tag the following circuit breaker:
PANEL

SERVICE

FIN

MISCELLANEOUS

AIR CONDITIONING

HF3 (HF4)

(2) Put warning notices in the flight compartment telling personnel


not to use the aircraft air conditioning system.
B.

Removal (Fig. 401)


(1) Loosen the screws (1) and remove the tapes (5) and (9).
(2) Remove the hoses (10) from the inlet connection duct (8).
(3) Remove the screws (1), washers (2) and clamps (3).
(4) Remove the ducts (4), (6) and (7).

Effectivity: See TOC

21-22-11

CONFIG. 1
Pag. 401
Mar. 31/00

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


(5) Install blanks on all open ducts.
C.

Installation (Fig. 401)


(1) Remove the blanks from the ducts.
(2) Install the duct (6) with the clamps (3), washers (2) and screws
(1). Do not tighten the screws.
(3) Install the hoses (10) to the inlet connections duct (8) with
tape (9).
(4) Install the ducts (4) and (7) with the clamps (3), screws (1) and
the washers (2). Do not tighten the screws.
(5) Align the holes of ducts (4), (6) and (7).
(6) Install tapes (5) to the ducts (4), (6) and (7).
(7) Tighten the screws (1) to the standard torque value.

D.

Close-Up
(1) Remove the safety clips and tags and close the following circuit
breaker:
PANEL

SERVICE

FIN

MISCELLANEOUS

AIR CONDITIONING

HF3 (HF4)

(2) Remove the warning notices.


(3) Make sure that the work area is clean and clear of tools and
miscellaneous equipment.

Effectivity: See TOC

21-22-11

CONFIG. 1
Pag. 402
Mar. 31/00

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


Duct Assembly

CM1.21.22.11.4AO.00.01-00

Fig. 401 Duct Assembly

Effectivity: See TOC

21-22-11

CONFIG. 1
Pag. 403
Mar. 31/00

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

Effectivity: See TOC

21-22-11

CONFIG. 1
Pag. 404
Mar. 31/00

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


AVIONICS AND ELECTRONIC BAY VENTILATION
DESCRIPTION/OPERATION

1. General
The avionic bay area is cooled by air thru the naca scoop when the
aircraft is in the air and by a fan when the aircraft is on the ground .
The electronic equipment in the lateral console area in the flight
compartment is ventilated by a fan installed under floor in the passenger
compartment it extracts the air in that area and sends it to the ramp door
area.
2. Component Location (Fig. 1)
ITEM

FIN

DESIGNATION

ZONE

ACCESS
PANEL

REFERENCE

1.

HF73

Electronic bay Fan

151

251BF

21-24-11

2.

HF93
(HF94)

Avionics Fan

127
128

127CL
128CR

21-24-12

3.

PC14

MISCELLANEOUS C/B
Panel

213

24-58-11

HF3

AIR CONDITIONING
Circuit Breaker

HF4

AIR CONDITIONING
Circuit Breaker

ZD124

AIR CONDITIONING
Control Unit

212

21-11-18

HF68

RECIRC FAN AVIONIC


ON/OFF Switch

5.

HF69

Fuse

221

24-50-00

6.

ZD101

Relays Box

221

221CL

24-58-14

HF67

Relay

221

24-58-14

4.

Effectivity: See TOC

21-24-00

CONFIG. 1
Pag. 1
Jul. 15/10

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


Avionic and Electronic Bay Ventilation - Component Location

CM1.21.24.00.0AO.00.01-00

Fig. 1 Avionic and Electronic Bay Ventilation - Component Location

Effectivity: See TOC

21-24-00

CONFIG. 1
Pag. 2
Jul. 15/10

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


3. Description
Ram air for cooling the avionic equipment in each avionic compartment is
supplied thru a NACA Scoop. A circulation fan HF93 (HF94) is installed
between FR8 and FR9 in each avionic compartment, which circulates the
cooling air in the compartment. While the aircraft is on the ground, both
circulation fans HF93 (HF94) operate; in the air, the dc supply to both
circulation fans HF93 (HF94) is open circuit.
The electronic bay fan HF73, installed in-line in the underfloor ducting
forward of FR25 at STA 11740, sucks the air from the lateral console area
and sends the air to the ramp door area at STA 14142.
A RECIRC FAN AVIONIC ON/OFF switch, HF68, on the AIR CONDITIONING control
unit, ZD124, controls the operation of the avionics bay fan HF93 (HF94)
and electronic bay fan HF73.
4. Component Description
A.

Electronic Bay Fan, HF73 (Fig. 2)


The electronic bay fan, HF73, includes an alloy casing flanged at
each end to help installation, and an impeller driven by a brushless
24VDC motor. A static inverter output is connected to the motor field
coils to give a rotating field which induces an electromagnetic field
(emf) in the rotor conductor bars and causes the rotor to turn. The
motor speed is proportional to the pulse frequency output of the
static inverter. Maximum speed of the rotor is 15000 rpm. Cooling of
the motor is by the passage of air from the avionics bay thru the
impeller.
If the motor temperature increases to 110 5 C, the security device
stops the fan until temperature decreases to 65 5 C.

B.

Avionics Fan HF93 (HF94) (Fig. 3)


The electro-fan includes an alloy casing flanged at one end for
installation, and an impeller driven by a brushless 24VDC motor. A
static inverter output is connected to the motor field coils to give
a rotating field which induces an emf in the rotor conductor bars and
causes the rotor to turn. The motor speed is proportional to the
pulse frequency output of the static inverter. Maximum speed of the
rotor is 12000 rpm with extraction rate of 25 l/s.(0.26 gal/s)

Effectivity: See TOC

21-24-00

CONFIG. 1
Pag. 3
Jul. 15/10

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


Electronic Bay Fan

CM1.21.24.00.0BO.00.01-00

Fig. 2 Electronic Bay Fan


Avionics Fan

CM1.21.24.00.0CO.00.01-00

Fig. 3 Avionics Fan

Effectivity: See TOC

21-24-00

CONFIG. 1
Pag. 4
Jul. 15/10

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


5. Operation (Fig. 4) and (Fig. 5)
A.

RECIRC FAN AVIONIC ON/OFF switch, HF68, on the AIR CONDITIONING


control unit, ZD124, controls the operation of the avionics fan HF93
(HF94) and the in-line electronic bay fan HF73. When RECIRC FAN
AVIONIC ON/OFF switch, HF68,is set to ON, a 28VDC supply from AIR
CONDITIONING circuit breaker, HF3, thru the contacts of RECIRC FAN
AVIONIC ON/OFF switch, HF68, energizes the coil of relay HF67 in the
LH relays box ZD101.
(1) Aircraft on the Ground
With the LH (RH) weight-on-wheels microswitch HB17 (KE8) in the
"ground" position, relays HB51 (HB50) in the LH (RH relays box
ZD101 (ZD102) respectively, are de-energized and the following
supplies are connected:
(a) 28VDC from AIR CONDITIONING circuit breaker, HF3, is
supplied thru the de-energized contacts of relay HB51, thru
the energized contacts of relay HF67, to the brushless motor
of LH avionics fan HF93 which operates.
(b) 28VDC from AIR CONDITIONING circuit breaker, HF4, is
supplied thru the de-energized contacts of relay HB50, thru
the energized contacts of relay HF67, to the brushless motor
or RH avionics fan HF94 which operates.
(c) 28VDC from fuse HF69 is supplied thru the energized contacts
of relay HF67 to the brushless motor of in-line electronic
bay fan HF73 which operates.
When the avionics fan HF93 (HF94) operates, it circulates cooling
air in the avionic compartment, while the aircraft is on the
ground.
Operation of the in-line electronic bay fan HF73 ventilates the
avionic compartments. Suction thru the open ports of the ducting
in the avionic compartments directs the air flow rearwards thru
underfloor ducting, to vent direct to atmosphere at STA 14142.
(2) Aircraft in the air
With the LH (RH) weight-on-wheels microswitch HB17 (KE8) in the
"air" position, relay HB51 (HB50) energizes with a 28VDC supply
from WARNING No. 1 circuit breaker, QB47,1 and WARNING No. 2
circuit breaker, XA2, respectively.

Effectivity: See TOC

21-24-00

CONFIG. 1
Pag. 5
Jul. 15/10

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


Avionic and Electronic Bay Ventilation - Mechanical Schematic Diagram

CM1.21.24.00.0DO.00.01-00

Fig. 4 Avionic and Electronic Bay Ventilation - Mechanical Schematic Diagram

Effectivity: See TOC

21-24-00

CONFIG. 1
Pag. 6
Jul. 15/10

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


Avionics and Electronic Bay Ventilation - Operation and interface

CM1.21.24.00.0EO.00.01-00

Fig. 5 Avionics and Electronic Bay Ventilation - Operation and interface

Effectivity: See TOC

21-24-00

CONFIG. 1
Pag. 7
Jul. 15/10

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


With relay HB51 (HB50) energized, the 28VDC to avionics fan HF93
(HF94) is open circuit and the fan stops. The in-line electronic
bay fan continues operating to ventilate the avionic
compartments.
Ram air thru the NACA scoop inlet in each avionic compartment
supplies the cooling air to the respective avionic compartment.
When the aircraft lands, the LH (RH) weight-on-wheels microswitch
HB17 (KE8) is in the "ground" position, and the relay HB51 (HB50)
de-energize. The 28VDC supply to the avionics fan HF93 (HF94) is
reconnected and the fan operates.
6. Interfaces
The system interfaces with the following systems:
- Electrical Load Distribution (Ref. 24-50-00, P. Block 1)
- Propeller Deicing System (Ref. 30-61-00, P. Block 1)

Effectivity: See TOC

21-24-00

CONFIG. 1
Pag. 8
Jul. 15/10

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


AVIONICS AND ELECTRONIC BAY VENT
TROUBLESHOOTING
WARNING:

BEFORE POWER IS SUPPLIED TO THE AIRCRAFT, MAKE SURE THAT ELECTRICAL


CIRCUITS UPON WHICH WORK IS IN PROGRESS ARE ISOLATED.

1.
ELECTRONIC BAY FAN HF73 DOES
NOT OPERATE WHEN RECIRC FAN
AVIONIC ON/OFF SWITCH HF68 ON
AIR CONDITIONING CONTROL UNIT
ZD124 IS SET TO ON.

IS AVIONICS FAN
HF93 (HF94)
OPERATING?
YES

SUPPORT EQUIPMENT REQUIRED:


-MULTIMETER
-EXTERNAL POWER SUPPLY

AT ELECTRONIC BAY
FAN HF73, DO A DC
SUPPLY TEST AT
CONNECTOR HF37a,
BETWEEN PIN A AND
B.

YES

ELECTRONIC BAY FAN


HF73 IS SUSPECT.
REPLACE FAULTY
ELECTRONIC BAY FAN
HF73
(Ref. 21-24-11, P.
Block 401).

IS DC SUPPLY
AVAILABLE?
NO

NO
AT LH RELAYS BOX
ZD101, DO A DC
SUPPLY TEST AT
CONNECTOR ZD101g,
BETWEEN PIN G AND
FRAME.
IS DC SUPPLY
FAULTY?

YES

FUSE HF69 IN
ELECTRICAL RACK
No. 1 OR WIRING
BETWEEN ELECTRICAL
RACK No. 1 AND
CONNECTOR ZD101g
ON LH RELAYS BOX
ZD101 IS SUSPECT.
REPAIR OR REPLACE
FAULTY FUSE OR
WIRING
(Ref. 24-00-10, P.
Block 401).

NO
1

SEE NEXT PAGE

Effectivity: See TOC

2 SEE NEXT PAGE

21-24-00

CONFIG. 1
Pag. 101
Nov. 30/97

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


1

FROM PREVIOUS
PAGE

NO
AT AIR
CONDITIONING
CONTROL UNIT
ZD124, DO A DC
SUPPLY TEST AT
CONNECTOR ZD124a
WAFER B, BETWEEN
PIN 4 AND FRAME.

2 FROM PREVIOUS
PAGE
NO

AT LH RELAYS BOX
ZD101, DO A DC
SUPPLY TEST AT
CONNECTOR ZD101f
WAFER A, BETWEEN
PIN 12 AND FRAME.
YES

IS DC SUPPLY
AVAILABLE?

YES

RELAY HF67 IN LH
RELAYS BOX ZD101
IS SUSPECT.
REPLACE FAULTY
RELAY HF67
(Ref. 24-00-10, P.
Block 401).

IS DC SUPPLY
AVAILABLE?

NO

NO

WIRING BETWEEN AIR


CONDITIONING
CONTROL UNIT ZD124
AND MISCELLANEOUS
C/B PANEL PC14 IS
SUSPECT. REPAIR OR
REPLACE FAULTY
WIRING
(Ref. 24-00-10, P.
Block 401).

RECIRC FAN AVIONIC


ON/OFF SWITCH HF68
IS SUSPECT.
REPLACE FAULTY
AVIONIC SWITCH
HF68 OR AIR
CONDITIONING PANEL
ZD124
(Ref. 21-11-18, P.
Block 401).

YES

WIRING BETWEEN AIR


CONDITIONING
CONTROL UNIT ZD124
AND LH RELAYS BOX
ZD101 IS SUSPECT.
REPAIR OR REPLACE
FAULTY WIRING
(Ref. 24-00-10, P.
Block 401).

IS FAULTY STILL
APPARENT?

Effectivity: See TOC

21-24-00

CONFIG. 1
Pag. 102
Nov. 30/97

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


2.
AVIONICS FAN HF93 (HF94) DOES
NOT OPERATE WHEN RECIRC FAN
AVIONIC ON/OFF SWITCH HF68 ON
AIR CONDITIONING CONTROL UNIT
ZD124 IS SET TO ON.

IS ELECTRONIC BAY
FAN HF73
OPERATING?
YES

SUPPORT EQUIPMENT REQUIRED:


-MULTIMETER
-EXTERNAL POWER SUPPLY

AT AVIONICS FAN
HF93 (HF94), DO A
DC SUPPLY TEST AT
CONNECTOR HF93a
(HF94a), BETWEEN
PIN A AND B.

YES

AVIONICS FAN HF93


(HF94) IS SUSPECT.
REPLACE FAULTY
AVIONICS FAN HF93
(HF94)
(Ref. 21-24-12, P.
Block 401).

IS DC SUPPLY
AVAILABLE?

NO

NO
AT LH RELAYS BOX
ZD101, DO A DC
SUPPLY TEST AT
CONNECTOR ZD101f,
WAFER A (ZD101b
WAFER B), BETWEEN
PIN 19 AND FRAME.
IS DC SUPPLY
FAULTY?

NO
1

YES

C/B HF3 (HF4) IN


MISCELLANEOUS C/B
PANEL PC14 OR
WIRING BETWEEN
MISCELLANEOUS C/B
PANEL PC14 AND LH
RELAYS BOX ZD101
IS SUSPECT. REPAIR
OR REPLACE FAULTY
C/B OR WIRING
(Ref. 24-00-10, P.
Block 401).

NO
SEE NEXT PAGE

Effectivity: See TOC

SEE NEXT PAGE

21-24-00

CONFIG. 1
Pag. 103
Nov. 30/97

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


1

FROM PREVIOUS PAGE

NO

FROM PREVIOUS PAGE

NO
RELAY HB51 (HB50)
IN LH RELAYS BOX
ZD101 (RH RELAYS
BOX ZD102) IS
SUSPECT. REPLACE
FAULTY RELAY
(Ref. 24-00-10, P.
Block 401).

AT AIR
CONDITIONING PANEL
ZD124, DO A DC
SUPPLY TEST AT
CONNECTOR ZD124a
WAFER B, BETWEEN
PIN 4 AND FRAME.

YES

AT LH RELAYS BOX
ZD101, DO A DC
SUPPLY TEST AT
CONNECTOR ZD101f
WAFER A, BETWEEN
PIN 12 AND FRAME.
IS DC SUPPLY
AVAILABLE?

IS DC SUPPLY
AVAILABLE?

NO
1

YES

RELAY HF67 IN LH
RELAYS BOX ZD101
IS SUSPECT.
REPLACE FAULTY
RELAY HF67
(Ref. 24-00-10, P.
Block 401).

NO
SEE NEXT PAGE

Effectivity: See TOC

SEE NEXT PAGE

21-24-00

CONFIG. 1
Pag. 104
Nov. 30/97

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


1

FROM PREVIOUS PAGE

NO

FROM PREVIOUS PAGE

NO
RECIRC FAN AVIONIC
ON/OFF SWITCH HF68
IS SUSPECT.
REPLACE FAULTY
SWITCH HF68 OR AIR
CONDITIONING
CONTROL UNIT ZD124
(Ref. 21-11-18, P.
Block 401).
HAS FAULT CLEARED?
NO
WIRING BETWEEN LH
RELAYS BOX ZD101
AND AIR
CONDITIONING PANEL
ZD124 IS SUSPECT.
REPAIR OR REPLACE
FAULTY WIRING
(Ref. 24-00-10, P.
Block 401).

WIRING BETWEEN AIR CONDITIONING


CONTROL UNIT ZD124 AND
MISCELLANEOUS C/B PANEL PC14 IS
SUSPECT. REPAIR OR REPLACE
FAULTY WIRING
(Ref. 24-00-10, P. Block 401).

Effectivity: See TOC

21-24-00

CONFIG. 1
Pag. 105
Nov. 30/97

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

Effectivity: See TOC

21-24-00

CONFIG. 1
Pag. 106
Nov. 30/97

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


AVIONICS AND ELECTRONIC BAY VENTILATION
ADJUSTMENT/TEST
WARNING:

BEFORE POWER IS SUPPLIED TO THE AIRCRAFT, MAKE SURE THAT ELECTRICAL


CIRCUITS UPON WHICH WORK IS IN PROGRESS ARE ISOLATED.

1. Operational Test of the Electronic Bay Fan, HF73


A.

Reason for the Job


To make sure that the fan operates correctly.

B.

Equipment and Materials


ITEM

DESIGNATION

(1)

ITEM 24-40-01
ITEM 24-40-02

or

Ground Power Unit (GPU)

(2)

Standard Tool

Shorting Link

(3)

Standard Tool

Warning Notices

Referenced Procedures:
- 24-40-00, P. Block 201
- 53-24-20, P. Block 401
C.

- External Power
- Center Fuselage Floor Panels

Procedure
(1) Job Set-Up
(a) Put warning notices in position telling personnel that a
test is in progress.
(b) Connect GPU ITEM 24-40-01 or ITEM 24-40-02, and switch on
aircraft electrical system (Ref. 24-40-00, P. Block 201).

** On A/C: All, except EA01F


(c) Remove floor panel 251BF to get access to the electronic bay
fan (Ref. 53-24-20, P. Block 401).
** On A/C: EA01F
(c) Remove floor panel 231LF to get access to the electronic bay
fan (Ref. 53-24-20, P. Block 401).

Effectivity: See TOC

21-24-00

CONFIG. 1
Pag. 501
Jul. 01/09

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


** On A/C: All
(d) Close this circuit breaker:
PANEL

SERVICE

FIN

MISCELLANEOUS

AIR CONDITIONING

HF3

(2) Test
ACTION
** On A/C:

RESULT

All, except EA01F


(a) On the AIR CONDITIONING
control unit, ZD124, set the
RECIRC FAN AVIONIC switch,
HF68, to ON.

The electronic bay fan HF73


operates.
The air flows through the
exhaust port of the
ventilation duct, on the ramp
door area (STA 14142).

** On A/C: EA01F
(a) On the AIR CONDITIONING
control unit, ZD124, set the
RECIRC FAN AVIONIC switch,
HF68, to ON.

The electronic bay fan HF73


operates.
The air flows through:
- The exhaust port of the
ventilation duct, on the
ramp door area (STA 14142).
- The diffuser assembly (STA
6152) to prevent fogging on
the internal surface of the
photographic camera window.

** On A/C: All
(b) Examine the installation for
vibration and excessive
noise.

Effectivity: See TOC

No vibration apparent. Noise


level satisfactory.

21-24-00

CONFIG. 1
Pag. 502
Jul. 01/09

ACTION

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


RESULT

(c) On the AIR CONDITIONING


control unit, ZD124, set the
RECIRC FAN AVIONIC switch,
HF68, to OFF.

The electronic bay fan HF73


stops.

(3) Close-Up
** On A/C: All, except EA01F
(a) Install floor panel 251BF (Ref. 53-24-20, P. Block 401).
** On A/C: EA01F
(a) Install floor panel 231LF (Ref.53-24-20, P. Block 401).
** On A/C: All
(b) Remove warning notices.
(c) Switch off aircraft electrical system and disconnect GPU
ITEM 24-40-01 or ITEM 24-40-02
(Ref. 24-40-00, P. Block 201).
(d) Make sure that work area is clean and clear of tools and
miscellaneous equipment.

Effectivity: See TOC

21-24-00

CONFIG. 1
Pag. 503
Jul. 01/09

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


2. Operational Test of the Avionics Bay Fan, HF93 (HF94)
A.

Reason for the Job


To make sure that the fan operates correctly.

B.

Equipment and Materials


ITEM

DESIGNATION

(1)

ITEM 24-40-01
ITEM 24-40-02

or

Ground Power Unit (GPU)

(2)

Standard Tool

Shorting Link

(3)

Standard Tool

Warning Notices

Referenced Procedures:
- 06-41-53, P. Block 1
- 24-40-00, P. Block 201
C.

- Access Provision - Fuselage


- External Power

Procedure
(1) Job Set-Up
(a) Put warning notices in position telling personnel that a
test is in progress.
(b) Connect GPU ITEM 24-40-01 or ITEM 24-40-02, and switch on
aircraft electrical system (Ref. 24-40-00, P. Block 201).
(c) Remove panels 127CL (128CR) to get access to the avionic bay
fan (Ref. 06-41-53, P. Block 1).
(d) Close these circuit breakers:
PANEL

SERVICE

FIN

MISCELLANEOUS

AIR CONDITIONING

HF3

MISCELLANEOUS

AIR CONDITIONING

HF4

BATTERY BUS No. 1

WARNING No. 1

QB47

BATTERY BUS No. 2

WARNING No. 1

QB46

Effectivity: See TOC

21-24-00

CONFIG. 1
Pag. 504
Jul. 01/09

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

(2) Test
ACTION

RESULT

(a) On the AIR CONDITIONING


control unit, ZD124, set
RECIRC FAN AVIONIC switch,
HF68, to ON.

The LH (RH) avionic bay fans


HF93 (HF94) operate.

(b) Examine the installation for


vibration and excessive
noise.

No vibration apparent. Noise


level satisfactory.

(c) Open, safety and tag the


WARNING No. 1 circuit
breaker, QB47 (QB46).

The avionic bay fans HF93


(HF94) stay in operation.

The air flows through the fan


exhaust port.

The avionic bay fans HF93


(d) On the LH (RH) main landing
(HF94) stay in operation.
gear, disconnect the
electrical connector HB17a
(KE8a) from the
weight-on-wheels microswitch.
Install shorting link across
pins A and C and pins D and F
of the connector HB17a (KE8a)
respectively.
(e) Remove the safety clip and
The avionic bay fans HF93
tag and close circuit breaker (HF94) stop.
QB47 (QB46).
(f) Open, safety and tag the
circuit breaker QB47 (QB46).

The avionic bay fans HF93


(HF94) operate.

(g) On the LH (RH) main landing


The avionic bay fans HF93
gear remove the shorting link (HF94) stay in operation.
from the connector HB17a
(KE8a) and reconnect the
connector HB17a (KE8a) to the
weight-on-wheels microswitch
HB17 (KE8).

Effectivity: See TOC

21-24-00

CONFIG. 1
Pag. 505
Jul. 01/09

ACTION

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


RESULT

(m) On the AIR CONDITIONING


control unit ZD124, set the
RECIRC FAN AVIONIC switch,
HF68, to OFF.

The avionic bay fans HF93


(HF94) stop.

(3) Close-Up
(a) Install panel 127CL (128CR) (Ref. 06-41-53, P. Block 1).
(b) Remove warning notices.
(c) Switch off aircraft electrical system and disconnect GPU
ITEM 24-40-01 or ITEM 24-40-02
(Ref. 24-40-00, P. Block 201).
(d) Make sure that work area is clean and clear of tools and
miscellaneous equipment.

Effectivity: See TOC

21-24-00

CONFIG. 1
Pag. 506
Jul. 01/09

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


ELECTRONIC BAY FAN

HF73

REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
WARNING:

BEFORE POWER IS SUPPLIED TO THE AIRCRAFT, MAKE CERTAIN THAT


ELECTRICAL CIRCUITS UPON WHICH WORK IS IN PROGRESS ARE ISOLATED.

1. Equipment and Materials


ITEM

DESIGNATION

A.

ITEM 20-15-01

Circuit Breaker Safety Clips and Tags

B.

Standard Tool

Protective Caps

C.

Standard Tool

Ducting Blanks

D.

Standard Tool

Warning Notice

Referenced Procedures:
- 20-21-00, P. Block 1
- 21-24-00, P. Block 501
- 53-24-20, P. Block 401

- Standard Torques
- Avionics and Electronics Bay Ventilation
- Center Fuselage Floor Panels

2. Procedure
A.

Job Set-Up
(1) Open, safety and tag with ITEM 20-15-01 the circuit breaker:
PANEL

SERVICE

FIN

MISCELLANEOUS

AIR CONDITIONING

HF3

(2) Put warning notice in position in flight compartment telling


personnel not to use the aircraft air conditioning system.
** On A/C: All, except EA01F
(3) Remove the floor panel 251BF to get access to the fan
(Ref. 53-24-20, P. Block 401).
** On A/C: EA01F

Effectivity: See TOC

21-24-11

CONFIG. 1
Pag. 401
Jul. 01/09

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


(4) Remove the floor panel 231LF to get to get access to the fan
(Ref. 53-24-20, P. Block 401).
** On A/C: All
B.

Removal (Fig. 401 and Fig. 401A)


(1) Disconnect the electrical connector (3) and install protective
caps to the connector (3) and receptacle (4).
(2) Loosen the hose clamp (2) and remove the hose end (1) from the
fan inlet port (12).
(3) Loosen the hose clamp (8) and remove the hose end (9) from the
fan outlet port (6).
(4) Remove the bolts (11) and washers (10), and remove the electronic
fan assembly (5) from the structure (7).
(5) Install blanks to the hose ends (1) and (9) and to the fan ports
(6) and (12).

C.

Preparation for Installation (Fig. 401 and Fig. 401A)


(1) Remove blanks from the hose ends (1), (9) and from the fan ports
(6) and (12).
(2) Inspect the electronic bay fan (5) for signs of damage.

D.

Installation (Fig. 401 and Fig. 401A)


(1) Put the outlet port (6) of the fan (5) through the hole of the
structure (7).
(2) Attach the fan (5) to the structure (7) with the bolts (11) and
washers (10). Torque the bolts (11) to the standard value
(Ref.20-21-00, P. Block 1).

Effectivity: See TOC

21-24-11

CONFIG. 1
Pag. 402
Jul. 01/09

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


Electronic Bay Fan

CM1.21.24.11.4AO.00.01-00

Fig. 401 Electronic Bay Fan

Effectivity: All except, EA01F

21-24-11

CONFIG. 1
Pag. 403
Jul. 01/09

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

CM1.21.24.11.4AA.00.01-00

Electronic Bay Fan


Fig. 401A Electronic Bay Fan

Effectivity: EA01F

21-24-11

CONFIG. 1
Pag. 404
Jul. 01/09

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


(3) Install the hose end (9) on the outlet port (6) and fasten with
the hose clamp (8).
(4) Install the hose end (1) on the fan inlet port (12) and fasten
with the hose clamp (2).
(5) Remove protective caps and connect the electrical connector (3)
to receptacle (4).
E.

Test
(1) Do the Operational Test procedure for the Electronic Bay Fan
(Ref. 21-24-00, P. Block 501).

F.

Close-Up
(1) Install floor panels previously removed
(Ref. 53-24-20, P. Block 401).
(2) Remove the warning notice.
(3) Make sure that work area is clean and clear of tools and
miscellaneous equipment.

Effectivity: See TOC

21-24-11

CONFIG. 1
Pag. 405
Jul. 01/09

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

Effectivity: See TOC

21-24-11

CONFIG. 1
Pag. 406
Jul. 01/09

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


AVIONIC - BAY FAN,

HF93 (HF94)

REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
WARNING:

BEFORE ELECTRICAL POWER IS SUPPLIED TO THE AIRCRAFT, MAKE CERTAIN


THAT ELECTRICAL CIRCUITS UPON WHICH WORK IS IN PROGRESS ARE
ISOLATED.

1. Equipment and Materials


ITEM

DESIGNATION

A.

ITEM 20-15-01

Circuit Breaker Safety Clips and Tags

B.

Protective Caps and Plugs (Electrical)

C.

Warning Notice

Referenced Procedures:
- 06-41-53, P. Block 1
- 20-21-00, P. Block 1
- 21-24-00, P. Block 501

- Access Provision - Fuselage


- Standard Torques
- Avionics and Electronics Bay Ventilation

2. Procedure
A.

Job Set-Up
(1) Put warning notice in position in flight compartment telling
personnel not to use the air conditioning system.
(2) Open, safety and tag circuit breaker AIR CONDIT, HF3 (HF4).
(3) Remove the access panels 127CL (128CR)
(Ref. 06-41-53, P. Block 1).

Effectivity: See TOC

21-24-12

Pag. 401
Dec. 15/07

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


AVIONICS Bay Fan

CM1.21.24.12.4AO.00.00-01

Fig. 401 AVIONICS Bay Fan

Effectivity: See TOC

21-24-12

Pag. 402
Dec. 15/07

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


B.

Removal (Fig. 401)


(1) Disconnect electrical connector (6) from bulkhead receptacle (5)
at frame 10. Install blanking cap and plug.
(2) Remove and keep bolt (1) and washer (2) which hold cable clamp
(3) to bracket mounting (4). Remove and keep cable clamp (3).
(3) Remove nuts (11), washers (10) and screws (9) which hold fan (13)
to aircraft structure (8).
(4) Remove fan (13) from aircraft. Remove and keep plate (7).

C.

Preparation for Installation


(1) Remove blanks from fan inlet and outlet ports.
(2) Inspect fan for signs of damage.
(3) Remove blanking cap from electrical connector and inspect pins
for damage or distortion.

D.

Installation (Fig. 401)


(1) Put plate (7) in position. Install fan (13) with screws (9),
washers (10) and nuts (11). Torque the nuts (11) to the standard
value (Ref.20-21-00, P. Block 1).
(2) Remove blanking plug from bulkhead electrical receptacle (5) and
connect connector (6).
(3) Put cable clamp (3) around cable. Put cable clamp (3) in position
on bracket mounting (4) and install with bolt (1) thru washer (2)
and into bracket mounting (4).
(4) Make certain that cable is not under tension. Torque the bolt (1)
to the standard value (Ref.20-21-00, P. Block 1).

E.

Test
(1) Do adjustment/test procedure (Ref. 21-24-00, P. Block 501).

Effectivity: See TOC

21-24-12

Pag. 403
Dec. 15/07

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


F.

Close-Up
(1) Make sure that work area is clean and clear of tools and
miscellaneous equipment.
(2) Install the access panels 127CL (128CR)
(Ref. 06-41-53, P. Block 1).
(3) Remove warning notice.

Effectivity: See TOC

21-24-12

Pag. 404
Dec. 15/07

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


PRESSURIZATION CONTROL
DESCRIPTION/OPERATION

1. General
The pressurization control includes those units and components necessary
to control and keep air pressure within the aircraft fuselage pressurized
zone for passenger and flight crew comfort.
A selected value of pressure can be kept either automatically or manually
by controlling the operation of electropneumatic valves which discharge
air conditioning to the atmosphere.
** On A/C: SERIES 10, SERIES 100, SERIES 200
The aircraft pressurization system keeps a nominal value of positive
differential pressure of 3,6 0,05 psi. This is equivalent to a cabin
altitude of 8000 ft when the aircraft is at an altitude of 18000 ft.
The value of the maximum differential pressure is the protection value of
the outflow valves: 3,8 0,1 psi.
** On A/C: SERIES 300
The aircraft pressurization system keeps a nominal value of positive
differential pressure of 5,58 0,12 psi. This is equivalent to a cabin
altitude of 7722 ft when the aircraft is at an altitude of 25000 ft.
The value of the maximum differential pressure is the protection value of
the outflow valves: 5,67 0,1 psi.

Effectivity: See TOC

21-30-00

Pag. 1
Jul. 15/04

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

Effectivity: See TOC

21-30-00

Pag. 2
Jul. 15/04

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


PRESSURIZATION CONTROL SYSTEM
DESCRIPTION/OPERATION

1. General
The pressurization control system maintains a pressurized area for the
comfort of the passenger and flight crew.
The pressurized area, which includes the flight compartment and the
passenger/cargo compartment (the cabin), is sealed to increase the
efficiency of the system. Air is discharged from the pressurized area
through two outflow valves. A cabin pressure controller and a cabin
pressure selector control the operation of the outflow valves. The rate of
discharge through the two valves gives the required pressure.
Automatic or manual control of the pressurization control system can be
selected in the flight compartment.
In an emergency the pressure can be discharged quickly from controls in
the flight compartment.
2. Component Location (Fig. 1)
ITEM

FIN

DESIGNATION

ZONE

1.

DN3

Differential
Pressure Transducer

212

21-31-16

2.

HE5

Cabin Pressure
Controller

212

21-31-12

3.

HE2

Cabin Pressure
Selector

212

21-31-11

4.

DN2

Cabin Pressure
Indicator

212

21-31-13

5.

HE7

Primary Outflow
Valve

261

21-31-17

6.

HE8

Secondary Outflow
Valve

262

21-31-18

Effectivity: See TOC

ACCESS
PANEL

21-31-00

REFERENCE

CONFIG. 1
Pag. 1
Dec. 01/03

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


Pressurization Control System - Component Location

CM1.21.31.00.0AO.01.01-00

Fig. 1 Pressurization Control System - Component Location (Sheet 1 of 3)

Effectivity: See TOC

21-31-00

CONFIG. 1
Pag. 2
Dec. 01/03

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

CM1.21.31.00.0AO.02.01-00

Fig. 1 Pressurization Control System - Component Location (Sheet 2 of 3)

Effectivity: See TOC

21-31-00

CONFIG. 1
Pag. 3
Dec. 01/03

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

CM1.21.31.00.0AO.03.01-00

Fig. 1 Pressurization Control System - Component Location (Sheet 3 of 3)

Effectivity: See TOC

21-31-00

CONFIG. 1
Pag. 4
Dec. 01/03

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


ITEM

FIN

7.

8.

DESIGNATION

ZONE

Jet Pump

262

21-31-21

Air Check Valve

261

21-31-22
21-31-14

9.

HE17

Solenoid Valve

262

10.

PC12

BATTERY BUS 2
C/B Panel

212

HE1

ACCESS
PANEL

REFERENCE

24-50-03

CABIN PRESS
Circuit Breaker

** On A/C: S/N 001010


11.

ZD9

R MISCELLANEOUS
Control Unit

HE3

Pressure Dump Switch

212

34-21-13

213

24-30-13

** On A/C: S/N 011999


11.

ZD134
HE3

MSTR ELEC Control


Unit
Pressure Dump Switch

12.

Static Port

262

13.

HE13, HE14
HE15, HE16

Microswitch

811

21-31-23

** On A/C: All, except CL01


14.

ZD102
HE9

RH Relay Box

222

222CR

24-58-14

222

222CR

Relay

** On A/C: CL01
14.

HE9

Right Relays Support


Relay

** On A/C: All
15.

GB16

WOW Microswitch

741

32-42-28

** On A/C: POST.SB.235-21-12M, S/N 140999


16.

Vacuum Control Valve

222

21-31-15

** On A/C: All

Effectivity: See TOC

21-31-00

CONFIG. 1
Pag. 5
Dec. 01/03

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

3. Description
The cabin pressure controller HE5, in the flight compartment RH console at
STA 3101, electrically controls an electropneumatic transfer valve on the
primary outflow valve HE7, at STA 19550.
Primary and secondary outflow valves HE7 and HE8, on the rear pressure
bulkhead at STA 19550, are connected pneumatically and respond in tandem
to the electropneumatic transfer valve pneumatic signal. Action of these
pneumatic poppet-type outflow valves controls the flow of air discharging
from the fuselage pressurized area during normal system operation.
Static ports installed at STA 18100 and STA 18210 supply true static
pressure to the primary and secondary outflow valve HE7 and HE8.
The cabin pressure controller HE5 is programmed with signals from the
landing gear switch GB16 throttle position switch ZD133, and cabin
pressure selector HE2, to give automatically full cabin pressure control.
On the rear pressure bulkhead at STA 19550, a solenoid valve HE17 is
installed in the pipeline between the jet jump and safety valves with a
T-adaptor.
** On A/C: PRE.SB.235-52-25M, All except CL01, FR02, FR03, KR01, OM01, TH01,
TK01, TK04, TK04A, TK04B
The solenoid valve de-energizes and closes when all external doors are
closed and locked, allowing the pressurization system to operate. When one
or more of the external doors is open, the valve energizes and opens, thus
preventing the operation of the pressurization control.
** On A/C: POST.SB.235-52-25M, CL01, FR02, FR03, KR01, OM01, TH01, TK01,
TK04, TK04A, TK04B
The solenoid valve de-energizes and closes when the right front external
door and cargo doors are closed and locked, allowing the pressurization
system to operate. When one or both doors is open, the valve energizes and
opens, thus preventing the operation of the pressurization control.
** On A/C: All
An AUTO/MAN switch on the cabin pressure selector HE2, when set to the MAN
position, gives manual control in the event of a malfunction in the
automatic mode.

Effectivity: See TOC

21-31-00

CONFIG. 1
Pag. 6
Dec. 01/03

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


In the automatic mode, the control system uses a fixed schedule of cabin
altitude versus atmospheric altitude as a basis for automatic regulation
of cabin pressure in flight. This function is programmed into the
electronics, and additional logic is added to do all inflight corrections
automatically that would, otherwise, have to be adjusted manually.
The automatic mode lets the system operate without monitoring the rate of
change or cabin altitude and prevents the necessity for the selection of
cruise cabin altitude and cabin rate of change for ascent and descent.
The automatic schedule is based on a 600 ft/min cabin climb rate and 400
ft/min cabin descent to avoid infringement of the differential pressure
requirement.
The control system also includes a cabin altitude isobaric hold function
and manual controller for manual control in the event of loss of
electrical power or at the discretion of the operator.
The cabin air pressure can be discharged by setting the system selector
switch to MAN and operating the manual control. A differential pressure
transducer DN3, forward of the flight compartment RH console at STA 2618,
senses cabin and outside static pressure and sends a signal to the cabin
pressure indicator.
4. Component Description
A.

Differential Pressure Transducer, DN3


The differential pressure transducer sends a signal to the cabin
pressure indicator. The signal is independent of cabin altitude and
cabin rate of change signals.
The electrical signal consists of 0-100 mVDC, which corresponds to
0-10 psi differential pressure.
A diffused semiconductor sensing chip detects outside static air
pressure from the auxiliary pitot/static probe and cabin air pressure
through a vent hole in the transducer case.
The unit is calibrated to give a standardized output so that
adjustment is not required on installation.
Temperature compensation circuits are used for optimum accuracy for
balanced incremental programming.

Effectivity: See TOC

21-31-00

CONFIG. 1
Pag. 7
Dec. 01/03

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


B.

Cabin Pressure Controller, HE5


The cabin pressure controller includes a digital electronic package
within a metal case. External features include electrical receptacle,
attachment fitting for an external static pressure sensing line,
cabin pressure sensing port, and unit mounting attachment brackets.
The electronic package accepts and computes electrical signals from
the cabin pressure selector HE2, compares cabin and outside static
pressures and transmits command signals to the outflow valves HE7 and
HE8 to adjust cabin pressure to the required setting. Included in the
information supplied to the unit are signals from the cabin and cargo
door lock switches, weight-on-wheels switch, and engine control lever
position switches.

C.

Cabin Pressure Selector, HE2


The cabin pressure selector includes an indicator which shows
selected landing field altitude and barometric pressure, a system
FAULT annunciator controlled by the cabin pressure controller HE5, an
AUTO/MAN selector switch, and a manual control unit with control
switch labeled UP/DN and a rotary selector labeled DECR/INCR.
All components are installed on a control panel and contained within
a metal case. Quick release fasteners attached to the corners of the
panel face facilitate removal and installation of the assembly.
An electrical receptacle is installed on the rear face of the unit,
and two pressure connections give attachment points for a direct
pressure link from the manual control to the secondary outflow valve
and to the rear (unpressurized) side of the aircraft rear pressure
bulkhead.
A pressure sensing port lets the manual control unit accept cabin air
pressure when required.
When the AUTO/MAN selector switch is set to the AUTO position, the
manual control does not operate, and the cabin pressure controller
HE5, controls the operation. When the switch is set to the MAN
position, the cabin pressure controller does not operate. Thus, the
UP/DN manual switch controls the cabin pressure as follows:
- The UP position increases the cabin altitude (the cabin pressure
decreases)
- The DN position decreases the cabin altitude (the cabin pressure
increases).
The rotary selector determines the rate of change of cabin altitude
pressure.

Effectivity: See TOC

21-31-00

CONFIG. 1
Pag. 8
Dec. 01/03

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


D.

Cabin Pressurization Indicator, DN2


The cabin pressurization indicator includes three independent
indicator units installed on a control panel. Quick-release
fasteners, attached to the corners of the panel face, facilitate
removal and installation of the assembly.
An electrical receptacle installed on the rear face of the casing
gets signals from the pressure transducer DN3, and a filtered cabin
pressure connector is installed adjacent to the receptacle.
Hinged access panels are provided on the top surface of the assembly
casing to give access to the individual indicator units.
On the control panel face, the LH indicator shows differential
pressure and is calibrated from 0 to 5 in psi. The unit gets an
electrical signal corresponding to the differential pressure sensed
by the pressure transducer DN3. The indicator is labelled DIFF PSI.
The center indicator shows cabin altitude and is calibrated from 0 to
25000 feet in increments of 500 ft up to 10000 ft, and then in
increments of 5000 ft to 25000 ft. The unit gets sensed cabin
pressure through the filtered cabin pressure pneumatic connection.
The indicator is labelled CABIN ALT.
The right hand indicator shows cabin altitude rate of change and is
calibrated from 0 to 3 UP and 0 to 3 DOWN, showing rate of change in
thousands of feet per minute. The indicator is labelled RATE.
A switch in the indicator operates at a preset cabin altitude to
open/close the negative return line for a warning signal to the
flight warning system.

E.

Primary Outflow Valve, HE7 (Fig. 2)


The primary outflow/safety valve is a diaphragm-operated, poppet-type
valve connected pneumatically to the secondary outflow valve HE8, and
biased toward the closed position by the action of a spring. The unit
controls the flow of conditioned air discharging from the cabin at a
rate dictated by the electropneumatic transfer valve installed on the
unit front face.
The transfer valve is an electropneumatic flow control valve which
regulates the pressure felt on the diaphragms of both outflow valves
and causes them to open or close as necessary to keep the desired
cabin pressure.

Effectivity: See TOC

21-31-00

CONFIG. 1
Pag. 9
Dec. 01/03

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


Primary Outflow Valve

CM1.21.31.00.0BO.00.01-00

Fig. 2 Primary Outflow Valve


Secondary Outflow Valve

CM1.21.31.00.0CO.00.01-00

Fig. 3 Secondary Outflow Valve

Effectivity: See TOC

21-31-00

CONFIG. 1
Pag. 10
Dec. 01/03

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


Positive and negative relief facilities are an automatic function of
the outflow valve and are independent of other modes of operation.
When the cabin-to-atmosphere pressure differential reaches 3,8 0,1
psi, the pressure relief device causes the outflow valve to open as
necessary to keep the differential pressure to the calibrated value.
If cabin inflow and system vacuum are lost, the valve closes. As the
aircraft descends, and cabin altitude increases to more than the
aircraft altitude, a negative pressure differential develops between
cabin and atmosphere. The valve will open to limit this differential
to less than 10 in. H 2O.
F.

Secondary Outflow Valve, HE8 (Fig. 3)


The secondary outflow valve is a diaphragm-operated, poppet-type
valve which is connected pneumatically to the primary outflow valve
HE7, and biased toward the closed position by the action of a spring.
In conjunction with the primary outflow valve HE7, the unit controls
the flow of air discharging from the cabin at a rate dictated by the
electropneumatic transfer valve installed on the primary outflow
valve HE7.
An isobaric hold assembly, installed on the front face of the valve,
includes a spring-loaded-closed metering valve and a sensing
diaphragm used to regulate cabin pressure when the system is in the
manual mode. In the automatic mode, both sides of the sensing
diaphragm are subjected to the same pressure, and spring action
closes the metering valve. Positive and negative pressure relief
facilities are the same as the primary outflow valve features.

G.

Jet Pump
The jet pump is a pneumatic device designed to give the line vacuum
necessary to operate the primary outflow valve HE7.
The jet pump includes an engine bleed air inlet port, a vacuum
control port and a bleed air exhaust port which vents to atmosphere.
Engine bleed air passing through the jet pump from the inlet port to
the exhaust port causes a low pressure area (vacuum). At this low
pressure area is the vacuum control port which, in turn, is connected
by pipe to the primary outflow valve HE7.

Effectivity: See TOC

21-31-00

CONFIG. 1
Pag. 11
Dec. 01/03

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


H.

Air Check Valve


The air check valve makes certain that there is vacuum relief when
the system is in the manual mode of operation. In the event that
atmospheric pressure is less than the vacuum pressure in the
secondary outflow valve HE8, the air check valve will open to
equalize the air pressure.

J.

Solenoid Valve, HE17


The solenoid valve has a cylindrical body with pipe connectors
installed at both inlet and outlet ports. Electrical cables,
internally connected to the contacts of the solenoid, are covered
with heat resistant tubing and form part of the valve assembly.

** On A/C: PRE.SB.235-52-25M, All except CL01, FR02, FR03, KR01, OM01, TH01,
TK01, TK04, TK04A, TK04B
The valve is in the normally closed position and is energized when
any of the external doors is open, thus preventing the pressurization
control system from operating.
** On A/C: POST.SB.235-52-25M, CL01, FR02, FR03, KR01, OM01, TH01, TK01,
TK04, TK04A, TK04B
The valve is in the normally closed position and is energized when
the right front external door or cargo doors are open, thus
preventing the pressurization control system from operating.
** On A/C: All
K.

Circuit Breaker, HE1


The circuit breaker is identified CABIN PRESS and rated at 5 amps.

L.

Pressure Dump Switch, HE3


The pressure dump switch is for emergency release of pressure.

** On A/C: PRE.SB.235-21-07/07M
M.

Static Port
Two static ports, riveted to the skin of the aircraft, supply true
static pressure to the primary and secondary outflow valve HE7 (HE8).
A rigid tube cross-connects both static ports.

** On A/C: POST.SB.235-21-07/07M, S/N 089999

Effectivity: See TOC

21-31-00

CONFIG. 1
Pag. 12
Dec. 01/03

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


M.

Static Port
Two static ports, riveted to the skin of the aircraft, supply true
static pressure to the primary and secondary outflow valve HE7 (HE8).

** On A/C: All
N.

Microswitch HE13, HE14, HE15 and HE16


The microswitches are installed under the floor of the ramp door. The
microswitches close circuit when the ramp door is unlocked.

** On A/C: POST.SB.235-21-12M, S/N 140999


P.

Vacuum Control Valve


During the depressurization in manual mode, the vacuum control valve
in the vacuum line controls the rate of pressure change within the
specified limits.

** On A/C: All
5. Operation (Fig. 4, Fig. 4A, Fig. 5, Fig. 5A, Fig. 5B, Fig. 6 and Fig. 7)
The pressurization control system controls the air pressure within the
aircraft pressurized zone by controlling the operation of the primary and
secondary outflow valves which meter the outflow of cabin conditioned air.
A.

Automatic
(1) Ground Mode
Cabin pressurization control is started when the following
conditions are met:
- Aircraft on the ground
- Engine power control levers at idle

** On A/C: PRE.SB.235-52-25M, All except CL01, FR02, FR03, KR01, OM01, TH01,
TK01, TK04, TK04A, TK04B
- All external doors are closed and locked (solenoid HE17
de-energized)
** On A/C: POST.SB.235-52-25M, CL01, FR02, FR03, KR01, OM01, TH01, TK01,
TK04, TK04A, TK04B
- The right front external door and cargo doors are closed and
locked (solenoid HE17 de-energized)
** On A/C: All

Effectivity: See TOC

21-31-00

CONFIG. 1
Pag. 13
Dec. 01/03

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


- The mode switch of the cabin pressure selector HE2 is set to
AUTO
- Electrical power is available
28VDC power is supplied from BAT BUS 2 through the CAB PRESS
circuit breaker, HE1, and the relay HE9, to the cabin pressure
selector HE2 and cabin pressure controller HE5.
The FAULT annunciator on the cabin pressure selector HE2 comes on
momentarily, to indicate that the cabin pressure controller HE5
has started a self-test sequence. The self-test sequence takes
approximately 3 seconds and on completion the FAULT annunciator
goes off.
The cabin pressure controller HE5 computes that:
(a) Aircraft is on the ground with a signal from the
weight-on-wheels microswitch GB16.
(b) Engine power controls are set at idle with a signal from the
throttle position microswitch in the control quadrant ZD133.
** On A/C: PRE.SB.235-52-25M, All except CL01, FR02, FR03, KR01, OM01, TH01,
TK01, TK04, TK04A, TK04B
(c) Cabin and cargo doors are closed and locked with signals
from the LH cabin door microswitches WJ5 and WA35, RH cabin
door microswitches WJ2 and WA36 and cargo door microswitches
HE13 (HE14), HE15 (HE16), MB19 (MB20), MB21 (MB22) and,
where applicable, WJ6, WJ4 and WA63.
** On A/C: POST.SB.235-52-25M, CL01, FR02, FR03, KR01, OM01, TH01, TK01,
TK04, TK04A, TK04B
(c) The right front exterior door and cargo doors are closed and
locked with signals from the RH cabin door microswitches WJ2
and WA36 and cargo door microswitches HE13 (HE14), HE15
(HE16), MB19 (MB20), MB21 (MB22).
** On A/C: All
The cabin pressure controller HE5 then supplies an electrical
signal to the primary outflow valve, HE7 to open the
electropneumatic valve. Engine HP air supplied to the jet pump
will cause a vacuum supply to fully open the primary outflow
valve HE7.
The secondary outflow valve HE8, being connected to the primary
outflow safety valve HE7 through a pneumatic pipe, also fully
opens.

Effectivity: See TOC

21-31-00

CONFIG. 1
Pag. 14
Dec. 01/03

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


With the mode switch of the cabin pressure selector HE2 set to
AUTO, all in flight pressurization control including descend to
land, is done automatically. It is only necessary to set landing
field altitude, barometric correction and desired rate selection
on the cabin pressure selector HE2.
(2) Take-Off Pre-Pressurization Mode
When the engine power controls are set to TAKE-OFF (greater than
85 percent power setting) the cabin pressure controller HE5
determines cabin pressure level, that existed just before
advancement of the throttles beyond the engine power take-off
point, and keeps this pressure value as a point of reference.
The cabin pressure controller HE5 then sends an electrical signal
to close the electropneumatic control valve in the primary
outflow valve HE7, thus decreasing the vacuum available to begin
to close the valve. At the same time, the secondary outflow valve
HE8 begins to close. The action of the primary outflow valve HE7,
and secondary outflow valve HE8 closing is to decrease the cabin
altitude (increases pressure) at the selected rate until it is
approximately 140 ft below the noted point of reference altitude.
The primary and secondary outflow valves HE7 (HE8) are therefore
in a controlling position when the aircraft leaves the ground.
They make sure that there is enough pressurization to prevent any
ground pressure transient effects at the valve discharge points
from affecting the cabin pressure. If there is no cabin air flow,
the outflow valves HE7 (HE8) go to the fully closed position.
In the event that take-off is aborted and the engine power
controls returned to IDLE, the cabin pressure controller HE5
senses the operation of the throttle position switch on the
control quadrant ZD133.
A signal from the cabin pressure controller HE5 will cause the
cabin pressure to return to outside pressure at the selected rate
of change. The system therefore returns to the ground mode with
both outflow valves HE7 and HE8 in the fully open position.

Effectivity: See TOC

21-31-00

CONFIG. 1
Pag. 15
Dec. 01/03

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


Pressurization Control System - Mechanical Schematic

CM1.21.31.00.0DO.00.01-00

Fig. 4 Pressurization Control System - Mechanical Schematic

Effectivity: PRE.SB.235-21-07/07M

21-31-00

CONFIG. 1
Pag. 16
Dec. 01/03

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

CM1.21.31.00.0DA.00.01-00

Pressurization Control System - Mechanical Schematic


Fig. 4A Pressurization Control System - Mechanical Schematic

Effectivity: POST.SB.235-21-07/07M, S/N 089999

21-31-00

CONFIG. 1
Pag. 17
Dec. 01/03

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


Pressurization Control System - Theoretical Schematic

CM1.21.31.00.0EO.00.01-00

Fig. 5 Pressurization Control System - Theoretical Schematic

Effectivity: PRE.SB.235-52-25M,All except CL01,


FR02/03,KR01,OM01,TH01,TK01,TK04/A/B

21-31-00

CONFIG. 1
Pag. 18
Dec. 01/03

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

CM1.21.31.00.0EA.00.01-00

Pressurization Control System - Theoretical Schematic


Fig. 5A Pressurization Control System - Theoretical Schematic

Effectivity: POST.SB.235-52-25M, FR02, FR03, KR01,


OM01, TH01, TK01, TK04, TK04A, TK04B

21-31-00

CONFIG. 1
Pag. 19
Dec. 01/03

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

CM1.21.31.00.0EB.00.01-00

Pressurization Control System - Theoretical Schematic


Fig. 5B Pressurization Control System - Theoretical Schematic

Effectivity: CL01

21-31-00

CONFIG. 1
Pag. 20
Dec. 01/03

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


Aircraft Altitude Versus Cabin Altitude, Automatic Schedule

CM1.21.31.00.0FO.00.01-00

Fig. 6 Aircraft Altitude Versus Cabin Altitude, Automatic Schedule

Effectivity: See TOC

21-31-00

CONFIG. 1
Pag. 21
Dec. 01/03

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


(3) Flight Mode
As the aircraft leaves the ground, the weight-on-wheels switch
GB16 gives a signal, corresponding to aircraft-off-the-ground, to
the cabin pressure controller HE5, causing the control logic to
switch to the flight mode.
The cabin pressure controller HE5 looks at all input signals and
computes the correct auto-schedule cabin altitude in relation to
the present aircraft altitude. This value is then compared with
the selected landing airfield altitude and uses the higher
altitude figure as the control value. The cabin pressure
controller HE5, then controls the outflow valves HE7 and HE8 as
necessary to increase or decrease cabin altitude towards this
control value, at a rate not more than the selected rate limit.
For most normal flight conditions the rate of change in cabin
pressure will be equivalent to less than 600 ft per minute
because the auto schedule is designed to keep to a minimum the
rate of change in cabin pressure.
Landing field altitude, rate of change limit, and barometric
correction may be adjusted as necessary at any time during
aircraft flight.
(4) Landing Mode
As the aircraft wheels touch the ground, the weight-on-wheels
switch GB16 gives a signal, corresponding to
aircraft-on-the-ground, to the cabin pressure controller HE5
causing the control logic to switch to the landing mode.
If the selected landing altitude is below the actual landing
altitude, the cabin pressure controller HE5 will increase the
cabin altitude at the selected rate for a maximum of 60 seconds,
or until cabin pressure and outside pressure are equalized. The
system then returns to the ground mode, and the cabin pressure
controller signals cause the outflow valves HE7 and HE8 to go to
the fully open position.
In the event that the engine power controls are advanced to the
TAKE-OFF position at any time during the landing sequence, the
cabin pressure controller HE5 will assume that a take-off is
about to occur, and will immediately begin the pre-pressurization
mode sequence.

Effectivity: See TOC

21-31-00

CONFIG. 1
Pag. 22
Dec. 01/03

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


B.

Manual Control Mode


In the event of a system power failure, or if the AUTO/MAN switch is
set to the MAN position, the system operates in the manual mode.
As electrical power is removed, the normally-closed solenoid in the
secondary outflow valve HE8, closes, keeping the last control
pressure in the isobaric hold control chamber. The isobaric hold
section keeps the necessary cabin pressure altitude by controlling
the pressure in the outflow valve HE7 and HE8 to equal the pressure
in the isobaric hold.
Cabin altitude is manually adjusted via the manual controller to
increase or decrease the control pressure. Holding the direction
selector lever in the necessary direction (UP or DN), causes cabin
altitude to move up or down as required. Rate of change is controlled
by turning the manual control rate selector knob clockwise or
counterclockwise.
When released, the direction selector lever automatically returns to
the center HOLD position.
In the manual mode, cabin pressure can be discharged to atmosphere by
putting the manual control direction selector lever in the UP
position and turning the RATE selector knob fully clockwise.

C.

Dump
The pressure dump is made when the following conditions occur:
(1) In AUTO mode, moving the switch DUM/PRESS to the DUMP position, a
signal is sent to the controller, the primary and secondary
valves open fully and the solenoid valve on the secondary valve
is energized to open.
(2) In MANUAL mode, the dump is made by moving the control switch
UP/DN to the UP position and the rotary selector DECR/INCR fully
clockwise.
(3) When a door is not closed and locked, a signal from any one of
the microswitches is sent to solenoid valve HE17 which opens the
vacuum pipeline between the two valves.

D.

Indication
Cabin pressure and outside static pressure are sensed by the
differential pressure transducer DN3, which sends a corresponding
electrical signal to the differential pressure and rate of change
indicators installed in the cabin pressure indicator DN2.

Effectivity: See TOC

21-31-00

CONFIG. 1
Pag. 23
Dec. 01/03

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


Cabin altitude is sensed by the CABIN ALT indicator unit through the
cabin pressure pneumatic connector on the rear face of the cabin
pressure indicator.
Electrical power to the indication system is supplied from BAT BUS 2
through CAB PRESS circuit breaker HE1 and connectors PC12a (B) pin 14
and DN2a pin C.
The integral warning switch, connected across pins J and K of
connector DN2a, operates at a preset level of cabin altitude. When
the cabin altitude reaches the operation level during pressurization,
the switch is open and the caption CABIN, in the red warning CWP WA5,
goes off.
In the event that the cabin altitude goes above the preset operation
level, the switch contacts will close. When the switch contacts
close, the caption CABIN comes on and the audible alarm and the red
warning signs of the flight warning system operate.
6. Interfaces (Fig. 5, Fig. 5A and Fig. 5B)
The pressure system interfaces with the following:
- Door Warning System
- Flight Warning System
- DC Distribution System
- Instruments and Panel Lighting
- Control Quadrant
- MLG - WOW Microswitch
- Cargo Door - Electrical System.

Effectivity: See TOC

21-31-00

CONFIG. 1
Pag. 24
Dec. 01/03

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


Pressurization Control System - Pressure Indicating Circuit

CM1.21.31.00.0GO.00.01-00

Fig. 7 Pressurization Control System - Pressure Indicating Circuit

Effectivity: See TOC

21-31-00

CONFIG. 1
Pag. 25
Dec. 01/03

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

Effectivity: See TOC

21-31-00

CONFIG. 1
Pag. 26
Dec. 01/03

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


PRESSURIZATION CONTROL SYSTEM
TROUBLESHOOTING
WARNING:

AIRCRAFT STRUCTURE MUST BE COMPLETE AND FIT FOR FLIGHT BEFORE TEST.

WARNING:

BEFORE STARTING PRESSURIZATION PROCEDURE, MAKE SURE THAT WARNING


NOTICES ARE DISPLAYED EXTERNALLY IN THE VICINITY OF ALL DOORS
TELLING PERSONNEL THAT PRESSURIZATION IS IN PROGRESS.

WARNING:

TELL PERSONNEL WORKING ON AIRCRAFT THAT PRESSURIZATION IS IMMINENT


AND MAKE SURE THAT THEY ARE MEDICALLY FIT TO REMAIN DURING TEST.
PERSONNEL WITH HEAVY COLD SYMPTOMS MUST BE INSTRUCTED TO VACATE
AIRCRAFT. ADMIT AUTHORIZED PERSONNEL ONLY AND MAKE SURE THAT THEY
ARE ADEQUATELY BRIEFED.

WARNING:

IN THE EVENT OF ANY PERSONNEL FEELING UNWELL DURING TEST, SLOWLY


RELEASE PRESSURE AND INSTRUCT AFFECTED PERSONNEL TO SEEK IMMEDIATE
MEDICAL ATTENTION.

WARNING:

BEFORE POWER IS SUPPLIED TO THE AIRCRAFT, MAKE SURE THAT ELECTRICAL


CIRCUITS UPON WHICH WORK IS IN PROGRESS ARE ISOLATED.

1. General
This section contains troubleshooting procedures for the air conditioning
pressurization control system. They should be used in conjunction with
troubleshooting procedures detailed in the distribution and temperature
control sections of the chapter.
The pressurization control system troubleshooting procedures should also
be used in conjunction with adjustment/test (Ref. 21-31-00, P. Block 501).

Effectivity: See TOC

21-31-00

CONFIG. 1
Pag. 101
Jul. 15/04

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


A.
CABIN PRESSURE DOES NOT
INCREASE ABOVE AMBIENT PRESSURE
IN AUTO MODE.

SUPPORT EQUIPMENT REQUIRED:


- GROUND POWER UNIT
- MULTIMETER

ON CABIN PRESSURE SELECTOR,


HE2, SET AUTO/MAN SWITCH TO THE
MAN POSITION.

REPLACE CABIN PRESSURE


CONTROLLER, HE5
(Ref. 21-31-12, P. Block 401).

YES

DOES CABIN PRESSURE INCREASE?


NO
ON CABIN PRESSURE
SELECTOR, HE2, SET
AUTO/MAN SWITCH TO
THE AUTO POSITION
AND PUT THROTTLE
LEVERS TO TAKE-OFF
POSITION.
YES

IS CABIN PRESSURE
THE SAME AS
AMBIENT PRESSURE?

ON CONTROL
QUADRANT,
DISCONNECT
ELECTRICAL
CONNECTOR, ZD133a
AND ZD133b. DO A
CONTINUITY TEST ON
THROTTLE POSITION
SWITCH BETWEEN
RECEPTACLES ZD133a
PIN A AND B,ZD133b
PIN A AND B.

Effectivity: See TOC

YES

IS THROTTLE
POSITION SWITCH
DEFECTIVE?

NO
1

REPLACE CONTROL
QUADRANT
(Ref. 76-10-11, P.
Block 401).

NO
SEE NEXT PAGE

SEE NEXT PAGE

21-31-00

CONFIG. 1
Pag. 102
Jul. 15/04

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


1

FROM PREVIOUS PAGE

NO

FROM PREVIOUS PAGE

NO
DO A CONTINUITY
TEST ON WIRING
BETWEEN CONTROL
QUADRANT ZD133 AND
RELAY BOX ZD102.

YES

REPAIR OR REPLACE
DEFECTIVE WIRING
(Ref.24-00-10, P.
Block 401).

IS WIRING
DEFECTIVE?
NO
REPAIR OR REPLACE
WIRING
(Ref.24-00-10, P.
Block 401).

DO A CONTINUITY
TEST ON WIRING
BETWEEN RELAY BOX
ZD102 AND CABIN
PRESSURE
CONTROLLER HE5.

YES

IS WIRING
DEFECTIVE?
NO
REPLACE RELAY BOX
ZD102
(Ref. 24-58-14, P.
Block 401).

Effectivity: See TOC

SEE NEXT PAGE

21-31-00

CONFIG. 1
Pag. 103
Jul. 15/04

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


1

FROM PREVIOUS PAGE

OPERATE
WEIGHT-ON-WHEELS
(WOW) SWITCH GB16
IN RH MLG BAY TO
SIMULATE FLIGHT
CONDITION.
YES

IS CABIN PRESSURE
THE SAME AS
AMBIENT PRESSURE?

SET ENGINE POWER


LEVERS AT IDLE AND
DISCONNECT WOW
CONNECTOR GB16a.
DO A CONTINUITY
TEST ON
RECEPTACLE, GB16a
PINS G, H, J, WITH
SIMULATED FLIGHT
CONDITION AND THEN
GROUND CONDITION.

REPLACE
WEIGHT-ON-WHEELS
SWITCH, GB16
(Ref. 32-42-28, P.
Block 401).
YES

IS WOW SWITCH
DEFECTIVE?

NO

NO
DO A CONTINUITY
TEST ON WIRING
BETWEEN WOW SWITCH
CONNECTOR GB16a
PIN H AND CABIN
PRESSURE
CONTROLLER
CONNECTOR, HE5a
PIN R.

REPAIR OR REPLACE
DEFECTIVE WIRING
(Ref.24-00-10, P.
Block 401).
YES

IS WIRING
DEFECTIVE?
NO
1

Effectivity: See TOC

SEE NEXT PAGE

SEE NEXT PAGE

21-31-00

CONFIG. 1
Pag. 104
Jul. 15/04

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


1

FROM PREVIOUS PAGE

FROM PREVIOUS PAGE

NO
DO A CONTINUITY
TEST ON WIRING
BETWEEN WOW SWITCH
CONNECTOR GB16a
AND RELAY BOX
CONNECTOR ZD102d
(B).

REPAIR OR REPLACE
WIRING
(Ref.24-00-10, P.
Block 401).
YES

IS WIRING
DEFECTIVE?
NO
DO A CONTINUITY
TEST ON WIRING
BETWEEN RELAY BOX
ZD102 AND CABIN
PRESSURE
CONTROLLER HE5.

REPAIR OR REPLACE
DEFECTIVE WIRING
(Ref.24-00-10, P.
Block 401).
YES

IS WIRING
DEFECTIVE?
NO
1

Effectivity: See TOC

SEE NEXT PAGE

SEE NEXT PAGE

21-31-00

CONFIG. 1
Pag. 105
Jul. 15/04

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


1

FROM PREVIOUS PAGE

FROM PREVIOUS PAGE

NO
REPAIR OR REPLACE
WIRING
(Ref.24-00-10, P.
Block 401).

DO A CONTINUITY
TEST ON WIRING
BETWEEN CABIN
PRESSURE
CONTROLLER
CONNECTOR, HE5a,
PINS M, N, E, G,
S, T, U AND CABIN
PRESSURE SELECTOR
CONNECTOR, HE2a,
PINS M, N, E, G,
S, T, U.

YES

IS WIRING
DEFECTIVE?
NO
AUTO/MAN SWITCH IS
SUSPECT. REPLACE
CABIN PRESSURE
SELECTOR HE2,
(Ref. 21-31-11, P.
Block 401).

Effectivity: See TOC

SEE NEXT PAGE

21-31-00

CONFIG. 1
Pag. 106
Jul. 15/04

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


1

FROM PREVIOUS
PAGE

NO
REMOVE FILTER ON PRIMARY
OUTFLOW VALVE, HE7.

YES

IS FILTER COMPLETELY BLOCKED?

CLEAN OR REPLACE FILTER


(Ref. 21-31-17, P. Block 301).
DOES CABIN PRESSURE INCREASE?

NO

NO

SUSPECT PRESSURE RELIEF


METERING VALVE FAILED OPEN OR
ISOBARIC HOLD FAILED OPEN.

SUSPECT CONTROL VALVE FAILED


OPEN OR RELIEF METERING VALVE
FAILED OPEN. REPLACE PRIMARY
OUTFLOW VALVE HE7
(Ref. 21-31-17, P. Block 401).

REPLACE SECONDARY OUTFLOW


VALVE, HE8
(Ref. 21-31-18, P. Block 401).
B.
IN THE GROUND MODE OF
OPERATION, CABIN PRESSURE
INCREASES AT AN UNCONTROLLED
RATE TO THE PRESSURE RELIEF
SETTING.

SUPPORT EQUIPMENT REQUIRED:


- MULTIMETER

ON CABIN PRESSURE SELECTOR,


HE2, MOVE AUTO/MAN LEVER TO MAN
POSITION. PUSH MANUAL TOGGLE
LEVER UP AND TURN RATE SELECTOR
KNOB CLOCKWISE.

REFER TO TROUBLESHOOTING
PROCEDURE "D"
(Ref. 21-31-00, P. Block 101).
YES

DOES CABIN PRESSURE REMAIN AT


RELIEF SETTING?
NO
1

Effectivity: See TOC

SEE NEXT PAGE

21-31-00

CONFIG. 1
Pag. 107
Jul. 15/04

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


1

FROM PREVIOUS PAGE

NO
ON CABIN PRESSURE SELECTOR,
HE2, RELEASE MANUAL TOGGLE
LEVER AND MOVE AUTO/MAN LEVER
TO AUTO. INSPECT PIPE BETWEEN
ENGINE BLEED AIR CONNECTION AND
JET PUMP.

REPLACE PIPE BETWEEN ENGINE


BLEED AIR CONNECTION AND JET
PUMP.
YES

IS PIPE DAMAGED?
NO
INSPECT JET PUMP.
IS JET PUMP BLOCKED OR DAMAGED?

YES

REPAIR OR REPLACE JET PUMP


(Ref. 21-31-21, P. Block 401).

NO
INSPECT PIPE BETWEEN JET PUMP
AND PRIMARY OUTFLOW VALVE.

YES

REPLACE PIPE BETWEEN JET PUMP


AND PRIMARY OUTFLOW VALVE.

IS PIPE DAMAGED?
NO
ON PRIMARY OUTFLOW VALVE, HE7,
DO A TEST ON ELECTRICAL
CONNECTOR, HE7a, PINS A, B FOR
ELECTRICAL POWER.

REPLACE PRIMARY OUTFLOW VALVE,


HE7
(Ref. 21-31-17, P. Block 401).
YES

IS ELECTRICAL POWER PRESENT?

NO
1

Effectivity: See TOC

SEE NEXT PAGE

21-31-00

CONFIG. 1
Pag. 108
Jul. 15/04

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


1

FROM PREVIOUS PAGE

NO
DO A CONTINUITY TEST ON WIRING
BETWEEN CABIN PRESSURE
CONTROLLER CONNECTOR HE5a PINS
J, K AND PRIMARY OUTFLOW VALVE
CONNECTOR HE7a PINS B, A.

REPAIR OR REPLACE DEFECTIVE


WIRING
(Ref.24-00-10, P. Block 401).
YES

IS WIRING DEFECTIVE?
NO
DO A CONTINUITY TEST ON
ELECTRICAL WIRING BETWEEN CABIN
PRESSURE CONTROLLER HE5 AND
RELAY BOX ZD102.

YES

REPAIR OR REPLACE DEFECTIVE


WIRING
(Ref.24-00-10, P. Block 401).

IS WIRING DEFECTIVE?
NO
DO A CONTINUITY TEST ON
ELECTRICAL WIRING BETWEEN CABIN
PRESSURE CONTROLLER CONNECTOR
HE5a PINS M, N, E, G, S, T, U
AND CABIN PRESSURE SELECTOR
CONNECTOR HE2a PINS M, N, E, G,
S, T, U.

REPAIR OR REPLACE DEFECTIVE


WIRING
(Ref.24-00-10, P. Block 401).
YES

IS WIRING DEFECTIVE?
NO
REPLACE CABIN PRESSURE
CONTROLLER, HE5
(Ref. 21-31-12, P. Block
CABIN PRESSURE SELECTOR,
(Ref. 21-31-11, P. Block
OR RELAY BOX ZD102
(Ref. 24-58-14, P. Block

Effectivity: See TOC

401)
HE2
401)
401).

21-31-00

CONFIG. 1
Pag. 109
Jul. 15/04

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


C.
SUPPORT EQUIPMENT REQUIRED:
- MULTIMETER

IN THE TAKE-OFF MODE OF


OPERATION, CABIN ALTITUDE DOES
NOT DECREASE (CABIN PRESSURE
DOES NOT INCREASE) WHEN
THROTTLE LEVERS ARE PUSHED
FORWARD.
GROUND MODE SATISFACTORY AND
RED WARNING CWP DOOR UNLKD
CAPTION OFF.

ON CONTROL QUADRANT, DISCONNECT


ELECTRICAL CONNECTORS ZD133a
AND ZD133b. DO TEST ON THROTTLE
POSITION SWITCH BETWEEN
RECEPTACLES ZD133A, PIN B AND
A, ZD133B, PIN A AND B.

REPLACE CONTROL QUADRANT


(Ref. 76-10-11, P. Block 401).
YES

IS THROTTLE POSITION SWITCH


DEFECTIVE?
NO
DO A CONTINUITY TEST ON WIRING
BETWEEN CONTROL QUADRANT ZD133
AND RELAY BOX ZD102.

YES

REPAIR OR REPLACE DEFECTIVE


WIRING
(Ref.24-00-10, P. Block 401).

YES

REPAIR OR REPLACE DEFECTIVE


WIRING
(Ref.24-00-10, P. Block 401).

IS WIRING DEFECTIVE?
NO
DO A CONTINUITY TEST ON WIRING
BETWEEN RELAY BOX ZD102 AND
CABIN PRESSURE CONTROLLER HE5.
IS WIRING DEFECTIVE?
NO
REPLACE CABIN PRESSURE
CONTROLLER HE5
(Ref. 21-31-12, P. Block 401)
OR RELAY BOX ZD102
(Ref. 24-58-14, P. Block 401).

Effectivity: See TOC

21-31-00

CONFIG. 1
Pag. 110
Jul. 15/04

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


D.
WITH ENGINE POWER LEVERS AT
TAKE-OFF AND WOW SWITCH GB16 IN
FLIGHT CONDITION, CABIN
ALTITUDE DOES NOT DECREASE MORE
THAN 300 FEET PER MINUTE OR
BECOME STABLE AT AUTO-SCHEDULE
CONTROL POINT OF SELECTED
LANDING FIELD ALTITUDE.

SUPPORT EQUIPMENT REQUIRED:


- MULTIMETER
- GROUND POWER UNIT

SET ENGINE POWER LEVERS AT


IDLE.

REFER TO TROUBLESHOOTING
PROCEDURE "A"
(Ref. 21-31-00, P. Block 101).

DOES CABIN PRESSURE BECOME


EQUAL WITH OUTSIDE AIR
PRESSURE?

YES

NO
DISCONNECT WOW CONNECTOR GB16a
AND DO A CONTINUITY TEST ON
RECEPTACLE GB16a, PINS G, H, J.

REPLACE WOW SWITCH, GB16


(Ref. 32-42-28, P. Block 401).
YES

IS WOW SWITCH DEFECTIVE?


NO
1

Effectivity: See TOC

SEE NEXT PAGE

21-31-00

CONFIG. 1
Pag. 111
Jul. 15/04

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


1

FROM PREVIOUS PAGE

NO
DO A CONTINUITY TEST ON WIRING
BETWEEN WOW SWITCH CONNECTOR
GB16a, PIN H, AND CABIN
PRESSURE CONTROLLER CONNECTOR
HE5a, PIN R.

REPAIR OR REPLACE DEFECTIVE


WIRING
(Ref.24-00-10, P. Block 401).
YES

IS WIRING DEFECTIVE?
NO
DO A CONTINUITY TEST ON WIRING
BETWEEN WOW SWITCH CONNECTOR
GB16a, PINS G, J AND RELAY BOX
ZD102 CONNECTOR ZD102e PINS 12,
13.

REPAIR OR REPLACE DEFECTIVE


WIRING
(Ref.24-00-10, P. Block 401).
YES

IS WIRING DEFECTIVE?
NO
DO A CONTINUITY TEST ON WIRING
BETWEEN RELAY BOX ZD102 AND
CABIN PRESSURE CONTROLLER HE5.

REPAIR OR REPLACE WIRING


(Ref.24-00-10, P. Block 401).
YES

IS WIRING DEFECTIVE?
NO
1

Effectivity: See TOC

SEE NEXT PAGE

21-31-00

CONFIG. 1
Pag. 112
Jul. 15/04

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


1

FROM PREVIOUS PAGE

NO
DO A POWER SUPPLY TEST ON RELAY
BOX ZD102 CONNECTOR ZD102d (A)
PIN 12.

REPLACE RELAY BOX ZD102


(Ref. 24-58-14, P. Block 401).
YES

IS POWER SUPPLY CORRECT?


NO
DO A CONTINUITY TEST ON WIRING
BETWEEN RELAY BOX CONNECTOR
ZD102d (A) PIN 12 AND CIRCUIT
BREAKER PANEL CONNECTOR PC12a
(B) PIN 13.

YES

REPAIR OR REPLACE DETECTIVE


WIRING
(Ref.24-00-10, P. Block 401)
OR FAULTY CIRCUIT BREAKER
PANEL.

IS WIRING DEFECTIVE?
NO
DO A CONTINUITY TEST ON WIRING
BETWEEN CABIN PRESSURE
CONTROLLER CONNECTOR, HE5a,
PINS M, N, E, G, S, T, U AND
CABIN PRESSURE SELECTOR
CONNECTOR, HE2a, PINS, M, N, E,
G, S, T, U.

REPAIR OR REPLACE DEFECTIVE


WIRING
(Ref.24-00-10, P. Block 401).
YES

IS WIRING DEFECTIVE?
NO
REPLACE CABIN PRESSURE
CONTROLLER, HE5,
(Ref. 21-31-12, P. Block 401)
OR CABIN PRESSURE SELECTOR,
HE2,
(Ref. 21-31-11, P. Block 401).

Effectivity: See TOC

21-31-00

CONFIG. 1
Pag. 113
Jul. 15/04

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


E.
IN MANUAL MODE, CABIN PRESSURE
DOES NOT INCREASE (I.E. REMAINS
EQUAL TO AMBIENT PRESSURE).

SUPPORT EQUIPMENT REQUIRED:


- GROUND POWER UNIT

ON CABIN PRESSURE SELECTOR HE2,


SET AUTO/MAN SWITCH TO AUTO
POSITION AND PUSH THROTTLE
LEVERS TO TAKE-OFF POSITION.

REFER TO TROUBLESHOOTING
PROCEDURE "A"
(Ref. 21-31-00, P. Block 101).
YES

DOES CABIN PRESSURE REMAIN THE


SAME?
NO
REPLACE CABIN PRESSURE
SELECTOR, HE2,
(Ref. 21-31-11, P. Block 401)
OR SECONDARY OUTFLOW VALVE,
HE8,
(Ref. 21-31-18, P. Block 401).
F.
CABIN AIR PRESSURE INCREASES
SLOWLY OR DOES NOT REACH
PRESSURE RELIEF SETTING.

SUPPORT EQUIPMENT REQUIRED:


- GROUND POWER UNIT

INSPECT FILTER ON PRIMARY


OUTFLOW VALVE.

CLEAN OR REPLACE FILTER


(Ref. 21-31-17, P. Block 301).
OR REPLACE PRIMARY OUTFLOW
VALVE, HE7
(Ref. 21-31-17, P. Block 401).

YES
IS FILTER CONTAMINATED?
NO
REPLACE CABIN PRESSURE
CONTROLLER, HE5,
(Ref. 21-31-12, P. Block 401)
OR SECONDARY OUTFLOW VALVE, HE8
(Ref. 21-31-18, P. Block 401).

Effectivity: See TOC

21-31-00

CONFIG. 1
Pag. 114
Jul. 15/04

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


G.
IN GROUND MODE, WITH MODE
SELECTOR SWITCH SET TO AUTO,
FAULT ANNUNCIATOR REMAINS
ALIGHT AFTER 3 SECONDS
SELF-TEST.

SUPPORT EQUIPMENT REQUIRED:


- GROUND POWER UNIT

MAKE SURE THAT SELECTIONS ON


SELECTOR HE2 ARE CORRECT INTO
THE USABLE SCALE. SET MODE
SELECTOR SWITCH TO MAN
TEMPORARILY AND THEN RESET TO
AUTO TO RESTART SELF-TEST
CYCLE.

SUSPECT INTERNAL FAULT ON


SELECTOR HE2, REPLACE SELECTOR
(Ref. 21-31-11, P. Block 401).

DOES FAULT ANNUNCIATOR REMAIN


ALIGHT AFTER 3 SECONDS
SELF-TEST CYCLE?

YES
DOES FAULT ANNUNCIATOR REMAIN
ALIGHT AFTER 3 SECONDS OF
SELF-TEST CYCLE?
NO
SUSPECT FAULTY CABIN PRESSURE
CONTROLLER HE5. REPLACE
CONTROLLER
(Ref. 21-31-12, P. Block 401).

Effectivity: See TOC

21-31-00

CONFIG. 1
Pag. 115
Jul. 15/04

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

Effectivity: See TOC

21-31-00

CONFIG. 1
Pag. 116
Jul. 15/04

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


PRESSURIZATION CONTROL SYSTEM
ADJUSTMENT/TEST
WARNING:

AIRCRAFT FUSELAGE STRUCTURE MUST BE COMPLETE AND FIT FOR FLIGHT


BEFORE TEST.

WARNING:

BEFORE STARTING PRESSURIZATION PROCEDURE, MAKE SURE THAT WARNING


NOTICES ARE DISPLAYED EXTERNALLY IN THE VICINITY OF ALL DOORS
TELLING PERSONNEL THAT PRESSURIZATION IS IN PROGRESS.

WARNING:

BEFORE POWER IS SUPPLIED TO THE AIRCRAFT, MAKE SURE THAT ELECTRICAL


CIRCUITS UPON WHICH WORK IS IN PROGRESS ARE ISOLATED.

CAUTION:

PROCEDURES MUST BE DONE IN SEQUENCE.

1. Pressurization Control System Functional Test


A.

Equipment and Materials


ITEM

DESIGNATION

(1)

Standard Tools

Warning Notices

(2)

ITEM 23-00-02

Headsets

(3)

CA85700-0001 or
CA87300-0001

Intercom Extension Lead

(4)

ITEM 24-40-01 or
ITEM 24-40-02

Ground Power Unit (GPU)

Referenced Procedures:
- 23-50-00,
- 24-40-00,
- 31-51-00,
- 71-00-00,
B.

P.
P.
P.
P.

Block
Block
Block
Block

1
201
501
501

- Audio Integrating
- External Power
- Flight Warning System
- Powerplant

Procedure
(1) Job Set-Up
(a) Put warning notices in the vicinity of all entrances telling
personnel that pressurization test is in progress.
(b) Connect the GPU and switch on the aircraft electrical system
(Ref. 24-40-00, P. Block 201).

Effectivity: See TOC

21-31-00

CONFIG. 1
Pag. 501
Jul. 30/08

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


(c) Inspect all doors, emergency exits and sliding windows for
freedom of operation. Inspect for security after closing. If
unusual force is necessary to close, find the reason for the
fault and repair before cabin is pressurized.
(d) Connect the headset and the external intercommunication
system extension lead and make sure that there is contact
with the safety personnel outside
aircraft(Ref. 23-50-00, P. Block 1).
(e) Remove the pitot head and static vent covers.
(2) Test (Fig. 501, Fig. 502 and Fig. 503)
ACTION

RESULT

** On A/C: SA01, SA02


(a) On the R MISCELLANEOUS
control unit, ZD9, make sure
that the PRESS DUMP switch,
HE3, is protected with the
guard.
** On A/C: All, except SA01 and SA02
(a) On the MSTR ELEC control
unit, ZD134, make sure that
PRESS DUMP switch, HE3, is
protected with the guard.
** On A/C: All
(b) On the cabin pressure
selector, HE2, set the
AUTO/MAN mode selector switch
to AUTO.
(c) Set the barometric correction
to the current barometric
pressure, with the B
barometric selector knob.

On the cabin pressure


selector, HE2, the BARO IN HG
indicator shows the current
barometric pressure.

(d) Set the landing field


altitude to 1000 ft below the
current altitude, with the A
landing altitude selector
knob.

On the cabin pressure


selector, HE2, the LDG ALT
indicator shows the landing
altitude.

Effectivity: See TOC

21-31-00

CONFIG. 1
Pag. 502
Jul. 30/08

ACTION

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


RESULT

(e) Align the dot on the R rate


selector knob with the arrow
on the cabin pressure
selector, HE2, case (nominal
rate).
(f) On the BATTERY BUS 2 circuit
breakers panel, PC12, make
sure that the CAB PRESS
circuit breaker, HE1, is
opened and close the WARNING
2 circuit breaker, XA2.

On the flight warning system:


- The red DOOR UNLKD caption
comes on.
- Both the red WARNING master
signs, WA7 and WA8, come on.
- The audio alarm sounds.

(g) Push the front of either red


On the flight warning system:
WARNING master signs, WA7 or
- Both the red WARNING master
WA8, to cancel the warning
signs, WA7 and WA8, go off.
(Ref. 31-51-00, P. Block 501)
- The red DOOR UNLKD caption
stays on.
(h) On the BATTERY BUS 2 circuit
breakers panel, PC12, close
the CAB PRESS circuit
breaker, HE1.

On the cabin pressure


selector, HE2, the FAULT
annunciator comes on for a
maximum of 3 seconds for the
duration of controller, HE5,
self-test.

(j) Close and lock all cabin and


cargo doors.

On the flight warning system,


the red DOOR UNLKD caption
goes off.

(k) Start the RH engine and set


the power control to IDLE
(Ref. 71-00-00, P. Block 501)

Effectivity: See TOC

21-31-00

CONFIG. 1
Pag. 503
Jul. 30/08

ACTION

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


RESULT

(l) On the AIR CONDITIONING


control unit, ZD124, set the
ON/OFF L (R) ENGINE switch,
HF25 (HF26), to ON.

On the AIR CONDITIONING


control unit, ZD124, the L
(R) ENGINE magnetic
indicator, HF19 (HF20) , moves
in line.
Conditioned air flow starts.
Both outflow valves, HE7 and
HE8, open fully.
On the cabin pressure
indicator, DN2:
- The DIFF PSI indicator shows
slight differential.
- The CABIN ALT indicator
decreases by not more than
100 ft.

NOTE:

This decrease in altitude will be felt by a change of


pressure on the ears and a small movement of the CABIN
ALT indicator needle.

(m) Set the RH engine power


control to the TAKE-OFF
position.

On the cabin pressure


indicator, DN2:
- The DIFF PSI indicator
increases.
- The CABIN ALT indicator
decreases approximately 140
ft below current altitude.

NOTE:

Effectivity: See TOC

This decrease in altitude will be felt by a change of


pressure on the ears and a small movement of the CABIN
ALT indicator needle.

21-31-00

CONFIG. 1
Pag. 504
Jul. 30/08

ACTION

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


RESULT

(n) In the MLG bay at the WOW


microswitch GB16, simulate
flight condition.

On the cabin pressure


indicator, DN2:
- The CABIN ALT indicator
decreases and becomes stable
at the auto-schedule control
point for an aircraft
altitude equivalent to the
current altitude.
- The DIFF PSI indicator
increases.
- The RATE indicator shows the
nominal rate for descent:
300 75 feet/minute.

(p) On the cabin pressure


On the cabin pressure
selector, HE2, set the
indicator, DN2, the DIFF PSI
landing field altitude to the and the CABIN ALT indicators
current altitude with the A
stay stable.
landing altitude selector
knob.
(q) Set the landing field
altitude slowly to 8000 ft
with the A landing selector
knob.

On the cabin pressure


indicator, DN2:
- The CABIN ALT indicator
increases to the
auto-schedule control point:
2300 ft.
- The DIFF PSI indicator
decreases.
- The RATE indicator shows the
nominal rate for climb: 500
75 feet/minute.

Effectivity: See TOC

21-31-00

CONFIG. 1
Pag. 505
Jul. 30/08

ACTION

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


RESULT

(r) Set the landing field


altitude slowly to the
current altitude with the A
landing altitude selector
knob.

On the cabin pressure


indicator, DN2:
- The CABIN ALT indicator
decreases to the
auto-schedule control point
for an aircraft altitude
equivalent to the current
altitude.
- The DIFF PSI indicator
increases.
- The RATE indicator shows the
nominal rate for descent:
300 75 feet/minute.

(s) Set the landing field


altitude to -500 ft with the
A landing altitude selector
knob.

On the cabin pressure


indicator, DN2, the DIFF PSI
and the CABIN ALT indicators
stay stable.

(t) On the cabin pressure


On the cabin pressure
selector, HE2, set the
indicator, DN2:
AUTO/MAN mode selector switch
- The CABIN ALT indicator
to MAN.
decreases approximately 350
ft.
- The DIFF PSI indicator
increases.
(u) On the cabin pressure
selector, HE2, push and hold
the UP/DN manual control
toggle lever to DN and turn
the DECR/INCR rotatory
selector fully
counterclockwise.

CAUTION:

On the cabin pressure


indicator, DN2:
- The CABIN ALT indicator
decreases.
- The DIFF PSI indicator
increases until 3,8 0,1 psi
max.

DO NOT PERMIT A DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE INCREASE OF


ABOVE 4 PSI.

(v) On cabin pressure selector,


On the cabin pressure
HE2, release the UP/DN manual indicator, DN2, the DIFF PSI
control toggle lever.
and the CABIN ALT indicators
become stable.

Effectivity: See TOC

21-31-00

CONFIG. 1
Pag. 506
Jul. 30/08

ACTION

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


RESULT

(w) On the cabin pressure


selector, HE2, push and hold
the UP/DN manual control
toggle lever to UP until the
differential pressure gets to
1 psi.

On the cabin pressure


indicator, DN2:

(x) On the cabin pressure


selector, HE2, release the
UP/DN manual control toggle
lever.

On the cabin pressure


indicator, DN2, the DIFF PSI
and the CABIN ALT indicators
become stable.

- The CABIN ALT indicator


increases.
- The DIFF PSI indicator
decreases to 1 psi.

(y) On the cabin pressure


On the cabin pressure
selector, HE2, set the
selector, HE2, the FAULT
AUTO/MAN mode selector switch annunciator comes on
to AUTO.
momentarily.
On the cabin pressure
indicator, DN2, the CABIN ALT
indicator shows the
auto-schedule control point
for an aircraft altitude
equivalent to the current
altitude.
(z) On the AIR CONDITIONING
control unit, ZD124, set the
ON/OFF L (R) ENGINE switch,
HF25 (HF26), to OFF.

On the AIR CONDITIONING


control unit, ZD124, the L
(R) ENGINE magnetic
indicator, HF19 (HF20), goes
cross-line.
Conditioned air flow stops.

** On A/C: SA01, SA02


(aa) On the R MISCELLANEOUS
control unit, ZD9, push and
hold the PRESS DUMP switch,
HE3.

On the cabin pressure


indicator, DN2:
- The CABIN ALT indicator
increases to the current
altitude.
- The DIFF PSI indicator
decreases to zero.

Effectivity: See TOC

21-31-00

CONFIG. 1
Pag. 507
Jul. 30/08

ACTION

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


RESULT

** On A/C: All, except SA01 and SA02


(aa) On the MSTR ELECT, ZD134,
push and hold the PRESS DUMP
switch, HE3.

On the cabin pressure


indicator, DN2:
- The CABIN ALT indicator
increases to the current
altitude.
- The DIFF PSI indicator
decreases to zero.

** On A/C: All
(ab) Release the PRESS DUMP
switch, HE3.
(ac) On the AIR CONDITIONING
control unit, ZD124, set the
ON/OFF L (R) ENGINE switch,
HF25 (HF26), to ON.

On the AIR CONDITIONING


control unit, ZD124, L (R)
ENGINE magnetic indicator,
HF19 (HF20), moves in line.
Conditioned air flow starts.
Both outflow valves, HE7 and
HE8, open fully.
On the cabin pressure
indicator, DN2:
- The CABIN ALT indicator
decreases and becomes stable
at the auto-schedule control
point for an aircraft
altitude equivalent to the
current altitude.
- The DIFF PSI indicator
increases.
- The RATE indicator shows the
nominal rate for descent:
300 75 feet/minute.

Effectivity: See TOC

21-31-00

CONFIG. 1
Pag. 508
Jul. 30/08

ACTION

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


RESULT

(ad) In the RH MLG bay, release


the WOW microswitch GB16.

On the cabin pressure


indicator, DN2:
- The DIFF PSI indicator
decreases.
- The CABIN ALT indicator
increases at a maximum of
100 ft below current
altitude.

(ae) On the AIR CONDITIONING


control unit, ZD124, set the
ON/OFF L (R) ENGINE switch,
HF25 (HF26), to OFF.

On the AIR CONDITIONING


control unit, ZD124, the L
(R) ENGINE magnetic
indicator, HF19 (HF20), goes
cross-line.
Conditioned air flow stops.

(af) Do the engine shutdown


On the cabin pressure
procedure
indicator, DN2:
(Ref. 71-00-00, P. Block 501)
- The DIFF PSI indicator shows
approximately zero.
- The CABIN ALT indicator
shows approximately the
current altitude.
(ag) Open a sliding window
WARNING:

YOU MUST OPEN A SLIDING WINDOW BEFORE YOU TRY TO OPEN


AN EXTERNAL DOOR. THIS IS TO MAKE SURE THAT ALL THE
CABIN PRESSURE HAS BEEN RELEASED.

(ah) Open the cabin door.

On the flight warning system:


- The red DOOR UNLKD caption
comes on.
- Both red WARNING master
signs, WA7 and WA8, come on.
- The audio alarm sounds.

Effectivity: See TOC

21-31-00

CONFIG. 1
Pag. 509
Jul. 30/08

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


Aircraft Altitude Versus Cabin Altitude Automatic Schedule

CM1.21.31.00.5AO.00.01-00

Fig. 501 Aircraft Altitude Versus Cabin Altitude Automatic Schedule

Effectivity: See TOC

21-31-00

CONFIG. 1
Pag. 510
Jul. 30/08

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


Cabin Pressure Selector, HE2

CM1.21.31.00.5BO.00.01-00

Fig. 502 Cabin Pressure Selector, HE2


Cabin Pressure Indicator, DN2

CM1.21.31.00.5CO.00.01-00

Fig. 503 Cabin Pressure Indicator, DN2

Effectivity: See TOC

21-31-00

CONFIG. 1
Pag. 511
Jul. 30/08

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


(3) Close-Up
(a) Switch off the aircraft electrical system and disconnect the
GPU (Ref. 24-40-00, P. Block 201).
(b) Disconnect the headset and the external intercom extension
lead (Ref. 23-50-00, P. Block 501).
(c) Remove the warning notices.
(d) Inspect the aircraft externally for signs of damage caused
during pressurization. Pay particular attention to the
windows and windshields. Look for signs of crazing on
panels. Open and close all the external doors. Find out the
reason for any apparent distortion or difficulty in
operation.
(e) Install the pitot head and static vent covers.
(f) Make sure that the work area is clean and clear of tools and
miscellaneous equipment.

Effectivity: See TOC

21-31-00

CONFIG. 1
Pag. 512
Jul. 30/08

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


CABIN PRESSURE SELECTOR,

HE2

REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
BEFORE POWER IS SUPPLIED TO THE AIRCRAFT, MAKE SURE THAT ELECTRICAL
CIRCUITS UPON WHICH WORK IS IN PROGRESS ARE ISOLATED.

WARNING:

1. Equipment and Materials


ITEM

DESIGNATION

A.

ITEM 20-15-01

Circuit Breaker Safety Clip and Tag

B.

Protective Caps

C.

Pipe Blanks

Referenced Procedures:
- 21-31-00, P. Block 501

- Pressurization Control System

2. Procedure
A.

Job Set-Up
(1) Open, safety and tag circuit breaker HE1, CAB PRESS.
(2) Get to rear of cabin pressure selector.

B.

Removal (Fig. 401)


(1) Disconnect electrical connector (6) and install protective caps
on connector (6) and receptacle (7).
(2) Disconnect vacuum pipe nut (3) from adapter (1).
(3) Disconnect valve pipe nut (4) from adapter (2).
(4) Release quick-release fasteners (9) and remove cabin pressure
selector (8) from housing (5).
(5) Install blanks on pipe nuts (3) and (4).
(6) Install blanks on cabin pressure selector pipe adapters (1) and
(2).

Effectivity: See TOC

21-31-11

Pag. 401
Mar. 31/00

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


C.

Installation (Fig. 401)


(1) Remove blanks from pipe nuts (3) and (4).
(2) Remove blanks from cabin pressure selector pipe adapters (1) and
(2).
(3) Put cabin pressure selector (8) in housing (5) and fasten with
quick-release fasteners (9).
(4) Connect vacuum pipe nut (3) to adapter (1) and torque tighten.
(5) Connect valve pipe nut (4) to adapter (2) and torque tighten.
(6) Remove protective caps and connect electrical connector (6) to
receptacle (7).

D.

Test
(1) Remove safety clip and tag and close circuit breaker HE1.
(2) Do pressurization control system adjustment/test
(Ref. 21-31-00, P. Block 501).

E.

Close-Up
(1) Make sure that working area is clean and clear of tools and
miscellaneous equipment.
(2) Install and fasten access panels.
(3) Remove safety clip and tag.

Effectivity: See TOC

21-31-11

Pag. 402
Mar. 31/00

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


Cabin Pressure Selector

CM1.21.31.11.4AO.00.00-02

Fig. 401 Cabin Pressure Selector

Effectivity: See TOC

21-31-11

Pag. 403
Mar. 31/00

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

Effectivity: See TOC

21-31-11

Pag. 404
Mar. 31/00

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


CABIN PRESSURE CONTROLLER,

HE5

REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
WARNING:

BEFORE POWER IS SUPPLIED TO THE AIRCRAFT, MAKE SURE THAT CIRCUITS


UPON WHICH WORK IS IN PROGRESS ARE ISOLATED.

1. Equipment and Materials


ITEM

DESIGNATION

A.

ITEM 20-15-01

Circuit Breaker Safety Clip and Tag

B.

Pipe Blanks

C.

Protective Caps

D.

Packing

Referenced Procedures:
- 20-21-00,
- 21-21-17,
- 21-31-00,
- 34-11-10,

P.
P.
P.
P.

Block
Block
Block
Block

1
401
501
601

- Standard Torques
- Foot Warmer Valve
- Pressurization Control System
- Pitot and Static System

2. Procedure
A.

Job Set-Up
(1) Remove the knob of the foot warmer valve
(Ref. 21-21-17, P. Block 401).
(2) Remove the RH console panel to get to the cabin pressure
controller.
(3) Open, safety and tag the following circuit breaker:
PANEL

SERVICE

BATTERY BUS 2

CAB PRESS

Effectivity: See TOC

FIN
HE1

21-31-12

CONFIG. 1
Pag. 401
Dec. 15/07

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


B.

Removal (Fig. 401)


(1) Disconnect the electrical connector (9). Install protective caps
to the connector (9) and receptacle (10).
(2) Disconnect the pipe nut (8) from union (7).
(3) Remove the nuts (4), washers (3), spacers (1) and screws (13).
Remove the cabin pressure controller (2).
(4) Install blank on the pipe nut (8).
(5) Remove and keep the union (7) from controller (2). Discard the
packing (6).
(6) Install blank on the adapter boss (5).

C.

Preparation for Installation (Fig. 401)


(1) Remove blank from the adapter boss (5).
(2) Install a new packing (6) on union (7).
(3) Install the union (7) in cabin pressure controller adapter boss
(5). Torque to the standard value (Ref.20-21-00, P. Block 1).
(4) Make sure that the sensing port (11) is clear and unobstructed.
(5) Remove blank from the pipe nut (8).

D.

Installation (Fig. 401)


(1) Put the cabin pressure controller (2) on the console mounting
(12) and fasten with the screws (13), spacers (1), washers (3)
and nuts (4). Torque the nuts (4) to the standard value
(Ref.20-21-00, P. Block 1).
(2) Connect the pipe nut (8) to the union (7). Torque to the standard
value (Ref.20-21-00, P. Block 1).
(3) Remove protective caps and connect the electrical connector (9)
to receptacle (10).

Effectivity: See TOC

21-31-12

CONFIG. 1
Pag. 402
Dec. 15/07

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


Cabin Pressure Controller

CM1.21.31.12.4AO.00.01-00

Fig. 401 Cabin Pressure Controller

Effectivity: See TOC

21-31-12

CONFIG. 1
Pag. 403
Dec. 15/07

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


E.

Test
(1) Remove safety clip and tag and close the circuit breaker HE1.
(2) Do the leak check on the pitot/static system
(Ref. 34-11-10, P. Block 601).
(3) Do the pressurization control system functional test
(Ref. 21-31-00, P. Block 501).

F.

Close-Up
(1) Make sure that working area is clean and clear of tools and
miscellaneous equipment.
(2) Install and fasten the console panel previously removed.
(3) Install the knob of the foot warmer valve
(Ref. 21-21-17, P. Block 401).

Effectivity: See TOC

21-31-12

CONFIG. 1
Pag. 404
Dec. 15/07

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


CABIN PRESSURE INDICATOR,

DN2

REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
BEFORE POWER IS SUPPLIED TO THE AIRCRAFT, MAKE SURE THAT ELECTRICAL
CIRCUITS UPON WHICH WORK IS IN PROGRESS ARE ISOLATED.

WARNING:

1. Equipment and Materials


ITEM

DESIGNATION

A.

ITEM 20-15-01

Circuit Breaker Safety Clip and Tag

B.

Protective Caps

Referenced Procedures:
- 21-31-00, P. Block 501

- Pressurization Control System

2. Procedure
A.

Job Set-Up
(1) Open, safety and tag circuit breaker HE1, CAB PRESS.

B.

Removal (Fig. 401)


(1) Release quick-release fasteners (1) and move cabin pressure
indicator (2) from housing (5) sufficiently to get to electrical
connector (4).
(2) Disconnect electrical connector (4) and install protective caps
on connector (4) and receptacle (3).
(3) Move cabin pressure indicator (2) from work area.

C.

Installation (Fig. 401)


(1) Make sure that pressure sensing port is clear.
(2) Remove protective caps and connect electrical connector (4) to
receptacle (3).
(3) Put cabin pressure indicator (2) in housing (5). Fasten with
quick-release fasteners (1).

Effectivity: See TOC

21-31-13

Pag. 401
Mar. 31/00

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


D.

Test
(1) Do pressurization system adjustment/test
(Ref. 21-31-00, P. Block 501).

E.

Close-Up
(1) Remove safety clips and tags.
(2) Make sure that working area is clean and clear of tools and
miscellaneous equipment.

Effectivity: See TOC

21-31-13

Pag. 402
Mar. 31/00

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


Cabin Pressure Indicator

CM1.21.31.13.4AO.00.00-02

Fig. 401 Cabin Pressure Indicator

Effectivity: See TOC

21-31-13

Pag. 403
Mar. 31/00

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

Effectivity: See TOC

21-31-13

Pag. 404
Mar. 31/00

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


SOLENOID VALVE,

HE17

REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
WARNING:

BEFORE POWER IS SUPPLIED TO THE AIRCRAFT, MAKE SURE THAT THE


ELECTRICAL CIRCUITS UPON WHICH WORK IS IN PROGRESS ARE ISOLATED.

1. Reason for the Job


To remove and install the solenoid valve when it has a fault or to get
access to other equipment.
2. Equipment and Materials
ITEM

DESIGNATION

A.

ITEM 20-15-01

Circuit Breaker Safety Clips and Tags

B.

Pipe Blanks

C.

Warning Notice

D.

Protective Caps

E.

MS28778-4

Preformed Packing

Referenced Procedures:
- 21-31-00, P. Block 501
- 25-51-11, P. Block 401
- 52-32-00, P. Block 1

- Pressurization Control System


- Cargo Container
- Hydraulic System - Cargo Doors

3. Procedure
A.

Job Set-Up

** On A/C: With Cargo Container


(1) Remove the cargo container (Ref. 25-51-11, P. Block 401).
** On A/C: All
(2) Make sure that the ventral door is in the fully closed position
(Ref. 52-32-00, P. Block 1).

Effectivity: See TOC

21-31-14

CONFIG. 1
Pag. 401
Mar. 31/00

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


(3) Open, safety and tag the following circuit breakers:
PANEL

SERVICE

FIN

BATTERY BUS 2

CAB PRESS

HE1

L MISCELLANEOUS

CARGO DOOR

MB1

(4) Put warning notice on CARGO MASTER panel telling personnel not to
operate cargo ramp/door.
(5) Get access to the front face of the pressure bulkhead at frame
46.
B.

Removal (Fig. 401)


(1) Disconnect the electrical receptacle (4) from the connector (5)
and install protective caps.
(2) Remove the valve interconnect pipe nut (1) from the union (2).
(3) Remove the vacuum pipe nut (9) from the union (8).
(4) Install blanks on pipe nuts (1) and (9) and valve unions (2) and
(8).
(5) Move the valve (6) complete with unions (2) and (8) from the work
area.

C.

Preparation of Replacement Component (Fig. 401)


(1) Remove the blanks from the valve unions (2) and (8).
(2) Remove the union (2) from the valve (6). Remove and discard the
preformed packing (3).
(3) Install new preformed packing (3). Install the pipe union (2) to
the replacement valve and tighten to standard torque value.
(4) Remove the valve vacuum pipe union (8) from the valve (6). Remove
and discard the preformed packing (7).
(5) Install new preformed packing (7). Install the pipe union (8) to
the replacement valve and tighten to standard torque value.

Effectivity: See TOC

21-31-14

CONFIG. 1
Pag. 402
Mar. 31/00

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


Solenoid Valve

CM1.21.31.14.4AO.00.01-00

Fig. 401 Solenoid Valve

Effectivity: See TOC

21-31-14

CONFIG. 1
Pag. 403
Mar. 31/00

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


D.

Installation (Fig. 401)


(1) Put the valve (6) in position.
(2) Remove the blanks from the pipe nuts (1) and (9).
(3) Connect the pipe nuts (1) and (9) to the valve unions (2) and
(8).
(4) Remove the protective caps and connect the electrical receptacle
(4) to the connector (5).
(5) Torque tighten the pipe nuts (1) and (9) to standard torque
value.
(6) Remove the safety tags and close the following circuit breakers:

E.

PANEL

SERVICE

FIN

BATTERY BUS 2

CAB PRESS

HE1

L MISCELLANEOUS

CARGO DOOR

MB1

Test
(1) Do a pressurization control system adjustment/test
(21-31-00, P. Block 501).

F.

Close-Up
(1) Make sure that the work area is clean and clear of tools and
miscellaneous equipment.

** On A/C: With Cargo Container


(2) Install the cargo container (25-51-11, P. Block 401).
** On A/C: All
(3) Remove the warning notice.

Effectivity: See TOC

21-31-14

CONFIG. 1
Pag. 404
Mar. 31/00

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


VACUUM CONTROL VALVE
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
WARNING:

BEFORE POWER IS SUPPLIED TO THE AIRCRAFT, MAKE SURE THAT ELECTRICAL


CIRCUITS UPON WHICH WORK IS IN PROGRESS ARE ISOLATED.

1. Equipment and Material


ITEM

DESIGNATION

A.

ITEM 20-15-01

Circuit Breaker Safety Clip and Tag

B.

Pipe Blanking Plugs and Caps

C.

Z-16.104

Sealant

D.

Warning Notices

Referenced Procedures:
- 06-41-51,
- 06-41-53,
- 20-21-00,
- 20-28-11,
- 21-31-00,
- 25-11-11,

P.
P.
P.
P.
P.
P.

Block
Block
Block
Block
Block
Block

1
1
1
201
501
401

- Access - Interior
- Access - Fuselage
- Standard Torques
- Electrical Bonding
- Pressurization Control
- Pilot and Copilot Seat

2. Procedure
A.

Job Set-Up
(1) Put warning notices in position telling personnel that
maintenance task is in progress.
(2) Open, safety and tag the following circuit breaker:
PANEL

SERVICE

BATTERY BUS 2

CAB PRESS

FIN
HE1

(3) Remove the copilot seat (Ref. 25-11-11, P. Block 401).


(4) Remove the access panel 128CR (Ref. 06-41-53, P. Block 1).
(5) Remove the access panels 222BR to get access to the vacuum
control valve (Ref. 06-41-51, P. Block 1).

Effectivity: See TOC

21-31-15

Pag. 401
Dec. 15/07

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


B.

Removal (Fig. 401)


(1) Remove the screws (2) and washers (3) from the clamps (4).
(2) Disconnect the pipe couplings (5) and (6) from vacuum control
valve (1).
(3) Remove the vacuum control valve (1).
(4) Install protective blanking plugs and caps to couplings (5) and
(6) and to the vacuum control valve (1).

C.

Preparation for Installation (Fig. 401)


(1) Remove protective blanking plugs and caps from couplings (5) and
(6) and from the vacuum control valve (1).
(2) Inspect the vacuum control valve (1) for signs of damage.

D.

Installation (Fig. 401)


(1) Put the vacuum control valve (1) in mounting position, with
control head upward and connect the pipes couplings (5) and (6).
Torque the couplings (5) and (6) to the standard value
(Ref.20-21-00, P. Block 1).
(2) Do the electrical bonding procedures of each clamp (4) to each
tube (Ref. 20-28-11, P. Block 201).
(3) Attach the clamps (4) with the screws (2) and washers (3). Torque
the screws (2) to the standard value (Ref.20-21-00, P. Block 1).
(4) Apply a bead of sealant around the union of each clamp (4) with
each tube.

E.

Test
(1) Do adjustment/test of the pressurization control system
(Ref. 21-31-00, P. Block 501).

Effectivity: See TOC

21-31-15

Pag. 402
Dec. 15/07

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


Vacuum Control Valve

CM1.21.31.15.4AO.00.00-00

Fig. 401 Vacuum Control Valve

Effectivity: See TOC

21-31-15

Pag. 403
Dec. 15/07

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


F.

Close-Up
(1) Make sure that the work area is clean and clear of tools and
miscellaneous equipment.
(2) Install access panels 222BR (Ref. 06-41-51, P. Block 1) and 128CR
(Ref. 06-41-53, P. Block 1).
(3) Install the copilot seat (Ref. 25-11-11, P. Block 401).
(4) Remove warning notices.

Effectivity: See TOC

21-31-15

Pag. 404
Dec. 15/07

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE TRANSDUCER,

DN3

REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
BEFORE POWER IS SUPPLIED TO THE AIRCRAFT, MAKE SURE THAT THE
ELECTRICAL CIRCUITS UPON WHICH WORK IS IN PROGRESS ARE ISOLATED.

WARNING:

1. Reason for the Job


To remove and install the differential pressure transducer when it has a
fault or to get access to other equipment.
2. Equipment and Materials
ITEM

DESIGNATION

A.

ITEM 20-15-01

Circuit Breaker Safety Clip and Tag

B.

Protective Caps

C.

Pipe Blanks

D.

MS9385-06

Preformed Packing

Referenced Procedures:
- 21-31-00, P. Block 501
- 34-11-10, P. Block 601

- Pressurization Control System


- Pitot and Static System

3. Procedure
A.

Job Set-Up
(1) Open, safety and tag the following circuit breaker:
PANEL

SERVICE

FIN

BATTERY BUS 2

CAB PRESS

HE1

(2) Remove the forward RH console panel to get to the differential


pressure transducer.
B.

Removal (Fig. 401)


(1) Disconnect the electrical connector (1) and install protective
caps on the connector (1) and the receptacle (2).

Effectivity: See TOC

21-31-16

CONFIG. 1
Pag. 401
Mar. 31/00

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


(2) Remove the nut (4), washer (3), spacer (11) and the screw (10)
fastening the clamp (12) to the RH console side structure (13).
(3) Disconnect the differential pressure transducer port (7) from the
collector port (9).
(4) Remove the preformed packing (8) from the differential pressure
transducer port (7) and discard.
(5) Install protective pipe blanks on the collector port (9) and
differential pressure transducer port (7).
(6) Remove the differential pressure transducer (5) complete with
clamp (12). Remove the clamp (12).
C.

Preparation for Installation (Fig. 401)


(1) Remove the protective pipe blanks from the differential pressure
transducer port (7) and the collector port (9).
(2) Install a new preformed packing (8) on the differential pressure
transducer port (7).
(3) Inspect the differential pressure transducer (5) for signs of
damage.
(4) Install the clamp (12) on the differential pressure transducer
(5).

D.

Installation (Fig. 401)


(1) Loosely fasten the clamp (12) to the RH console side structure
(13) with the screw (10), spacer (11), washer (3) and the nut
(4).
NOTE:

Make sure that the sensing vent (6) is clear and


unobstructed.

(2) Connect the differential pressure transducer port (7) to the


collector port (9) and tighten to the standard torque value.
(3) Tighten the screw (10) and nut (4) which fasten the clamp (12) to
the RH console side structure (13).
(4) Remove the protective caps and connect the electrical connector
(1) to the receptacle (2).

Effectivity: See TOC

21-31-16

CONFIG. 1
Pag. 402
Mar. 31/00

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


Differential Pressure Transducer, DN3

CM1.21.31.16.4AO.00.01-00

Fig. 401 Differential Pressure Transducer, DN3

Effectivity: See TOC

21-31-16

CONFIG. 1
Pag. 403
Mar. 31/00

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


(5) Remove the safety clip and tag and close the following circuit
breaker:

E.

PANEL

SERVICE

FIN

BATTERY BUS 2

CAB PRESS

HE1

Test
(1) Do a static system leak check on the starboard pitot static
system (Ref. 34-11-10, P. Block 601).
(2) Do a pressurization control system functional test
(Ref. 21-31-00, P. Block 501).

F.

Close-Up
(1) Make sure that the working area is clean and clear of tools and
miscellaneous equipment.
(2) Install the forward RH console panel.

Effectivity: See TOC

21-31-16

CONFIG. 1
Pag. 404
Mar. 31/00

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


PRIMARY OUTFLOW VALVE,

HE7

SERVICING
WARNING:

BEFORE POWER IS SUPPLIED TO THE AIRCRAFT, MAKE SURE THAT THE


ELECTRICAL CIRCUITS UPON WHICH WORK IS IN PROGRESS ARE ISOLATED.

1. Reason for the Job


To facilitate periodic cleaning or replace the air filter.
2. Equipment and Materials
ITEM

DESIGNATION

A.

Access Platform 2 m (6,5 ft)

B.

ITEM 20-15-01

Circuit Breaker Safety Clips and Tags

C.

Pipe Blanks

D.

Warning Notice

E.

S9028G904

Preformed Packing

F.

147240-1

Filter Assembly

G.

Z-21.205

Grease

Referenced Procedures:
- 21-31-00, P. Block 501
- 25-51-11, P. Block 401
- 52-32-00, P. Block 1

- Pressurization Control System


- Cargo Container
- Hydraulic System - Cargo Doors

3. Procedure
A.

Job Set-Up

** On A/C: With Cargo Container


(1) Remove the cargo container (Ref. 25-51-11, P. Block 401).
** On A/C: All
(2) Make sure that the ventral door is in the fully closed position
(Ref. 52-32-00, P. Block 1).
(3) Put a warning notice in position telling personnel not to operate
the cargo ramp/door.

Effectivity: See TOC

21-31-17

CONFIG. 1
Pag. 301
Mar. 31/00

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


(4) Open, safety and tag the following circuit breakers:

B.

PANEL

SERVICE

FIN

BATTERY BUS 2

CAB PRESS

HE1

L MISCELLANEOUS

CARGO DOOR

MB1

MISCELLANEOUS

HYDR PUMP 1 (2)

QC1 (QC2)

Filter Replacement (Fig. 301)


(1) Remove the filter (1) from the cabin pressure port (3).
(2) Remove and discard the preformed packing (2).
(3) Install a new preformed packing (2) on the union of the cabin
pressure port (3) and apply grease.
(4) Install a new filter assembly (1).
(5) Remove the safety tags and close the following circuit breakers:

C.

PANEL

SERVICE

FIN

BATTERY BUS 2

CAB PRESS

HE1

LH MISCELLANEOUS

CARGO DOOR

MB1

MISCELLANEOUS

HYDR PUMP 1 (2)

QC1 (QC2)

Test
(1) Do a pressurization control system adjustment/test
(Ref. 21-31-00, P. Block 501).

D.

Close-Up
(1) Make sure that the working area is clean and clear of tools and
miscellaneous equipment.

** On A/C: With Cargo Container


(2) Install the cargo container (Ref. 25-51-11, P. Block 401).
** On A/C: All
(3) Remove the warning notices.

Effectivity: See TOC

21-31-17

CONFIG. 1
Pag. 302
Mar. 31/00

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


Primary Outflow Valve - Filter Replacement

CM1.21.31.17.3AO.00.01-00

Fig. 301 Primary Outflow Valve - Filter Replacement

Effectivity: See TOC

21-31-17

CONFIG. 1
Pag. 303
Mar. 31/00

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

Effectivity: See TOC

21-31-17

CONFIG. 1
Pag. 304
Mar. 31/00

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


PRIMARY OUTFLOW VALVE,

HE7

REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
WARNING:

BEFORE POWER IS SUPPLIED TO THE AIRCRAFT, MAKE SURE THAT ELECTRICAL


CIRCUITS UPON WHICH WORK IS IN PROGRESS ARE ISOLATED.

1. Reason fro the Job


To remove and install the primary outflow valve when it has a fault or to
get access to other equipment.
2. Equipment and Materials
ITEM

DESIGNATION

A.

Servicing Platform, 2 m (6,5 ft)

B.

ITEM 20-15-01

Circuit Breaker Safety Clips and Tags

C.

Protective Caps

D.

Pipe Blanks

E.

Warning Notice

F.

MS28778-4

Preformed Packing

G.

MS9386-158

Preformed Packing

Referenced Procedures:
- 06-41-55,
- 21-31-00,
- 25-51-11,
- 52-32-00,

P.
P.
P.
P.

Block
Block
Block
Block

1
501
401
1

- Access Provision - Tail Section


- Pressurization Control System
- Cargo Container
- Hydraulic System - Cargo Doors

3. Procedure
A.

Job Set-Up

** On A/C: WITH CARGO CONTAINER


(1) Remove the cargo container (Ref. 25-51-11, P. Block 401).

Effectivity: See TOC

21-31-17

CONFIG. 1
Pag. 401
Feb. 28/02

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


** On A/C: All
(2) Make sure that ventral door is in the fully closed position
(Ref. 52-32-00, P. Block 1).
(3) Put warning notice in position telling personnel not to operate
cargo ramp/door.
(4) Open, safety and tag the following circuit breakers:
PANEL

SERVICE

FIN

BATTERY BUS 2

CAB PRESS

HE1

L MISCELLANEOUS

CARGO DOOR

MB1

MISCELLANEOUS

HYDR PUMP 1 (2)

QC1 (QC2)

(5) Put the servicing platform in position.


(6) Remove access panel 311AB to get to rear of pressure bulkhead at
frame 46 (Ref. 06-41-55, P. Block 1).
B.

Removal (Fig. 401)


(1) Disconnect static atmosphere pipe nut (2) from union (5).
(2) From inside fuselage, disconnect electrical connector and install
protective caps on connector (7) and receptacle (11).
(3) Disconnect vacuum pipe nut (8) from union (9).
(4) Disconnect valve interconnect pipe nut (14) from union (13).
(5) Hold valve assembly (15), disconnect V-band clamp (4) and
carefully remove assembly from mounting flange (1).
(6) Remove and keep V-band clamp (4).
(7) Install blanks on pipe nuts (2), (8) and (14).
(8) Remove and discard preformed packing (3).
(9) Remove static port pipe unions (5). Remove and discard preformed
packing (6).

Effectivity: See TOC

21-31-17

CONFIG. 1
Pag. 402
Feb. 28/02

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


Primary Outflow Valve, HE7

CM1.21.31.17.4AO.00.01-00

Fig. 401 Primary Outflow Valve, HE7

Effectivity: See TOC

21-31-17

CONFIG. 1
Pag. 403
Feb. 28/02

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


(10) Remove vacuum pipe union (9). Remove and discard preformed
packing (10).
(11) Remove valve interconnect pipe union (13). Remove and discard
preformed packing (12).
(12) Install blanks on all exposed primary outflow valve (15) ports.
C.

Preparation of Replacement Component (Fig. 401)


(1) Remove blanks from all primary outflow valve (15) ports.
(2) Install new preformed packing (10) on vacuum pipe union (9).
Install union (9) in valve vacuum port and torque tighten.
(3) Install new preformed packing (12) on valve interconnect pipe
union (13). Install union (13) in interconnect port and torque
tighten.
(4) Install new preformed packing (6) on static atmosphere pipe union
(5). Install union (5) in static port and torque tighten.
(5) Install V-band clamp (4) on valve flange.

D.

Installation (Fig. 401)


(1) Remove blank from static pipe nut (2).
(2) Install new preformed packing (3) on mounting flange face (1).
(3) Install primary outflow valve assembly (15) on mounting flange
(1) and fasten with V-band clamp (4). Torque tighten clamp.
(4) Remove blank from valve interconnect pipe nut (14). Connect nut
(14) to union (13) and torque tighten.
(5) Remove blank from vacuum pipe nut (8). Connect nut (8) to union
(9) and torque tighten.
(6) Remove protective caps and connect electrical connector (7) to
receptacle (11).
(7) Remove blank from static pipe nut (2). Connect static pipe nut
(2) to union (5) and torque tighten.

Effectivity: See TOC

21-31-17

CONFIG. 1
Pag. 404
Feb. 28/02

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


E.

Preparation for Test


(1) Remove safety clips and tags and close circuit breakers, HE1,
MB1, QC1 and QC2.
(2) Remove warning notice.

F.

Test
(1) Do pressurization control system adjustment/test
(Ref. 21-31-00, P. Block 501).

G.

Close-Up
(1) Make sure that working area is clean and clear of tools and
miscellaneous equipment.

** On A/C: WITH CARGO CONTAINER


(2) Install cargo container (Ref. 25-51-11, P. Block 401).
** On A/C: All
(3) Install access panel 311AB (Ref. 06-41-55, P. Block 1).
(4) Remove the servicing platform.
(5) Remove warning notices.

Effectivity: See TOC

21-31-17

CONFIG. 1
Pag. 405
Feb. 28/02

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

Effectivity: See TOC

21-31-17

CONFIG. 1
Pag. 406
Feb. 28/02

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


PRIMARY OUTFLOW VALVE,

HE7

CLEANING/PAINTING
WARNING:

BEFORE POWER IS SUPPLIED TO THE AIRCRAFT, MAKE SURE THAT ELECTRICAL


CIRCUITS UPON WHICH WORK IS IN PROGRESS ARE ISOLATED.

1. Reason for the Job


To facilitate periodic cleaning.
2. Equipment and Material
ITEM

DESIGNATION

A.

ITEM 20-15-01

Circuit Breaker Safety Clips and Tags

B.

Warning Notices

C.

Z-23.138

Solvent

D.

Z-24.930

Lint-Free Cloth

Referenced Procedures:
- 21-31-00, P. Block 501
- 25-51-11, P. Block 401
- 52-32-00, P. Block 1

- Pressurization Control System


- Cargo Container
- Hydraulic System - Cargo Doors

3. Procedure
A.

Job Set-Up

** On A/C: With Cargo Container


(1) Remove the cargo container (Ref. 25-51-11, P. Block 401).
** On A/C: All
(2) Make sure that ventral doors are in the fully closed position
(Ref. 52-32-00, P. Block 1).
(3) Put warning notices in position telling personnel not to operate
cargo ramp/door.

Effectivity: See TOC

21-31-17

CONFIG. 1
Pag. 701
Nov. 30/02

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


(4) Open, safety and tag the following circuit breakers:

B.

PANEL

SERVICE

FIN

BATTERY BUS 2

CAB PRESS

HE1

L MISCELLANEOUS

CARGO DOOR

MB1

MISCELLANEOUS

HYDR PUMP 1 (2)

QC1 (QC2)

Primary Outflow Valve Diaphragm Cleaning (Fig. 701)


WARNING:

USE CLEANING SOLVENT IN A WELL-VENTILATED AREA. AVOID


BREATHING FUMES. KEEP IT AWAY FROM FLAMES.

CAUTION:

DO NOT USE COMPRESSED AIR FOR CLEANING AS THIS MAY


SERIOUSLY DAMAGE VALVE.

(1) Clean diaphragm (1) and the valve seat with a lint-free cloth
moistened with solvent Z-23.138.
C.

Preparation for Test


(1) Remove the safety clips and tags and close the circuit breakers
previously opened.
(2) Remove the warning notices.

D.

Test
(1) Do a pressurization control system adjustment/test
(Ref. 21-31-00, P. Block 501).

E.

Close-Up
(1) Make sure that the work area is clean and clear of tools and
miscellaneous equipment.

** On A/C: With Cargo Container


(2) Install the cargo container (Ref. 25-51-11, P. Block 401).
** On A/C: All
(3) Remove the warning notices.

Effectivity: See TOC

21-31-17

CONFIG. 1
Pag. 702
Nov. 30/02

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


Primary Outflow Valve - Diaphragm and Valve Seat Cleaning

CM1.21.31.17.7AO.00.01-01

Fig. 701 Primary Outflow Valve - Diaphragm and Valve Seat Cleaning

Effectivity: See TOC

21-31-17

CONFIG. 1
Pag. 703
Nov. 30/02

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

Effectivity: See TOC

21-31-17

CONFIG. 1
Pag. 704
Nov. 30/02

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


SECONDARY OUTFLOW VALVE,

HE8

REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
WARNING:

BEFORE POWER IS SUPPLIED TO THE AIRCRAFT, MAKE SURE THAT ELECTRICAL


CIRCUITS UPON WHICH WORK IS IN PROGRESS ARE ISOLATED.

1. Reason for the Job


To remove and install the secondary outflow valve when it has a fault or
to get access to other equipment.
2. Equipment and Materials
ITEM

DESIGNATION

A.

ITEM 20-15-01

Circuit Breaker Safety Clips and Tags

B.

Protective Caps

C.

Pipe Blanks

D.

Warning Notice

E.

MS28778-4

Preformed Packing

F.

MS9386-243

Preformed Packing

Referenced Procedures:
- 21-31-00,
- 21-31-22,
- 25-51-11,
- 52-32-00,

P.
P.
P.
P.

Block
Block
Block
Block

501
401
401
1

- Pressurization Control System


- Air Check Valve
- Cargo Container
- Hydraulic System - Cargo Doors

3. Procedure
A.

Job Set-Up

** On A/C: With Cargo Container


(1) Remove the cargo container (Ref. 25-51-11, P. Block 401).
** On A/C: All
(2) Make sure that ventral door is in the fully closed position
(Ref. 52-32-00, P. Block 1).

Effectivity: See TOC

21-31-18

CONFIG. 1
Pag. 401
Feb. 28/02

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


(3) Open, safety and tag the following circuit breakers:
PANEL

SERVICE

FIN

BATTERY BUS 2

CAB PRESS

HE1

L MISCELLANEOUS

CARGO DOOR

MB1

MISCELLANEOUS

HYDR PUMP 1 (2)

QC1 (QC2)

(4) Put warning notice on CARGO MASTER panel telling personnel not to
operate cargo ramp/door.
(5) Get to front face of rear pressure bulkhead at frame 46.
B.

Removal (Fig. 401 and Fig. 401A)


(1) Disconnect electrical connector (8) and install protective caps
on electrical connector (8) and receptacle (21).
(2) Disconnect outflow valve pipe nut (1) from union (2).

** On A/C: S/N 001088 PRE SB235-21-07/07M


(3) Disconnect pipe nuts (16) and (17) from three-way T-union (15).
** On A/C: S/N 089999 and S/N 001088 POST SB235-21-07/07M
(3) Disconnect the pipe nut (17) from the elbow (15).
** On A/C: All
(4) Disconnect vacuum pipe nut (11) from check valve (10).
(5) Disconnect manual pipe nut (12) from union (13).
(6) Support valve assembly (4), disconnect V-band clamp (7) and
carefully remove valve assembly (4) from mounting (5).
(7) Remove and keep V-band clamp (7).
(8) Remove and discard preformed packing (6).
** On A/C: S/N 001088 PRE SB235-21-07/07M
(9) Loosen locknut (18) and remove three-way T-union (15). Remove and
discard preformed packing (20), keep retainer (19).
** On A/C: S/N 089999 and S/N 001088 POST SB235-21-07/07M

Effectivity: See TOC

21-31-18

CONFIG. 1
Pag. 402
Feb. 28/02

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


Secondary Outflow Valve, HE8

CM1.21.31.18.4AO.00.01-00

Fig. 401 Secondary Outflow Valve, HE8

Effectivity: S/N001088 PRE SB235-21-07/07M

21-31-18

CONFIG. 1
Pag. 403
Feb. 28/02

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

CM1.21.31.18.4AA.00.01-00

Secondary Outflow Valve, HE8


Fig. 401A Secondary Outflow Valve, HE8

Effectivity: S/N 089999 and 001088


POST SB235-21-07/07M

21-31-18

CONFIG. 1
Pag. 404
Feb. 28/02

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


(9) Loosen the locknut (18) and remove the elbow (15). Remove and
discard the preformed packing (20), keep retainer (19).
** On A/C: All
(10) Remove outflow union (2). Remove and discard preformed packing
(3).
(11) Remove manual pipe union (13). Remove and discard preformed
packing (14).
(12) Remove check valve (10) (Ref. 21-31-22, P. Block 401). Make sure
that preformed packing (9) is removed and discarded.
(13) Install blanks on all exposed secondary outflow valve (4) ports.
** On A/C: S/N 001088 PRE SB235-21-07/07M
(14) Install blanks on pipe nuts (1), (11), (12), (16) and (17).
** On A/C: S/N 089999 and S/N 001088 POST SB235-21-07/07M
(14) Install blanks on pipe nuts (1), (11), (12) and (17).
** On A/C: All
C.

Preparation of Replacement Component (Fig. 401 and Fig. 401A)


(1) Remove all blanks from secondary outflow valve (4) ports.
(2) Install new preformed packing (9) on check valve (10). Install
check valve (10) (Ref.21-31-22, P. Block 401).
(3) Install new preformed packing (14) on manual pipe union (13).
Install pipe union (13) and torque tighten.

** On A/C: S/N 001088 PRE SB235-21-07/07M


(4) Make sure that locknut (18) is installed on three-way T-union
(15). Install new preformed packing (20) and retainer (19).
Install three-way T-union (15), align and fasten with locknut
(18). Torque tighten locknut (18).
** On A/C: S/N 089999 and S/N 001088 POST SB235-21-07/07M
(4) Make sure that locknut (18) is installed on the elbow (15).
Install a new preformed packing (20) and retainer (19). Install
the elbow (15), align and fasten with locknut (18). Torque
tighten locknut (18).
** On A/C: All

Effectivity: See TOC

21-31-18

CONFIG. 1
Pag. 405
Feb. 28/02

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


(5) Install new preformed packing (3) on outflow union (2). Install
union (2) and torque tighten.
(6) Assemble V-band clamp (7) to secondary outflow valve (4) flange.
D.

Installation (Fig. 401 and Fig. 401A)


(1) Install new preformed packing (6) on valve mounting flange face
(5).
(2) Install valve assembly (4) on mounting flange (5) and fasten with
V-band clamp (7). Torque tighten clamp.
(3) Remove blanks and connect vacuum pipe nut (11) to check valve
(10). Torque tighten nut (11).
(4) Remove blank and connect manual pipe nut (12) to union (13).
Torque tighten nut (12).

** On A/C: S/N 001088 PRE SB235-21-07/07M


(5) Remove blanks and connect pipe nuts (16) and (17) to three-way
union (15). Torque tighten both nuts (16) and (17).
** On A/C: S/N 089999 and S/N 001088 POST SB235-21-07/07M
(5) Remove blanks and connect the pipe nut (17) to the elbow (15).
Torque tighten the pipe nut (17).
** On A/C: All
(6) Remove blank and connect outflow pipe nut (1) to union (2).
Torque tighten nut (1).
(7) Remove protective caps and connect electrical connector (8) to
receptacle (21).
E.

Preparation for Test


(1) Remove safety clips and tags and close circuit breakers HE1, MB1,
QC1 and QC2.
(2) Remove warning notice.

F.

Test
(1) Do pressurization control system functional test
(Ref. 21-31-00, P. Block 501).

Effectivity: See TOC

21-31-18

CONFIG. 1
Pag. 406
Feb. 28/02

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


G.

Close-Up
(1) Make sure that working area is clean and clear of tools and
miscellaneous equipment.

** On A/C: With Cargo Container


(2) Install the cargo container (Ref. 25-51-11, P. Block 401).
** On A/C: All
(3) Remove warning notices.

Effectivity: See TOC

21-31-18

CONFIG. 1
Pag. 407
Feb. 28/02

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

Effectivity: See TOC

21-31-18

CONFIG. 1
Pag. 408
Feb. 28/02

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


SECONDARY OUTFLOW VALVE,

HE8

CLEANING/PAINTING
WARNING:

BEFORE POWER IS SUPPLIED TO THE AIRCRAFT, MAKE SURE THAT THE


ELECTRICAL CIRCUITS UPON WHICH WORK IS IN PROGRESS ARE ISOLATED.

1. Reason for the Job


To facilitate periodic cleaning.
2. Equipment and Materials
ITEM

DESIGNATION

A.

ITEM 20-15-01

Circuit Breaker Safety Clips and Tags

B.

Warning Notices

C.

Z-23.138

Solvent

D.

Z-24.930

Lint-Free Cloth

Referenced Procedures:
- 21-31-00,
- 21-31-18,
- 25-51-11,
- 52-32-00,

P.
P.
P.
P.

Block
Block
Block
Block

501
401
401
1

- Pressurization Control System


- Secondary Outflow Valve
- Cargo Container
- Hydraulic System - Cargo Doors

3. Procedure
A.

Job Set-Up

** On A/C: With Cargo Container


(1) Remove the cargo container (Ref. 25-51-11, P. Block 401).
** On A/C: All
(2) Make sure that the ventral doors are in the fully closed position
(Ref. 52-32-00, P. Block 1).
(3) Put warning notices in position telling personnel not to operate
the cargo ramp/door.

Effectivity: See TOC

21-31-18

CONFIG. 1
Pag. 701
Nov. 30/02

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


(4) Open, safety and tag the following circuit breakers:

B.

PANEL

SERVICE

FIN

BATTERY BUS 2

CAB PRESS

HE1

L MISCELLANEOUS

CARGO DOOR

MB1

MISCELLANEOUS

HYDR PUMP 1 (2)

QC1 (QC2)

Secondary Outflow Valve Diaphragm Cleaning


(1) Remove the screws (6) and the washers (7) (Fig. 702).
(2) Remove the filter screen (1) from the valve base assembly (8)
(Fig. 702).
(3) Clean the diaphragm (1) and valve seat, with a lint-free cloth
moistened with solvent Z-23.138 (Fig. 701).
(4) Install the filter screen (1) on the valve base assembly (8) with
the screws (6) and the washers (7). Tighten the screws (6) (Fig.
702).

C.

Filter Screen Cleaning (Fig. 702)


(1) Remove the secondary outflow valve (Ref. 21-31-18, P. Block 401).
(2) Removal
(a) Remove the screws (6) and the washers (7).
(b) Remove the filter screen (1) from the valve base assembly
(8).
(c) Remove the screws (3), washers (4) and the nuts (5).
(d) Remove the sound suppression screen (2) from the valve base
assembly (8).
CAUTION:

Effectivity: See TOC

USE EXTREME CARE WHEN USING SHARP OBJECTS NEAR


DIAPHRAGM.

21-31-18

CONFIG. 1
Pag. 702
Nov. 30/02

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


Secondary Outflow Valve - Diaphragm and Valve Seat Cleaning

CM1.21.31.18.7AO.00.01-01

Fig. 701 Secondary Outflow Valve - Diaphragm and Valve Seat Cleaning

Effectivity: See TOC

21-31-18

CONFIG. 1
Pag. 703
Nov. 30/02

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


Secondary Outflow Valve - Filter Screen Cleaning

CM1.21.31.18.7BO.00.01-00

Fig. 702 Secondary Outflow Valve - Filter Screen Cleaning

Effectivity: See TOC

21-31-18

CONFIG. 1
Pag. 704
Nov. 30/02

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


(3) Cleaning
WARNING:

USE THE CLEANING SOLVENT IN A WELL-VENTILATED AREA.


AVOID BREATHING FUMES. KEEP IT AWAY FROM FLAMES.

CAUTION:

DO NOT USE COMPRESSED AIR FOR CLEANING AS THIS MAY


SERIOUSLY DAMAGE VALVE.

(a) Inspect for tobacco tar, grease or other deposits on screens


and valve base assembly.
(b) Clean with solvent.
(4) Installation
(a) Put the sound suppression screen (2) in position and fasten
with the screws (3), washers (4) and the nuts (5). Tighten
the nuts (5).
(b) Install the filter screen (1) on the valve base assembly (8)
with the screws (6) and the washers (7). Tighten the screws
(6).
D.

Preparation for Test


(1) Install the secondary outflow valve assembly on the aircraft
(Ref. 21-31-18, P. Block 401).
(2) Remove the safety clips and tags and close the following circuit
breakers:

E.

PANEL

SERVICE

FIN

BATTERY BUS 2

CAB PRESS

HE1

L MISCELLANEOUS

CARGO DOOR

MB1

MISCELLANEOUS

HYDR PUMP 1 (2)

QC1 (QC2)

Test
(1) Do a pressurization control system adjustment/test
(Ref. 21-31-00, P. Block 501).

Effectivity: See TOC

21-31-18

CONFIG. 1
Pag. 705
Nov. 30/02

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


F.

Close-Up
(1) Make sure that the work area is clean and clear of tools and
miscellaneous equipment.

** On A/C: With Cargo Container


(2) Install the cargo container (Ref. 25-51-11, P. Block 401).
** On A/C: All
(3) Remove the warning notices.

Effectivity: See TOC

21-31-18

CONFIG. 1
Pag. 706
Nov. 30/02

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


JET PUMP
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
WARNING:

BEFORE POWER IS APPLIED TO THE AIRCRAFT, MAKE SURE THAT THE


ELECTRICAL CIRCUITS UPON WHICH WORK IS IN PROGRESS ARE ISOLATED.

1. Reason for the Job


To remove and install the jet pump when it has a fault or to get access to
other equipment
2. Equipment and Materials
ITEM

DESIGNATION

A.

ITEM 20-15-01

Circuit Breaker Safety Clips and Tags

B.

Pipe Blanks

C.

Warning Notice

Referenced Procedures:
- 21-31-00, P. Block 501

- Pressurization Control System

3. Procedure
A.

Job Set-Up
(1) Make sure that the ventral door is in the fully closed position.
(2) Open, safety and tag the following circuit breakers:
PANEL

SERVICE

FIN

BATTERY BUS 2

CAB PRESS

HE1

L MISCELLANEOUS

CARGO DOOR

MB1

MISCELLANEOUS

HYDR PUMP 1 (2)

QC1 (QC2)

(3) Put warning notice on the CARGO MASTER panel telling personnel
not to operate the cargo ramp/door.
(4) Get access to the front face of the rear pressure bulkhead at
frame 46.
Effectivity: See TOC

21-31-21

CONFIG. 1
Pag. 401
Mar. 31/00

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


B.

Removal (Fig. 401)


(1) Disconnect the atmospheric pipe nut (3) from the jet pump (2).
(2) Disconnect the control pipe nut (5) from the union (4).
(3) Disconnect the high pressure pipe nut (1) and remove the jet pump
(2).
(4) Remove the control pipe union (4) from the jet pump (2).
(5) Install blanks on the pipe nuts (1, 3 and 5) and the jet pump (2)
ports.

C.

Preparation of the Replacement Component (Fig. 401)


(1) Remove the blanks from the jet pump (2) ports.
(2) Install the union (4) into the control port and tighten to the
standard torque value.

D.

Installation (Fig. 401)


(1) Remove the blanks from the pipe unions (1), (3) and (5).
(2) Connect the atmospheric pipe (3), high pressure pipe nut (1) and
control pipe nut (5) to the jet pump (2). Tighten all three nuts
(1), (3) and (5) to the standard torque value.

E.

Preparation for Test


(1) Remove the safety clips and tags and close the following circuit
breakers:
PANEL

SERVICE

FIN

BATTERY BUS 2

CAB PRESS

HE1

L MISCELLANEOUS

CARGO DOOR

MB1

MISCELLANEOUS

HYDR PUMP 1 (2)

QC1 (QC2)

(2) Remove the warning notice.

Effectivity: See TOC

21-31-21

CONFIG. 1
Pag. 402
Mar. 31/00

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


Jet Pump

CM1.21.31.21.4AO.00.01-00

Fig. 401 Jet Pump

Effectivity: See TOC

21-31-21

CONFIG. 1
Pag. 403
Mar. 31/00

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


F.

Test
(1) Do a pressurization control system functional test and inspect
the jet pump installation for leaks
(Ref. 21-31-00, P. Block 501).

G.

Close-Up
(1) Make sure that the work area is clean and clear of tools and
miscellaneous equipment.

Effectivity: See TOC

21-31-21

CONFIG. 1
Pag. 404
Mar. 31/00

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


AIR CHECK VALVE
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
WARNING:

BEFORE POWER IS SUPPLIED TO THE AIRCRAFT, MAKE SURE THAT THE


ELECTRICAL CIRCUITS UPON WHICH WORK IS IN PROGRESS ARE ISOLATED.

1. Reason for the Job


To remove and install the air check valve when it has a fault or to get
access to other equipment.
2. Equipment and Materials
ITEM

DESIGNATION

A.

ITEM 20-15-01

Circuit Breaker Safety Clips and Tags

B.

Pipe Blanks

C.

Warning Notice

D.

MS28778-4

Preformed Packing

Referenced Procedures:
- 21-31-00, P. Block 501
- 52-32-00, P. Block 1

- Pressurization Control System


- Hydraulic System - Cargo Doors

3. Procedure
A.

Job Set-Up
(1) Make sure that the ventral door is in the fully closed position
(Ref. 52-32-00, P. Block 1).
(2) Open, safety and tag the following circuit breakers:
PANEL

SERVICE

FIN

BATTERY BUS 2

CAB PRESS

HE1

L MISCELLANEOUS

CARGO DOOR

MB1

MISCELLANEOUS

HYDR PUMP 1 (2)

QC1 (QC2)

Effectivity: See TOC

21-31-22

CONFIG. 1
Pag. 401
Mar. 31/00

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


(3) Put warning notice on CARGO MASTER panel telling personnel not to
operate the cargo ramp/door.
(4) Get access to the front face of the rear pressure bulkhead at
frame 46.
B.

Removal (Fig. 401)


(1) Disconnect the vacuum pipe nuts (3), (5) and remove and keep the
pipe (4). Install blanks on pipe nuts (3), (5) pressure bulkhead
union (2) and check valve (6) port.
(2) Remove the check valve (6). Remove and discard the preformed
packing (7).
(3) Install blanks on the outflow valve vacuum port (1) and check
valve (6).

C.

Installation (Fig. 401)


(1) Remove the blanks from the check valve (6) ports and install new
preformed packing (7).
(2) Remove the blank from the outflow valve vacuum port (1). Install
the check valve (6) and tighten to standard torque value.
(3) Remove the blanks from the pressure bulkhead union (2) and vacuum
pipe nuts (3), (5). Install the pipe (4) and connect the pipe nut
(5) to the check valve (6) and the pipe nut (3) to pressure
bulkhead union (2). Tighten the nuts (3) and (5) to the standard
torque value.

D.

Test
(1) Do a pressurization control system functional test
(Ref. 21-31-00, P. Block 501).
(2) Inspect the check valve installation for leaks.

E.

Close-Up
(1) Remove the warning notice.
(2) Make sure that the work area is clean and clear of tools and
miscellaneous equipment.

Effectivity: See TOC

21-31-22

CONFIG. 1
Pag. 402
Mar. 31/00

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


Air Check Valve

CM1.21.31.22.4AO.00.01-00

Fig. 401 Air Check Valve

Effectivity: See TOC

21-31-22

CONFIG. 1
Pag. 403
Mar. 31/00

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

Effectivity: See TOC

21-31-22

CONFIG. 1
Pag. 404
Mar. 31/00

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


MICROSWITCH

HE13, HE14, HE15, HE16

REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
WARNING:

BEFORE POWER IS SUPPLIED TO THE AIRCRAFT, MAKE SURE THAT ELECTRICAL


CIRCUITS UPON WHICH WORK IS IN PROGRESS ARE ISOLATED.

1. Equipment and Materials


ITEM

DESIGNATION

A.

ITEM 20-15-01

Circuit Breaker Safety Clips and Tags

B.

Protective Insulating Sleeving

C.

Warning Notices

Referenced Procedures:
- 06-41-56,
- 20-21-00,
- 21-31-00,
- 52-31-00,
- 52-31-00,
- 52-33-40,

P.
P.
P.
P.
P.
P.

Block
Block
Block
Block
Block
Block

1
1
501
1
501
401

- Access Provisions - Cargo Doors


- Standard Torques
- Pressurization Control System
- Electrical System - Cargo Doors
- Electrical System - Cargo Doors
- Ramp floor panels

2. Procedure
A.

Job Set-Up
(1) Lower ramp to horizontal level (Ref. 52-31-00, P. Block 1).
(2) Open, safety and tag the following circuit breakers:
PANEL

SERVICE

FIN

LH MISCELLANEOUS

CARGO DOOR

MB1

MISCELLANEOUS

No. 1 (2) HYDR. PUMP

QC1 (QC2)

BAT BUS No. 2

CAB. PRESS.

HE1

BAT BUS No. 2

WARNING 2

XA2

(3) Put warning notice in position telling personnel not to operate


cargo ramp/door.

Effectivity: See TOC

21-31-23

Pag. 401
Dec. 15/07

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


(4) Remove the related ramp floor panels 811JF (811GF), 811KF (811FF),
811DF (811BF) and 811EF (811AF) (Ref.06-41-56, P. Block 1) and
(Ref. 52-33-40, P. Block 401).
B.

Removal (Fig. 401 and Fig. 401A)


(1) Note positions of wiring terminals (11) and disconnect terminals
from terminal board (10).
(2) Remove nut (6), washer (7) and screw (9) and release clamp (8).
(3) Remove nut (1).
(4) Remove microswitch (5) with nut (4) and washer (3) from
microswitch support (2).
(5) Install protective insulating sleeving on exposed wiring terminal
ends.

C.

Preparation for Installation (Fig. 401 and Fig. 401A)


(1) On microswitch support (2), inspect microswitch plunger actuating
mechanism for freedom of movement, damage and corrosion.
(2) Remove protective insulation and inspect wiring terminal ends for
damage and deterioration of insulation.
(3) Install nut (4) and locking washer (3) on microswitch (5).

D.

Installation (Fig. 401 and Fig. 401A)


(1) Put microswitch (5) in position on microswitch support (2). Make
sure that positioning lug of locking washer (3) is correct.
(2) Install nut (1) to microswitch (5) and hand tighten.
(3) Connect terminals (11) to terminal board (10).
(4) Install screw (9), clamp (8), washer (7), and nut (6).
(5) Adjust microswitch (5) with nut (4)
(Ref.52-31-00, P. Block 501).
(6) Torque the nut (1) to standard value
(Ref.20-21-00, P. Block 1).

Effectivity: See TOC

21-31-23

Pag. 402
Dec. 15/07

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


Ramp Door Switches

CM1.21.31.23.4AO.00.00-01

Fig. 401 Ramp Door Switches

Effectivity: S/N 054999

21-31-23

Pag. 403
Dec. 15/07

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

CM1.21.31.23.4AA.00.00-01

Ramp Door Switches


Fig. 401A Ramp Door Switches

Effectivity: S/N 001052

21-31-23

Pag. 404
Dec. 15/07

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


E.

Test (Fig. 401 and Fig. 401A)


(1) Do functional test of cargo ramp door
(Ref. 52-31-00, P. Block 501).
(2) Make sure that plunger actuator (12) pushes microswitch when it
is in locked position.
(3) Do pressurization control system functional test
(Ref. 21-31-00, P. Block 501).

F.

Close-Up
(1) Make sure that work area is clean and clear of tools and
miscellaneous equipment.
(2) Install the related ramp floor panels 811JF (811GF), 811KF
(811FF), 811DF (811BF) and 811EF (811AF)
(Ref.06-41-56, P. Block 1) and (Ref. 52-33-40, P. Block 401).
(3) Remove warning notice.

Effectivity: See TOC

21-31-23

Pag. 405
Dec. 15/07

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

Effectivity: See TOC

21-31-23

Pag. 406
Dec. 15/07

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


COOLING
DESCRIPTION/OPERATION

1. General
Cooling includes those units and components of the air conditioning system
which cool and condition engine bleed air before supplying it to the
flight and passenger compartments.

Effectivity: See TOC

21-50-00

Pag. 1
Sep. 01/94

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

Effectivity: See TOC

21-50-00

Pag. 2
Sep. 01/94

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


AIR COOLING SYSTEM
DESCRIPTION/OPERATION

1. General
Each independent LH and RH cooling system gets a controlled engine bleed
air supply from its associated compression system. A dual temperature
control valve routes this supply through the refrigeration pack to a
condenser and mixer unit for delivery to the distribution system.
2. Component Location (Fig. 1)
ITEM

FIN

DESIGNATION

ZONE

ACCESS
PANEL

REFERENCE

1.

Condenser and Mixer

911

911AT
(912)

21-51-24

2.

Water Collector

911
(912)

911AT

21-51-25

3.

Check Valve
(Hot Air Bypass)

911
(912)

910AT

21-51-13

4.

Refrigeration Pack

911
(912)

911AT

21-51-20

5.

Spray Nozzle

911
(912)

911AT

21-51-27

6.

Water Filter

911
(912)

911AT

21-51-26

7.

Mixing Box Assembly

911
(912)

911AT

21-51-23

3. Description
Air from the compression system passes thru a dual temperature control
valve where it goes into separate entry ports in the refrigeration pack,
installed on attachment brackets forward of the center wing front spar at
wing STA 220 between fuselage frames 19 and 21.

Effectivity: See TOC

21-51-00

CONFIG. 1
Pag. 1
Sep. 01/99

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


Air Cooling System - Component Location

CM1.21.51.00.0AO.01.01-00

Fig. 1 Air Cooling System - Component Location (Sheet 1 of 2)

Effectivity: See TOC

21-51-00

CONFIG. 1
Pag. 2
Sep. 01/99

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

CM1.21.51.00.0AO.02.01-00

Fig. 1 Air Cooling System - Component Location (Sheet 2 of 2)

Effectivity: See TOC

21-51-00

CONFIG. 1
Pag. 3
Sep. 01/99

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


The refrigeration pack includes a dual heat exchanger and air cycle
machine. Some of the engine bleed air passes thru the dual heat exchanger,
and some is bypassed, thru an in-line check valve found in the bypass
ducting upstream of the air cycle machine entry port, to the air cycle
machine (ACM).
Both air supplies are then routed to a condenser and mixer assembly
installed inboard of the refrigeration pack between frames 20 and 21 and
them to the mixing box assembly that mixes the air from LH and RH
refrigeration pack and sends it to the distribution system.
Downstream of the condenser and mixer, a water collector, installed on
brackets fastened to the fuselage to the rear of the refrigeration pack at
frame 21, removes moisture from the bleed air before it goes into the
turbine section of the refrigeration pack air cycle machine. Moisture
collected by the condenser and mixer and water separator is sent to the
forward end of the refrigeration pack, where after passing thru an in-line
filter, it is ejected through a spray nozzle into the heat exchanger
ambient air inlet matrix in the form of mist.
Filter and spray nozzle are installed on a bracket fastened to the
structure forward of the heat exchanger.
4. Component Description
A.

Condenser and Mixer (Fig. 2)


(1) Description
The condenser and mixer assembly includes a condenser, mixer and
water collector, the three sections being built as a single unit.
The condenser section is a crossflow, plate and fin design of
aluminum with a brazed core.
The mixer section includes two concentric cylindrical shells of
aluminum, welded to the condenser cold side transition head.
Mixer and condenser functions are therefore integrated into a
single unit.
The water collector section is welded to the condenser core and
includes a settling tank which collects water at the condenser
outlet.

Effectivity: See TOC

21-51-00

CONFIG. 1
Pag. 4
Sep. 01/99

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


(2) Operation
Cold air from the turbine outlet of the air cycle machine and
warm air from the recirculation fan are mixed to give a uniform
temperature entering the condenser core to prevent the
possibility of snow formation.
The outer shell of the mixer has the recirculation air inlet
duct, which supplies air to the annular section formed by inner
and outer shells. The inner shell is around the mixing chamber.
Mixing of the two air supplies starts close to the turbine
discharge outlet. A series of distribution holes around the
periphery of the conical inner shell lets the recirculated air
mix with the colder air along the length of the mixer. The mixed
air is diffused in the mixer conical section, resulting in an
even air temperature before entry into the condenser core.
The colder LP air from the mixer section flows between straight
fins in the condenser core and out to the distribution system
(Ref. 21-21-00, P. Block 1). Warmer HP air from the refrigeration
pack secondary heat exchanger flows between ruffled fins in the
condenser core at a right angle to the LP air flow, then thru the
water collection section, and out thru a port to the inline water
collector and air cycle machine.
Water collected is routed thru a port to the spray nozzle forward
of the heat exchanger.
B.

Water Collector (Fig. 3)


(1) Description
The water collector includes a welded aluminum tank with inlet
and outlet ports, two drain ports and three mounting attachment
brackets.
The interior walls of the tank are lined with a wire mesh
blanket. On installation, the uppermost drain port is fitted with
a blanking plug, and the lower port is connected to the spray
nozzle system.

Effectivity: See TOC

21-51-00

CONFIG. 1
Pag. 5
Sep. 01/99

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


Condenser and Mixer

CM1.21.51.00.0BO.00.01-00

Fig. 2 Condenser and Mixer

Effectivity: See TOC

21-51-00

CONFIG. 1
Pag. 6
Sep. 01/99

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


(2) Operation
Water suspended in the bleed air condenses as it passes through
the condenser and mixer. A portion of this water is collected in
the collection section of the condenser and mixer, and the
remainder goes to the water collector. Water from both sources
flows to the spray nozzle forward of the heat exchanger.
C.

Check Valve (Hot Air Bypass) (Fig. 4)


The check valve includes a valve body and two flappers made of
corrosion resistant steel, and a pivot pin of hardened chromium
plated corrosion resistant steel. The flappers turn approximately 30
against a stop to prevent valve flutter. An index pin on the valve
body connects with a location hole in the ducting to make certain
that installation and flow direction are correct. The check valve
prevents total loss of cabin pressure in the event of duct failure
upstream of the turbine.

D.

Refrigeration Pack (Fig. 5)


(1) Description
The refrigeration pack includes a dual heat exchanger, air cycle
machine, associated ducting, and a duct overtemperature switch.
The ram air flow path extends from the heat exchanger ram air
inlet, thru the heat exchanger core and into the air cycle
machine fan section. The ram air outlet of the heat exchanger
then directs air into the fan housing which is a diffuser for fan
exit air.
(a) Dual Heat Exchanger
The dual heat exchanger includes a primary and a secondary
section fabricated together to make a single unit. The unit
is a ported aluminum plate and fin type core divided into
two equal parts so that conduction of heat passing thru the
core in a direction opposite to the ram air flow is
decreased. One part has the hot primary pass and the first
pass of the secondary. The other part has the last two
passes of the secondary. The two parts are welded together
around their edges so that ram air flows thru them in
series. An air gap is left between the two part cores to
decrease heat conduction.

Effectivity: See TOC

21-51-00

CONFIG. 1
Pag. 7
Sep. 01/99

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


Water Collector

CM1.21.51.00.0CO.00.01-00

Fig. 3 Water Collector


Check Valve (Hot Air Bypass)

CM1.21.51.00.0DO.00.01-00

Fig. 4 Check Valve (Hot Air Bypass)

Effectivity: See TOC

21-51-00

CONFIG. 1
Pag. 8
Sep. 01/99

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


(b) Air Cycle Machine (ACM)
The ACM includes a housing having a bearing mounted shaft,
on which a cooling turbine rotor, an air compressor rotor
and an air fan rotor are installed. Rotors are made of high
strength wrought aluminum. The housing is made of aluminum
casting with an internal steel section for rotor
containment. An oil sump attached to the housing supplies
oil to the oil wicks at each rotor bearing location.
A locating dowel installed on the mounting flange makes
certain that the air cycle machine is attached correctly to
the heat exchanger. Both units are fastened together by a
clamp.
(c) Duct Overtemperature Switch
The duct overtemperature switch HF47 (HF48) is a
single-pole, normally open, non-latching thermal switch with
a bimetallic element. The unit is installed in the
compressor outlet duct between the ACM and the secondary
heat exchanger inlet.
(2) Operation
Hot engine bleed air from the dual temperature control valve goes
into the primary heat exchanger inlet port and becomes partially
cooled as it flows thru the primary core section of the dual heat
exchanger. The primary cooled air is routed thru ducting to the
compressor section of the ACM, which raises the air pressure and
temperature.
The compressed air is then routed thru ducting to the secondary
core of the dual heat exchanger, where the heat induced by
compression is removed. The air then leaves the pack thru a
ducting port and goes back in at the turbine entry port of the
ACM, where it is further cooled by expansion at the turbine
nozzles. This expansion process drives the ACM turbine, which in
turn drives the compressor and fan rotors. The resulting cold air
supply can be mixed with hot bypass air to get the desired
temperature as controlled by the upstream dual temperature
control valve.

Effectivity: See TOC

21-51-00

CONFIG. 1
Pag. 9
Sep. 01/99

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


Refrigeration Pack

CM1.21.51.00.0EO.00.01-00

Fig. 5 Refrigeration Pack

Effectivity: See TOC

21-51-00

CONFIG. 1
Pag. 10
Sep. 01/99

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


The conditioned air supply leaves the pack at the turbine exit
port for delivery, thru the condenser and mixer, to the
distribution system.
The rotating ACM fan sucks ram air in thru the matrix of the dual
heat exchanger, where it absorbs heat from the primary and
secondary cores. The heated ram air is then discharged to
atmosphere thru the fan housing of the ACM.
The duct overtemperature switch operates at a rising temperature
of 435 10 F and a falling temperature of 420 F minimum.
E.

Spray Nozzle (Fig. 6)


The parts of the spray nozzle are a stainless steel nozzle and
adapter, threaded and bonded together. The nozzle includes a
discharge hole and an impingement pin.
The unit ejects water that is removed from the air by the water
collectors, across the ram air inlet of the heat exchanger to help
cooling by evaporation.

F.

Water Filter (Fig. 7)


The water filter includes two aluminum housings and a filter element.
The housings have a threaded connection for access to the 400-micron
filter screen and threaded end fittings to facilitate installation.
The unit filters the water in the drain line upstream of the spray
nozzle.

G.

Mixing Box Assembly


The mixing box assembly is made from aluminum alloy and a thermally
isolated material. The box has a wall with a space between two
compartments. Each compartment includes an air inlet to the air from
the condenser and mixer and an air outlet to distribution system. In
the air inlet are installed the temperature sensor HF55 (HF56) and
the overtemperature switch HF57 (HF58).
The conditioned air from the LH and RH condenser and mixer is mixed
to equalize the temperatures.

Effectivity: See TOC

21-51-00

CONFIG. 1
Pag. 11
Sep. 01/99

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


Spray Nozzle

CM1.21.51.00.0FO.00.01-00

Fig. 6 Spray Nozzle

Effectivity: See TOC

21-51-00

CONFIG. 1
Pag. 12
Sep. 01/99

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


Water Filter

CM1.21.51.00.0GO.00.01-00

Fig. 7 Water Filter

Effectivity: See TOC

21-51-00

CONFIG. 1
Pag. 13
Sep. 01/99

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


5. Operation (Fig. 8 and Fig. 9)
Engine bleed air from the dual temperature control valve passes thru the
primary section of the dual heat exchanger, where it is partially cooled
and supplied to the compressor inlet. The pressurized air then enters the
secondary section of the dual heat exchanger, where heat caused by the
compression action is removed. The cooled air then passes thru the
condenser section of the condenser and mixer assembly, where moisture is
removed, and thru the water collector to the turbine which drives the fan
and compressor. At the turbine outlet, the cooled air joins a supply of
warm bleed air routed directly from the dual temperature control valve.
The two sources of air then pass thru the mixer section of the condenser
and mixer assembly to be mixed with passenger compartment recirculation
air and delivered at an even temperature to the distribution system. Water
collected at the condenser section of the condenser and mixer assembly,
together with that from the water collector, is routed to the front of the
refrigeration pack thru an in-line filter to the spray nozzle, where it is
ejected in the form of a mist ejected into the ram air intake, where it
helps cooling by condensation.
6. Interfaces
When duct air temperature increases to more than the preset limit, the
overtemperature switch HF47 (HF48) operates to close the pressure
regulator and shut-off valve and the HP shut-off valve
(Ref. 21-11-00, P. Block 1) and supplies a signal to cause a warning
annunciator in the flight compartment to come on.
The dual temperature control valve supplies engine bleed air to the bypass
line and primary section of the heat exchanger in proportions dictated by
cabin temperature requirements (Ref. 21-61-00, P. Block 1).

Effectivity: See TOC

21-51-00

CONFIG. 1
Pag. 14
Sep. 01/99

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


Air Cooling System - Overview

CM1.21.51.00.0HO.00.01-00

Fig. 8 Air Cooling System - Overview

Effectivity: See TOC

21-51-00

CONFIG. 1
Pag. 15
Sep. 01/99

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


Air Cooling System - Schematic Diagram

CM1.21.51.00.0JO.00.01-00

Fig. 9 Air Cooling System - Schematic Diagram

Effectivity: See TOC

21-51-00

CONFIG. 1
Pag. 16
Sep. 01/99

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


AIR COOLING SYSTEM
TROUBLESHOOTING

1. General
This section contains troubleshooting procedures for the cooling system
and should be used in conjunction with troubleshooting procedures detailed
in the compression, distribution and temperature control sections of this
chapter.
A.
MIST OR WATER DRIPPING FROM
CABIN AIR OUTLETS OF
DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM ACCOMPANIED
BY INCREASED HUMIDITY.

SUPPORT EQUIPMENT REQUIRED:


-ACCESS PLATFORM

INSPECT WATER SPRAY NOZZLE OF


AFFECTED SIDE.

REMOVE BLOCKAGE OR REPLACE


WATER SPRAY NOZZLE
(Ref. 21-51-27, P. Block 401).

YES

IS SPRAY NOZZLE BLOCKED?


NO
INSPECT WATER FILTER.
YES

CLEAN OR REPLACE FILTER ELEMENT


(Ref. 21-51-26, P. Block 401).

IS WATER FILTER BLOCKED?


NO
INSPECT WATER COLLECTOR.
ARE COLLECTOR DRAINS BLOCKED?

YES

REMOVE BLOCKAGE OR REPLACE


WATER COLLECTOR
(Ref. 21-51-25, P. Block 401).
FIND REASON FOR CONTAMINATION.

NO
1

Effectivity: See TOC

SEE NEXT PAGE

21-51-00

CONFIG. 1
Pag. 101
Sep. 01/99

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


1

FROM PREVIOUS PAGE

NO
INSPECT CONDENSER SECTION OF
CONDENSER AND MIXER.

YES

REMOVE BLOCKAGE AND FIND REASON


FOR CONTAMINATION.

IS WATER DRAIN BLOCKED?


B.
DECREASED COOLING CAPACITY FROM
ONE PACK.

SUPPORT EQUIPMENT REQUIRED:


-ACCESS PLATFORM

INSPECT AFFECTED SIDE DUAL HEAT


EXCHANGER MATRIX.

REMOVE BLOCKAGE AND INSPECT FOR


DAMAGE.

YES

IS RAM AIR FLOW IMPEDED?


NO
INSPECT RAM AIR OUTLET.
IS OUTLET BLOCKED?

YES

REMOVE BLOCKAGE AND INSPECT FOR


DAMAGE.

NO
INSPECT HEAT EXCHANGER FOR
LEAKAGE OF BLEED AIR.

REPAIR LEAKAGE AS NECESSARY.


YES

ARE ANY LEAKS APPARENT?


NO
INSPECT AIR CYCLE MACHINE (ACM)
SECTION OF PACK.
IS AIR CYCLE MACHINE SHAFT
SEIZED?

YES

REPLACE REFRIGERATION PACK AND


FIND REASON FOR SHAFT SEIZURE
(Ref. 21-51-20, P. Block 401).

NO
1 SEE NEXT PAGE

Effectivity: See TOC

21-51-00

CONFIG. 1
Pag. 102
Sep. 01/99

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


1 FROM PREVIOUS PAGE
NO
INSPECT ACM FAN AND TURBINE FOR
DAMAGE.

YES

REPLACE REFRIGERATION PACK AND


FIND REASON FOR DAMAGE
(Ref. 21-51-20, P. Block 401).

IS ANY DAMAGE APPARENT?


NO
INSPECT DELIVERY LINE TO
CONDENSER SECTION OF CONDENSER
AND MIXER.

REMOVE BLOCKAGE AND FIND REASON


FOR CONTAMINATION.
YES

IS ANY BLOCKAGE APPARENT?


NO

YES

REPAIR LEAKAGE OR REPLACE


CONDENSER AND MIXER
(Ref. 21-51-24, P. Block 401).

YES

REPLACE CHECK VALVE (HOT AIR


BYPASS)
(Ref. 21-51-13, P. Block 401).

INSPECT CONDENSER AND MIXER FOR


LEAKAGE OF HOT BLEED AIR.
ARE ANY LEAKS APPARENT?

NO
INSPECT CHECK VALVE (HOT AIR
BYPASS).
IS VALVE STUCK IN CLOSED
POSITION?
NO
REFER TO TROUBLESHOOTING
PROCEDURES DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM
(Ref. 21-21-00, P. Block 101)
AND TEMPERATURE CONTROL SYSTEM
(Ref. 21-61-00, P. Block 101).

Effectivity: See TOC

21-51-00

CONFIG. 1
Pag. 103
Sep. 01/99

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

Effectivity: See TOC

21-51-00

CONFIG. 1
Pag. 104
Sep. 01/99

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


CHECK VALVE (HOT AIR BY-PASS)
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
WARNING:

BEFORE POWER IS SUPPLIED TO THE AIRCRAFT, MAKE SURE THAT ELECTRICAL


CIRCUITS UPON WHICH WORK IS IN PROGRESS ARE ISOLATED.

1. Equipment and Materials


ITEM

DESIGNATION

A.

ITEM 20-15-01

Circuit Breaker Safety Clips and Tags

B.

Warning Notice

C.

Ducting Blanks

D.

Servicing Platform, 2 m (6,5 ft)

E.

35-71202-0201

Seal

F.

35-71202-0301

Seal

Referenced Procedures:
- 06-41-57, P. Block 1
- 21-61-00, P. Block 501

- Access Provision - Wings


- Temperature Control System

2. Procedure
A.

Job Set-Up
(1) Open, safety and tag these circuit breakers:
PANEL

SERVICE

FIN

MISCELLANEOUS

AIR CONDITIONING

HF1 (HF2)

MISCELLANEOUS

AIR CONDITIONING

HF3 (HF4)

(2) Put warning notice in flight compartment telling personnel not to


operate the air conditioning system.
(3) Put the servicing platform in position.
(4) Remove bolts fastening ram fan outlet and grill to access panel.
(5) Remove the access panel 911AT to get access to check valve area
(Ref. 06-41-57, P. Block 1).
Effectivity: See TOC

21-51-13

Pag. 401
Dec. 15/07

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


B.

Removal (Fig. 401)


(1) Remove the clamp (2).
(2) Remove the check valve assembly (4) and the seals (3) and (5).
Discard the seals (3) and (5).
(3) Install blanks on the duct ends (1) and (6).

C.

Installation (Fig. 401)


(1) Remove blanks from the duct ends (1) and (6).
(2) Install the check valve (4) and a new seal 35-71202-0201 (5) with
the dowel (8) into the locating hole (7), in the ducting flange
face (6).
(3) Put a new seal 35-71202-0301 (3) on the check valve (4) and
assemble the duct end (1). Attach with the clamp (2).
(4) Torque the clamp (2) to 35 lbfin (3,95 Nm).

D.

Test
(1) Do the temperature control system adjustment/test
(Ref. 21-61-00, P. Block 501) and inspect the installation for
leaks.

E.

Close-Up
(1) Make sure that working area is clean and clear of tools and
miscellaneous equipment.
(2) Install the access panel 911AT (Ref. 06-41-57, P. Block 1).
(3) Remove the servicing platform.
(4) Remove the warning notice.

Effectivity: See TOC

21-51-13

Pag. 402
Dec. 15/07

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


Check Valve (Hot Air Bypass)

CM1.21.51.13.4AO.00.00-01

Fig. 401 Check Valve (Hot Air Bypass)

Effectivity: See TOC

21-51-13

Pag. 403
Dec. 15/07

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

Effectivity: See TOC

21-51-13

Pag. 404
Dec. 15/07

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


AIR CYCLE MACHINE
SERVICING
WARNING:

PUT ON SAFETY GOGGLES AND GLOVES WHEN YOU USE LUBRICATING OIL. MAKE
SURE THAT THE WORK AREA IS WELL VENTILATED.

WARNING:

IN CASES OF IRRITATION OF SKIN OR EYES, WASH WITH COPIOUS


QUANTITIES OF CLEAN WATER AND GET IMMEDIATE MEDICAL AID.

CAUTION:

DO NOT OPERATE COOLING SYSTEM BEFORE FILLING AIR CYCLE MOTOR SUMP.

1. Draining/Filling of the Oil of the Air Cycle Machine (ACM)


A.

Reason for the Job


- To do the oil draining and filling procedure for the air cycle
machine (ACM).
- To do the 21.50.00.05 MRB task, "Drain and refill Air Cycle Machine
Oil".

B.

Equipment and Materials


ITEM

DESIGNATION

(1)

ITEM 20-15-01

Circuit Breaker Safety Clips and Tags

(2)

Oil Drainage Container, 100 cc capacity

(3)

Servicing Platform, 2 m (6,5 ft.)

(4)

Warning Notices

(5)

Z-21.101

Synthetic Oil for Motor

** On A/C: With ACM with translucent oil sump


(6)

M83248/1-033

Fluorocarbon Rubber

(7)

Z-21.127

Lubricant

** On A/C: With ACM without translucent oil sump


(6)

69494K902

Packing

(7)

MS20995C32

Lockwire

(8)

Syringe

** On A/C: All

Effectivity: See TOC

21-51-20

Pag. 301
Jul. 31/06

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


Referenced Procedures:
- 06-41-57, P. Block 1
C.

- Access Provision - Wings

Procedure
(1) Job Set-Up
(a) Open, safety and tag these circuit breakers:
PANEL

SERVICE

FIN

MISCELLANEOUS

AIR CONDITIONING

HF1 (HF2)

MISCELLANEOUS

AIR CONDITIONING

HF3 (HF4)

(b) Put warning notices in flight compartment telling personnel


not to operate the air conditioning system.
(c) Put the servicing platform in position.
** On A/C: S/N 001062
(d) Remove the access panel 911EL (912DR) to get access to the
air cycle machine (ACM) oil sump
(Ref. 06-41-57, P. Block 1).
** On A/C: S/N 063999
(d) Remove the access panel 911CL (912CR) to get access to the
air cycle machine (ACM) oil sump
(Ref. 06-41-57, P. Block 1).
** On A/C: All
(2) Draining of the ACM Oil Sump (Fig. 301 and Fig. 301A)
** On A/C: With ACM without translucent oil sump
(a) Put the oil drainage container in position.
(b) Cut and discard the lockwire from the filler plug (3).
Remove the filler plug (3) and discard the packing (4).
(c) Remove the oil from sump (1) (approximately 50 cc) through
the filler plug hole (2) using a syringe. Remove the oil
from the syringe to the oil drainage container.
(d) Temporarily install the filler plug (3) finger tight to
prevent the ingress of foreign bodies.

Effectivity: See TOC

21-51-20

Pag. 302
Jul. 31/06

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


Air Cycle Machine - Draining and Filling of the Oil Sump

CM1.21.51.20.3AO.00.00-01

Fig. 301 Air Cycle Machine - Draining and Filling of the Oil Sump

Effectivity: Aircraft with ACM without


translucent oil sump

21-51-20

Pag. 303
Jul. 31/06

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

CM1.21.51.20.3AA.00.00-00

Air Cycle Machine - Draining and Filling of the Oil Sump


Fig. 301A Air Cycle Machine - Draining and Filling of the Oil Sump

Effectivity: Aircraft with ACM with


translucent oil sump

21-51-20

Pag. 304
Jul. 31/06

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


** On A/C: With ACM with translucent oil sump
(a) Put the oil drainage container in position.
(b) Remove the screws (5) and washers (4) and (3) which attach
the oil sump (2) to the turbine housing. Discard the
fluorocarbon rubber (1).
(c) Remove the oil sump (2) from the ACM and pour the oil from
the sump (2) to the oil drainage container.
(d) Temporarily install the oil sump (2) finger tight the screws
(5) to prevent ingress of foreign bodies.
** On A/C: All
(3) Filling of the ACM Oil Sump (Fig. 301 and Fig. 301A)
** On A/C: With ACM without translucent oil sump
(a) Remove the filler plug (3).
(b) Fill the sump to the level of the filler plug hole (2)
(approximately 50 cc) with oil Z-21.101 .
CAUTION:

DIFFERENT TYPES OF OIL MAY NOT BE MIXED. VERIFY


THE TYPE OF OIL THAT THERE WAS IN THE ACM BEFORE
PROCEEDING TO FILLING. IN THE EVENT OF DOUBT,
EMPTY THE ACM COMPLETELY AND FILL IT WITH NEW
OIL.

(c) Install the filler plug (3) with a new packing (4). Torque
tighten to between 1,7 and 2,2 Nm (15 and 20 lb.in) and
safety with new lockwire.
** On A/C: With ACM with translucent oil sump
(a) Remove the oil sump (2).
(b) Fill the sump to the fill line with oil Z-21.101 .
CAUTION:

DIFFERENT TYPES OF OIL MAY NOT BE MIXED. VERIFY


THE TYPE OF OIL THAT THERE WAS IN THE ACM BEFORE
PROCEEDING TO FILLING. IN THE EVENT OF DOUBT,
EMPTY THE ACM COMPLETELY AND FILL IT WITH NEW
OIL.

(c) Lubricate the new fluorocarbon rubber (1) with a thin layer
of lubricant Z-21.127, and install it on the oil sump (2).
NOTE:

Effectivity: See TOC

The fluorocarbon rubber lubrication makes the


installation easier.

21-51-20

Pag. 305
Jul. 31/06

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


(d) Apply a thin layer of oil Z-21.101 , to the threads of screws
(5).
(e) Install the oil sump (2) in the turbine housing of the ACM
and attach it with the screws (5) and washers (4) and (3).
Torque tighten to between 1,1 and 1,3 Nm (10 and 12 lb.in).
CAUTION:

TOO MUCH TORQUE CAN CAUSE DAMAGE TO THE SUMP.

** On A/C: All
(4) Close-Up
(a) Remove the oil drainage container and throw away the drained
oil in accordance with the local safety regulations.
(b) Remove the safety clips and tags. Close the circuit breakers
opened.
(c) Install the access panels removed
(Ref. 06-41-57, P. Block 1).
(d) Remove the servicing platform.
(e) Remove the warning notices.
(f) Remove all tools and equipment from the work area. Make sure
that the work area is clean.

Effectivity: See TOC

21-51-20

Pag. 306
Jul. 31/06

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


2. Check of the Oil Level of the Air Cycle Machine (ACM)
A.

Reason for the Job


- To do a check of the ACM oil level.
- To do the 21.50.00.04 MRB task, "Check Air Cycle Machine Oil level".

B.

Equipment and Materials


ITEM

DESIGNATION

(1)

ITEM 20-15-01

Circuit Breaker Safety Clips and Tags

(2)

Servicing Platform, 2 m (6,5 ft.)

(3)

Warning Notices

** On A/C: With ACM without translucent oil sump


(4)

69494K902

Packing

(5)

MS20995C32

Lockwire

** On A/C: All

Referenced Procedures:
- 06-41-57, P. Block 1
C.

- Access Provision - Wings

Procedure
(1) Job Set-Up
(a) Open, safety and tag these circuit breakers:
PANEL

SERVICE

FIN

MISCELLANEOUS

AIR CONDITIONING

HF1 (HF2)

MISCELLANEOUS

AIR CONDITIONING

HF3 (HF4)

(b) Put warning notices in flight compartment telling personnel


not to operate the air conditioning system.
(c) Put the servicing platform in position.
** On A/C: S/N 001062

Effectivity: See TOC

21-51-20

Pag. 307
Jul. 31/06

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


(d) Remove the access panel 911EL (912DR) to get access to the
air cycle machine (ACM) oil sump
(Ref. 06-41-57, P. Block 1).
** On A/C: S/N 063999
(d) Remove the access panel 911CL (912CR) to get access to the
air cycle machine (ACM) oil sump
(Ref. 06-41-57, P. Block 1).
** On A/C: All
(2) Check (Fig. 301 and Fig. 301A)
** On A/C: With ACM without translucent oil sump
(a) Cut and discard the lockwire from the filler plug (3).
Remove the filler plug (3) and discard the packing (4).
(b) On the oil sump (1), make sure that the oil level is to the
level of the filler plug hole (2).
(c) Fill the ACM with oil to the correct level, if necessary.
Refer to the paragraph 1 "Draining/Filling of the Oil of the
Air Cycle Machine (ACM)".
(d) Install the filler plug (3) with a new packing (4). Torque
tighten to between 1,7 and 2,2 Nm (15 and 20 lb.in) and
safety with new lockwire.
** On A/C: With ACM with translucent oil sump
(a) On the oil sump (2), make sure that the oil level is to the
level of the fill line.
(b) Fill the ACM with oil to the correct level, if necessary.
Refer to the paragraph 1 "Draining/Filling of the Oil of the
Air Cycle Machine (ACM)".
** On A/C: All

Effectivity: See TOC

21-51-20

Pag. 308
Jul. 31/06

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


(3) Close-Up
(a) Remove the safety clips and tags. Close the circuit breakers
opened.
(b) Install the access panels removed
(Ref. 06-41-57, P. Block 1).
(c) Remove the servicing platform.
(d) Remove the warning notices.
(e) Remove all tools and equipment from the work area. Make sure
that the work area is clean.

Effectivity: See TOC

21-51-20

Pag. 309
Jul. 31/06

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

Effectivity: See TOC

21-51-20

Pag. 310
Jul. 31/06

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


AIR CYCLE MACHINE
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
WARNING:

BEFORE POWER IS SUPPLIED TO THE AIRCRAFT, MAKE SURE THAT ELECTRICAL


CIRCUITS UPON WHICH WORK IS IN PROGRESS ARE ISOLATED.

1. Removal/Installation of the Air Cycle Machine


A.

Reason for the Job


- To remove and install the Air Cycle Machine when it is unserviceable
or to get access to other components.
- To do the 21.50.00.06 MRB task (MRB Document PV02M) , "Remove Air
Cycle Machine for restoration."

B.

Equipment and Materials


ITEM

DESIGNATION

(1)

ITEM 20-15-01

Circuit Breaker Safety Clips and Tags

(2)

Standard Tool

Warning Notices

(3)

Standard Tool

Servicing Platform, 2 m (6.5 ft)

(4)

Standard Tool

Electrical Blanking Plugs and Caps

(5)

Standard Tool

Pipe Protection Plugs and Caps

(6)

CAN67374L230

Preformed Packing (2 units)

(7)

CAN67374L219

Preformed Packing (8 units)

(8)

69494M222

Preformed Packing (4 units)

(9)

69494J138

Preformed Packing (2 units)

Referenced Procedures:
- 06-41-57, P.
- 20-21-00, P.
- 21-31-00, P.
- 21-51-20, P.
- 21-61-00, P.
- CMM 21-51-48
- CMM 21-51-49

Effectivity: See TOC

Block
Block
Block
Block
Block

1
1
501
301
501

- Access Provision - Wings


- Standard Torques
- Pressurization Control System
- Air Cycle Machine
- Temperature Control System
- CMM of Hamilton Sundstrand
- CMM of Hamilton Sundstrand

21-51-20

Pag. 401
Nov. 15/14

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


C.

Procedure
(1) Job Set-Up
(a) Open, safety and tag, with ITEM 20-15-01, these circuit
breakers:
PANEL

SERVICE

FIN

MISCELLANEOUS

AIR CONDITIONING

HF1 (HF2)

MISCELLANEOUS

AIR CONDITIONING

HF3 (HF4)

BATTERY BUS 2

CAB PRESS

HE1

(b) Put the warning notices in flight compartment telling


personnel not to operate the air conditioning system.
(c) Put the access platform in position.
(d) Remove the bolts fastening ram fan outlet grill to access
panel.
(e) Remove the access panel 911AT (Ref.06-41-57, P. Block 1).
(2) Removal (Fig. 401)
(a) Remove the overtemperature switch electrical connector (1)
from the electrical receptacle (2). Install the electrical
blanking plugs and caps on the electrical connector (1) and
electrical receptacle (2).
(b) Take out oil from sump (Ref.21-51-20, P. Block 301).
(c) Remove the screws (4) and washers (5) to disconnect the ram
air outlet duct (3) from the air cycle machine fan outlet
(6).
(d) Remove the clamp (16) to union air inlet duct end (11) with
air cycle machine (19) compressor. Remove and discard the
preformed packing (17).
(e) Remove the clamp (24) to union duct (27) with air cycle
machine (19). Move the sleeve (26) to show preformed
packings (25). Remove and discard the preformed packings
(25).

Effectivity: See TOC

21-51-20

Pag. 402
Nov. 15/14

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


Air Cycle Machine

CM1.21.51.20.4AO.01.00-02

Fig. 401 Air Cycle Machine (Sheet 1 of 2)

Effectivity: See TOC

21-51-20

Pag. 403
Nov. 15/14

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

CM1.21.51.20.4AO.02.00-02

Fig. 401 Air Cycle Machine (Sheet 2 of 2)

Effectivity: See TOC

21-51-20

Pag. 404
Nov. 15/14

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


(f) Remove the clamp (23) to union duct end (8) with air cycle
machine (19). Move the sleeve (9) to show two preformed
packings (10). Remove and discard the preformed packings
(10) .
(g) Remove the clamp (15) to union duct end (12) with air cycle
machine (19). Move the sleeve (13) to show two preformed
packing (14). Remove and discard the preformed packing (14) .
(h) Remove the clamp (18) to union air cycle machine (19) with
the heat exchanger (7).
(j) Remove the screws (28), washers (31) and nuts (30) from the
mounting bracket (32) and attachment bracket (29).
(k) Carefully remove the air cycle machine (19) taking care not
to damage adjacent components.
(l)

Remove and discard the preformed packing (20) .

(m) Install the pipe protection plugs and caps on all exposed
ducts ends (8), (11), (12) and (27).
NOTE:

If you removed the component to do the 21.50.00.06


MRB task, send it to the related shop for
restoration (Refer to CMM 21-51-48 of Hamilton
Sundstrand).

(3) Preparation of Replacement Component


(a) Fill the replacement ACM sump with oil to the full level
(Ref.21-51-20, P. Block 301).
(b) Rotate the replacement ACM 180 degrees from its normal
installation position for 30 seconds. Turn the ACM shaft
several times.
(c) Put the replacement ACM in its normal installation position.
Check the oil indicator and re-fill the oil to the full
level.
NOTE:

Effectivity: See TOC

Let the replacement ACM to soak for a minimun of one


hour in the normal installation position before you
install it on the aircraft.

21-51-20

Pag. 405
Nov. 15/14

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


(4) Preparation for Installation
(a) Make sure that heat exchanger matrix is clear and undamaged.
Inspect clamps on ducting between turbine and heat exchanger
for correct assembly and locking (Refer to CMM 21-51-49 of
Hamilton Sundstrand).
(5) Installation (Fig. 401)
(a) Put carefully air cycle machine (19) in position taking care
not to damage adjacent components and ducting.
(b) Install the new preformed packing (20), CAN67374L230, to the
turbine outlet (22).
(c)

Attach the air cycle machine (19) against condenser-mixer


(21) and heat exchanger (7) with clamp (18). Make sure that
the clamp (18) is correctly assembled. Torque the clamp (18)
between 0,734 and 0,791 mdaN (65 and 70 lbf.in).

(d) Make sure that the holes in mounting bracket (32) are in
line with holes in attachment brackets (29).
(e) Install the bolts (28), washers (31) and nuts (30) through
the attachment bracket (29) and attachment sleeves (26).
Torque the nuts (30) to the standard
value(Ref.20-21-00, P. Block 1).
(f) Remove the pipe protective plugs and caps blanking ducts
from all get duct ends (8), (11), (12) and (27).
(g) Install new preformed packings (14), CAN67374L219, push the
sleeve (13) over duct end (12) to cover the preformed
packings. Put the sleeve (13) equally over duct end. Install
the clamp (15).
(h) Install new preformed packings (10), 69494M222, push sleeve
(9) over duct end (8) to cover the preformed packings. Put
the sleeve (9) equally over duct end. Install the clamp
(23).
(j) Install new preformed packings (25), CAN67374L219, push
sleeve (26) over duct end (27) to cover the preformed
packings. Put sleeve (26) equally over duct end. Install the
clamp (24).
(k) Install new preformed packing (17), 69494J138, over duct end
(11). Install the clamp (16).

Effectivity: See TOC

21-51-20

Pag. 406
Nov. 15/14

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


(l) Install the ram air outlet duct (3) on the air cycle machine
fan outlet (6) with screws (4) and washers (5).
(m) Remove the electrical blanking plugs and caps from the
electrical connector (1) and electrical receptacle (2).
(n) Install the electrical connector (1) to electrical
receptacle (2).
(p) Fill the sump with oil (Ref.21-51-20, P. Block 301).
(6) Test
(a) Do a Pressurization System functional test
(Ref.21-31-00, P. Block 501) and inspect installation for
leaks.
(b) Do the adjustment/test of the Temperature Control System
(Ref.21-61-00, P. Block 501) and inspect installation for
leaks.
(7) Close-Up
(a) Install the access panel 911AT (Ref.06-41-57, P. Block 1).
(b) Install the bolts fastening ram fan outlet grill previously
removed.
(c) Remove the servicing platform from the work area.
(d) Remove the safety clips and tags , ITEM 20-15-01, and close
these circuit breakers:
PANEL

SERVICE

FIN

MISCELLANEOUS

AIR CONDITIONING

HF1 (HF2)

MISCELLANEOUS

AIR CONDITIONING

HF3 (HF4)

BATTERY BUS 2

CAB PRESS

HE1

(e) Remove warning notices.


(f) Remove all tools and equipment from the work area. Make sure
that the work area is clean.

Effectivity: See TOC

21-51-20

Pag. 407
Nov. 15/14

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

Effectivity: See TOC

21-51-20

Pag. 408
Nov. 15/14

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


HEAT EXCHANGER
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
WARNING:

BEFORE POWER IS SUPPLIED TO THE AIRCRAFT, MAKE SURE THAT ELECTRICAL


CIRCUITS UPON WHICH WORK IS IN PROGRESS ARE ISOLATED.

1. Removal/Installation of the Heat Exchanger


A.

Reason for the Job


- To remove and install the heat exchanger when it is unserviceable or
to get access to other components.
- To do the 21.50.00.01 MRB task, "Remove Dual Heat Exchanger for
cleaning".

B.

Equipment and Materials


ITEM

DESIGNATION

(1)

ITEM 20-15-01

Circuit Breaker Safety Clips and Tags

(2)

Standard Tool

Warning Notices

(3)

Standard Tool

Access Platform, 2 m (6,5 ft)

(4)

Standard Tool

Protective Caps

(5)

Standard Tool

Ducting Blanks

** On A/C: S/N 001062


(6)

CAN67374L223

Packing (4 units)

** On A/C: S/N 063999


(6)

CAN67374L222

Packing (4 units)

** On A/C: All
(7)

CAN67374L226

Packing (4 units)

(8)

69494M226

Packing (4 units)

(9)

69494M224

Packing (4 units)

Referenced Procedures:
- 06-41-57,
- 20-21-00,
- 21-00-00,
- 21-31-00,
- 21-61-00,

P.
P.
P.
P.
P.

Effectivity: See TOC

Block
Block
Block
Block
Block

1
1
201
501
501

- Access Provision - Wings


- Standard Torques
- Air Conditioning
- Pressurization Control System
- Temperature Control System

21-51-21

Pag. 401
May 15/12

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


- CMM 21-51-49
C.

- CMM of Hamilton Sundstrand

Procedure
(1) Job Set-Up
(a) Put warning notices in flight compartment telling personnel
not to operate the air conditioning system.
(b) Open, safety and tag with ITEM 20-15-01 the following
circuit breakers:
PANEL

SERVICE

FIN

MISCELLANEOUS

AIR CONDITIONING

HF1 (HF2)

MISCELLANEOUS

AIR CONDITIONING

HF3 (HF4)

BATTERY BUS 2

CAB PRESS

HE1

(c) Put access platform in position.


(d) Remove bolts fastening ram fan outlet grill to access panel.
(e) Remove the access panel 911AT (Ref. 06-41-57, P. Block 1).
(2) Removal (Fig. 401)
(a) Remove clamp (1) which attaches duct (9) to air primary
inlet (31). Remove and discard the two packings CAN67374L226
(2) (Ref.21-00-00, P. Block 201).
(b) Remove clamp ( 15 ) which attaches duct (11) to the air
secondary inlet (27). Remove and discard the two packings
69494M224 (13) (Ref.21-00-00, P. Block 201).
(c) Remove clamp (6) which attaches duct (10) to air primary
outlet (29). Remove and discard the two packings 69494M226
(7) (Ref.21-00-00, P. Block 201).
** On A/C: S/N 001062
(d) Remove clamp (4) which attaches duct (8) to air secondary
outlet (28). Remove and discard the two packings
CAN67374L223 (5) (Ref.21-00-00, P. Block 201).

Effectivity: See TOC

21-51-21

Pag. 402
May 15/12

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


Heat Exchanger

CM1.21.51.21.4AO.01.00-00

Fig. 401 Heat Exchanger (Sheet 1 of 2)

Effectivity: See TOC

21-51-21

Pag. 403
May 15/12

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

CM1.21.51.21.4AO.02.00-00

Fig. 401 Heat Exchanger (Sheet 2 of 2)

Effectivity: See TOC

21-51-21

Pag. 404
May 15/12

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


** On A/C: S/N 063999
(d) Remove clamp (4) which attaches duct (8) to air secondary
outlet (28). Remove and discard the packings CAN67374L222
(5) (Ref.21-00-00, P. Block 201).
** On A/C: All
(e) Remove clamp (14) to disconnect heat exchanger (3) duct from
the air cycle machine (12) outlet duct.
(f) Remove screw (19), nut (16), washer (17) from mounting
bracket (18). Move support strut (20) clear of mounting
bracket (18).
(g) Make sure that air cycle machine is correctly attached.
(h) Remove screws (22), bushes (23), washers (25) and nuts (26)
from mounting brackets (21) and attachment brackets (24).
(j) Remove carefully heat exchanger (3) taking care not to
damage adjacent components.
(k) Install blanks on all exposed duct ends of aircraft
installation, removed ducting ends (8), (9), (10) and (11).
NOTE:

If you removed the component to do the 21.50.00.01


MRB task, send it to the related shop for cleaning
(Refer to CMM 21-51-49 of Hamilton Sundstrand).

(3) Preparation of Replacement Component


(a) Make sure that heat exchanger matrix is clear and undamaged.
Inspect clamps on ducting between turbine and heat exchanger
for correct assembly and locking (Refer to CMM 21-51-49 of
Hamilton Sundstrand).
(4) Preparation for Installation
N/A
(5) Installation (Fig. 401)
(a) Put carefully heat exchanger (3) in position taking care not
to damage adjacent components and ducting.
(b) Make sure that holes in mounting brackets (21) are in line
with holes in attachment brackets (24), and install screws
(22), bushes (23), washers (25) and nuts (26). Torque to the
standard value (Ref.20-21-00, P. Block 1).

Effectivity: See TOC

21-51-21

Pag. 405
May 15/12

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


NOTE:

Make sure that star head bolts (28) are pushed fully
into holes of mounting brackets (21).

(c) Install support strut (20) into mounting bracket (18), with
bolt (19), washer (17) and nut (16). Torque to the standard
value (Ref.20-21-00, P. Block 1).
(d) Remove blanks from ducting ends (8), (9), (10) and (11).
(e) Install clamp (14). Make sure that clamp is correctly
assembled. Torque the clamp (14) to between 0,734 and 0,791
mdaN (65 and 70 lbf.in).
** On A/C: S/N 001062
(f) Install clamp (4), which attaches duct (8) to air secondary
outlet (28), with new packings CAN67374L223 (5)
(Ref.21-00-00, P. Block 201).
** On A/C: S/N 063999
(f) Install clamp (4), which attaches duct (8) to air secondary
outlet (28), with new packings CAN67374L222 (5)
(Ref.21-00-00, P. Block 201).
** On A/C: All
(g) Install clamp (6), which attaches duct (10) to air primary
outlet (29), with new packings 69494M226 (7)
(Ref.21-00-00, P. Block 201).
(h) Install clamp (15), which attaches duct (11) to air
secondary inlet (27), with new packings 69494M224 (13)
(Ref.21-00-00, P. Block 201).
(j) Install clamp (1), which attaches duct (9) to air primary
inlet (31), with new packings CAN67374L226 (2)
(Ref.21-00-00, P. Block 201).

Effectivity: See TOC

21-51-21

Pag. 406
May 15/12

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


(6) Test
(a) Remove safety clips and tags ITEM 20-15-01 and close these
circuit breakers:
PANEL

SERVICE

FIN

MISCELLANEOUS

AIR CONDITIONING

HF1 (HF2)

MISCELLANEOUS

AIR CONDITIONING

HF3 (HF4)

BATTERY BUS 2

CAB PRESS

HE1

(b) Do a pressurization system functional test


(Ref. 21-31-00, P. Block 501) and inspect installation for
leaks.
(c) Do the adjustment/test of the temperature control system
(Ref. 21-61-00, P. Block 501) and inspect installation for
leaks.
(7) Close-Up
(a) Install the access panel 911AT (Ref. 06-41-57, P. Block 1).
(b) Install bolts fastening ram fan outlet grill to access
panel.
(c) Remove access platform.
(d) Remove warning notices.
(e) Make sure that working area is clean and clear of tools and
miscellaneous equipment.

Effectivity: See TOC

21-51-21

Pag. 407
May 15/12

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

Effectivity: See TOC

21-51-21

Pag. 408
May 15/12

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


MIXING BOX ASSEMBLY
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
WARNING:

BEFORE POWER IS SUPPLIED TO THE AIRCRAFT, MAKE SURE THAT ELECTRICAL


CIRCUITS UPON WHICH WORK IS IN PROGRESS ARE ISOLATED.

WARNING:

THE EQUIPPED PACK WEIGHT IS APPROXIMATELY 22 KG (49 LB).

1. Removal/Installation of the Mixing Box Assembly


A.

Reason for the Job


To remove and install the mixing box assembly when it is
unserviceable or to get access to other components.

B.

Equipment and Materials


ITEM

DESIGNATION

(1)

ITEM 20-15-01

Circuit Breaker Safety Clips and Tags

(2)

Standard Tool

Warning Notice

(3)

Standard Tool

Protective Caps

(4)

Standard Tool

Ducting Blanks

(5)

Standard Tool

Access Platform, 2 m (6,5 ft)

(6)

CAN67374L242

Packing

Referenced Procedures:
- 06-41-57,
- 20-21-00,
- 21-00-00,
- 21-61-00,
- 21-61-13,
- 21-61-16,
C.

P.
P.
P.
P.
P.
P.

Block
Block
Block
Block
Block
Block

1
1
201
501
401
401

- Access Provision - Wings


- Standard Torques
- Air Conditioning
- Temperature Control System
- Temperature Sensor HF55 (HF56)
- Cabin Supply Overtemperature Switch
HF57 (HF58)

Procedure
(1) Job Set-Up
(a) Put warning notice in the flight compartment telling
personnel not to use the air conditioning system.
(b) Put access platform in position.

Effectivity: See TOC

21-51-23

Pag. 401
May 15/12

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


(c) Remove the access panel 911AT to get access to the condenser
and mixer (Ref. 06-41-57, P. Block 1).
(d) Open, safety and tag with ITEM 20-15-01 these circuit
breakers:
PANEL

SERVICE

FIN

MISCELLANEOUS

AIR CONDITIONING

HF1 (HF2)

MISCELLANEOUS

AIR CONDITIONING

HF3 (HF4)

(2) Removal (Fig. 401 and Fig. 401A)


** On A/C: S/N 198999
(a) Loosen the clamps (13).
(b) Remove the tubes (12) from the nozzles (14).
** On A/C: All
(c) Loosen the clamps (7).
(d) Remove the bolts (9) and washers (8).
(e) Carefully lift the mixing box assembly (1) and pull out the
condenser and mixer assembly sufficiently to clear the
cooling air outlet port (3) from the mixing box (1).
(f) Remove and discard the packing (2)
(Ref.21-00-00, P. Block 201).
(g) Remove the temperature sensor (10)
(Ref. 21-61-13, P. Block 401).
(h) Remove the overtemperature switch (11)
(Ref. 21-61-16, P. Block 401).
(j) Install blanks on all exposed orifices.
(3) Preparation of Replacement Component (Fig. 401 and Fig. 401A)
(a) Install a new packing (2) on the cooling air outlet port (3)
(Ref.21-00-00, P. Block 201).

Effectivity: See TOC

21-51-23

Pag. 402
May 15/12

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


(4) Preparation for Installation (Fig. 401 and Fig. 401A)
(a) Remove all blanks.
(b) Install the duct temperature sensor (10)
(Ref. 21-61-13, P. Block 401).
(c) Install the overtemperature switch (11)
(Ref. 21-61-16, P. Block 401).
(5) Installation (Fig. 401 and Fig. 401A)
(a) Lower the mixing box assembly (1) into position until the
flange (4) rests on the base (5). Simultaneously, insert the
cooling air outlet port (3) into the mixing box (1).
(b) Make sure that the mixing box (1) is positioned on the
ducting (6).
(c) Fasten the flange (4) to the base (5) with the washers (8)
and bolts (9). Torque the bolts (9) to the standard value
(Ref.20-21-00, P. Block 1).
(d) Safety the duct (6) with the clamp (7).
** On A/C: S/N 198999
(e) Install the tubes (12) on the nozzles (14). Attach the tubes
(12) with the clamps (13).
** On A/C: All
(6) Test
(a) Remove safety clips and tags ITEM 20-15-01 and close these
circuit breakers:
PANEL

SERVICE

FIN

MISCELLANEOUS

AIR CONDITIONING

HF1 (HF2)

MISCELLANEOUS

AIR CONDITIONING

HF3 (HF4)

(b) Do the adjustment/test of the temperature control system


(Ref. 21-61-00, P. Block 501) and examine the installation
for leaks.
(7) Close-Up

Effectivity: See TOC

21-51-23

Pag. 403
May 15/12

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


(a) Install the access panel 911AT (Ref. 06-41-57, P. Block 1).
(b) Remove access platform.
(c) Remove warning notice.
(d) Make sure that working area is clean and clear of tools and
miscellaneous equipment.

Effectivity: See TOC

21-51-23

Pag. 404
May 15/12

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


Mixing Box Assembly

CM1.21.51.23.4AO.00.00-00

Fig. 401 Mixing Box Assembly

Effectivity: See TOC

21-51-23

Pag. 405
May 15/12

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

CM1.21.51.23.4AA.00.00-00

Mixing Box Assembly


Fig. 401A Mixing Box Assembly

Effectivity: See TOC

21-51-23

Pag. 406
May 15/12

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


CONDENSER AND MIXER
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
WARNING:

BEFORE POWER IS SUPPLIED TO THE AIRCRAFT, MAKE SURE THAT ELECTRICAL


CIRCUITS UPON WHICH WORK IS IN PROGRESS ARE ISOLATED.

1. Removal/Installation of the Condenser and Mixer


A.

Reason for the Job


- To remove and install the condenser and mixer when it is
unserviceable or to get access to other components.
- To do the 21.50.00.02 MRB task, "Remove Condenser and Mixer for
cleaning".

B.

Equipment and Materials


ITEM

DESIGNATION

(1)

ITEM 20-15-01

Circuit Breaker Safety Clips and Tags

(2)

Standard Tool

Warning Notice

(3)

Standard Tool

Protective Caps

(4)

Standard Tool

Ducting Blanks

(5)

Standard Tool

Access Platform, 2 m (6,5 ft)

** On A/C: S/N 001062


(6)

CAN67374L223

Packing

** On A/C: S/N 063999


(6)

CAN67374L222

Packing

** On A/C: All
(7)

CAN67374L230

Packing

(8)

CAN67374L234

Packing

(9)

CAN67374L242

Packing

(10) CAN67374L012

Packing

Effectivity: See TOC

21-51-24

Pag. 401
May 15/12

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


Referenced Procedures:
- 06-41-57, P.
- 21-00-00, P.
- 21-31-00, P.
- 21-61-00, P.
- 21-51-20, P.
- CMM 21-71-03
C.

Block
Block
Block
Block
Block

1
201
501
501
401

- Access Provision - Wings


- Air Conditioning
- Pressurization Control System
- Temperature Control System
- Refrigeration Pack
- CMM of Hamilton Sundstrand

Procedure
(1) Job Set-Up
(a) Put warning notice in the flight compartment telling
personnel not to use the air conditioning system.
(b) Put access platform in position.
(c) Remove the bolts that attach the ram air outlet and grill to
the access panel.
(d) Remove the access panel to get access to the condenser and
mixer (Ref. 06-41-57, P. Block 1).
(e) Remove the refrigeration Pack (Ref. 21-51-20, P. Block 401).
(2) Removal (Fig. 401)
(a) Disconnect the drain pipenut (18) and install blanks to the
pipenut (18) and elbow connector (17).
(b) Remove the clamp (21).
(c) Push the sleeve (22) along the ducting (19) sufficiently to
show the packings (20) and (23).
(d) Remove and discard the packings (20) and (23)
(Ref.21-00-00, P. Block 201).
(e) Remove the clamp (7).
(f) Push the sleeve (6) along the ducting (9) sufficiently to
show the packings (5) and (8).
(g) Remove and discard the packings (5) and (8)
(Ref.21-00-00, P. Block 201).
(h) Carefully remove the condenser and mixer assembly (3)
sufficiently to clear the cooling air outlet port (10) from
the mixing box (12).

Effectivity: See TOC

21-51-24

Pag. 402
May 15/12

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


Condenser and Mixer

CM1.21.51.24.4AO.00.00-00

Fig. 401 Condenser and Mixer

Effectivity: See TOC

21-51-24

Pag. 403
May 15/12

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


(j) Remove and discard the packing (11)
(Ref.21-00-00, P. Block 201).
(k) Carefully lift the condenser and mixer assembly (3) complete
with the elbow connector (17) clear of aircraft.
CAUTION:

MAKE SURE THAT THE RECIRCULATION AIR INLET (25)


IS NOT DAMAGED WHEN IT IS REMOVED FROM INSIDE
SLEEVE (14).

(l) Remove and discard the packings (2) and (13)


(Ref.21-00-00, P. Block 201).
(m) Loosen the locknut (16) and remove the elbow connector (17).
Remove and discard the packing (15)
(Ref.21-00-00, P. Block 201).
(n) Install blanks on all exposed orifices.
NOTE:

If you removed the component to do the 21.50.00.02


MRB task, send it to the related shop for cleaning
(Refer to CMM 21-71-03 of Hamilton Sundstrand).

(3) Preparation of Replacement Component (Fig. 401)


(a) Remove all blanks.
(b) Install the elbow connector (17) using a new packing
CAN67374L012 (15) (Ref.21-00-00, P. Block 201). Do not
tighten the locknut (16) at this stage.
(c) Install a new packing CAN67374L242 (11) on the cooling air
outlet port (10) (Ref.21-00-00, P. Block 201).
(d) Install a new packing CAN67374L234 (13) on the recirculation
air inlet port (25) (Ref.21-00-00, P. Block 201).
(4) Preparation for Installation (Fig. 401)
(a) Remove blanks from the ducting and piping.
(b) Install a new packing CAN67374L230 (2) on the turbine air
outlet (1) (Ref.21-00-00, P. Block 201).
(5) Installation (Fig. 401)
(a) Lower the assembly into position. Putting the recirculation
inlet port (25) into the sleeve (14), be careful to prevent
damage to the packing (13). Simultaneously, insert the
turbine
Effectivity: See TOC

21-51-24

Pag. 404
May 15/12

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


outlet (1) into the condenser and mixer (3), and the cooling
air outlet port (10) into the mixing box (12).
(b) Install the drain pipe nut (18) to the elbow connector (17)
and torque tighten nut (18). Torque tighten the elbow
connector locknut (16).
(c) Remove the condenser and mixer assembly (3) sufficiently to
put the cooling air outlet port (10) into the mixing box
(12).
(d) Make sure that sleeve (22) is positioned on the ducting (19)
and install a new packing CAN67374L230 (20) on the ducting
(19) (Ref.21-00-00, P. Block 201).
(e) Install a new packing CAN67374L230 (23) on the port (24)
(Ref.21-00-00, P. Block 201).
(f) Push the sleeve (22) over the packing (20) and (23). Put the
sleeve (22) equally over the ducting (19) and port (24).
(g) Fasten the assembly with the clamp (21).
** On A/C: S/N 001062
(h) Make sure that the sleeve (6) is positioned on the ducting
(9) and install a new packing CAN67374L223 (8) on the
ducting (9) (Ref.21-00-00, P. Block 201).
** On A/C: S/N 063999
(h) Make sure that the sleeve (6) is positioned on the ducting
(9) and install a new packing CAN67374L222 (8) on the
ducting (9) (Ref.21-00-00, P. Block 201).
** On A/C: S/N 001062
(j) Install a new packing CAN67374L223 (5) on the port (4)
(Ref.21-00-00, P. Block 201). Push the sleeve (6) over the
packings (5) and (8). Put the sleeve (6) equally over the
ducting (9) and port (4). Fasten the assembly with the clamp
(7).
** On A/C: S/N 063999
(j) Install a new packing CAN67374L222 (5) on the port (4)
(Ref.21-00-00, P. Block 201). Push the sleeve (6) over the
packings (5) and (8). Put the sleeve (6) equally over the
ducting (9) and port (4). Fasten the assembly with the clamp
(7).
** On A/C: All

Effectivity: See TOC

21-51-24

Pag. 405
May 15/12

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


(6) Test
(a) Do the air conditioning pressurization system
adjustment/test (Ref. 21-31-00, P. Block 501) and inspect
ducting installation for leaks.
(b) Do the temperature control system adjustment/test
(Ref. 21-61-00, P. Block 501) and inspect ducting
installation for leaks.
(7) Close-Up
(a) Install access panels (Ref. 06-41-57, P. Block 1).
(b) Install bolts fastening ram fan outlet and grill to access
panel.
(c) Remove access platform.
(d) Remove warning notice.
(e) Make sure that working area is clean and clear of tools and
miscellaneous equipment.

Effectivity: See TOC

21-51-24

Pag. 406
May 15/12

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


WATER COLLECTOR
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
WARNING:

BEFORE POWER IS SUPPLIED TO THE AIRCRAFT, MAKE SURE THAT CIRCUITS


UPON WHICH WORK IS IN PROGRESS ARE ISOLATED.

1. Removal/Installation of the Water Collector


A.

Reason for the Job


To remove and install the water collector when is unserviceable or to
get access to other components.

B.

Equipment and Materials


ITEM

DESIGNATION

(1)

ITEM 20-15-01

Circuit Breaker Safety Clips and Tags

(2)

Standard Tool

Warning Notice

(3)

Standard Tool

Ducting Blanks

(4)

Standard Tool

Access Platform, 2 m (6,5 ft)

(5)

CAN67374L012

Packing

(6)

CAN67374L230

Packing

** On A/C: S/N 001062


(7)

CAN67374L223

Packing

** On A/C: S/N 063999


(7)

CAN67374L222

Packing

** On A/C: All

Referenced Procedures:
- 06-41-57,
- 20-21-00,
- 21-00-00,
- 21-61-00,

P.
P.
P.
P.

Effectivity: See TOC

Block
Block
Block
Block

1
1
201
501

- Access Provisions - Wings


- Standard Torques
- Air Conditioning
- Temperature Control System

21-51-25

Pag. 401
May 15/12

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


C.

Procedure
(1) Job Set-Up
(a) Put warning notice in the flight compartment to tell
personnel not to use the air conditioning system.
(b) Open, safety and tag with ITEM 20-15-01 these circuit
breakers:
PANEL

SERVICE

FIN

MISCELLANEOUS

AIR CONDITIONING

HF1 (HF2)

MISCELLANEOUS

AIR CONDITIONING

HF3 (HF4)

(c) Put access platform in position.


(d) Remove the access panel 911AT to get access to the water
collector (Ref. 06-41-57, P. Block 1).
(2) Removal (Fig. 401)
(a) Disconnect the water drain pipe nut (21) and install
protective cap to the nut (21).
(b) Remove the clamp (3). Push the sleeve (4) along the ducting
(1) sufficiently to show the packings (2) and (5).
(c) Remove and discard the packings (2) and (5)
(Ref.21-00-00, P. Block 201).
(d) Remove the clamp (13). Push the sleeve (14) along the
ducting (11) sufficiently to show the packings (12) and
(15).
(e) Remove and discard the packings (12) and (15)
(Ref.21-00-00, P. Block 201).
(f) Remove the retaining nuts (7), washers (9) and screws (10)
and carefully remove the water collector assembly (23) from
its location.
(g) Install blanks on the duct ends (1) and (11) and on the
water collector ports (6) and (17).

Effectivity: See TOC

21-51-25

Pag. 402
May 15/12

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


Water Collector

CM1.21.51.25.4AO.00.00-00

Fig. 401 Water Collector

Effectivity: See TOC

21-51-25

Pag. 403
May 15/12

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


(h) Loosen the locknut (19) and remove the elbow connector (20).
Remove and discard the packing (18)
(Ref.21-00-00, P. Block 201).
(j) Install blank on the water drain outlet (22).
(3) Preparation of Replacement Component (Fig. 401)
(a) Remove blank from the water drain outlet (22).
(b) Install the elbow connector (20) complete with the locknut
(19) and a new packing CAN67374L012 (18) into the drain
outlet (22) (Ref.21-00-00, P. Block 201). Do not tighten
the locknut (19) at this stage.
(c) Remove blanks from the ports (6) and (17).
** On A/C: S/N 001062
(d) Install new packings CAN67374L223 (5) and CAN67374L230 (15)
to the ports (6) and (17) (Ref.21-00-00, P. Block 201).
** On A/C: S/N 063999
(d) Install new packings CAN67374L222 (5) and CAN67374L230 (15)
to the ports (6) and (17) (Ref.21-00-00, P. Block 201).
** On A/C: All
(4) Preparation for Installation
N/A
(5) Installation (Fig. 401)
** On A/C: S/N 001062
(a) Remove blank from the duct end (1) and install a new packing
CAN67374L223 (2) (Ref.21-00-00, P. Block 201). Make sure
that the sleeve (4) is correctly positioned on the duct (1).
** On A/C: S/N 063999
(a) Remove blank from the duct end (1) and install a new packing
CAN67374L222 (2) (Ref.21-00-00, P. Block 201). Make sure
that the sleeve (4) is correctly positioned on the duct (1).

Effectivity: See TOC

21-51-25

Pag. 404
May 15/12

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


** On A/C: All
(b) Remove blank from the duct end (11) and install a new
packing CAN67374L230 (12) (Ref.21-00-00, P. Block 201).
Make sure that the sleeve (14) is correctly positioned on
the duct (11).
(c) Install the water collector (23) so that the holes in the
mountings (8) are in line with the holes in the attachment
bracket (16). Attach with the screws (10), washers (9) and
nuts (7). Torque the screws (10) to the standard value
(Ref.20-21-00, P. Block 1).
(d) Put the sleeve (14) over the duct ends (11) and (17). Be
careful to prevent damage to the packings (12) and (15). Put
the sleeve (14) equally over the duct ends and install the
clamp (13).
(e) Put the sleeve (4) over the duct ends (1) and (6). Be
careful to prevent damage to the packings (2) and (5). Put
the sleeve (4) equally over the duct ends and install the
clamp (3).
(f) Remove blank and connect the pipe nut (21) to the elbow
connector (20). Torque the pipe nut (21) to the standard
value (Ref.20-21-00, P. Block 1).
(g) Torque the locknut (19) to the standard value
(Ref.20-21-00, P. Block 1) to secure the elbow connector
(20) to the drain outlet (22).
(6) Test
(a) Remove the safety clip and tag ITEM 20-15-01 and close these
circuit breakers:
PANEL

SERVICE

FIN

MISCELLANEOUS

AIR CONDITIONING

HF1 (HF2)

MISCELLANEOUS

AIR CONDITIONING

HF3 (HF4)

(b) Do the adjustment/test of the temperature control system


(Ref. 21-61-00, P. Block 501) and examine the installation
for leaks.
(7) Close-Up
(a) Install access panel 911AT (Ref. 06-41-57, P. Block 1).
(b) Remove access platform.
Effectivity: See TOC

21-51-25

Pag. 405
May 15/12

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


(c) Remove warning notice.
(d) Make sure that working area is clean and clear of tools and
miscellaneous equipment.

Effectivity: See TOC

21-51-25

Pag. 406
May 15/12

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


WATER FILTER
SERVICING
WARNING:

SOLVENT USED IS TOXIC AND FLAMMABLE. PUT WARNING NOTICES IN


VICINITY OF WORK AREA TELLING PERSONNEL NOT TO SMOKE OR USE NAKED
FLAMES. USE REMOTE BREATHING APPARATUS OR MAKE SURE THAT WORK AREA
IS ADEQUATELY VENTILATED. PERSONNEL FEELING ILL MUST SEEK IMMEDIATE
MEDICAL ATTENTION.

1. Reason for the Job


A.

To facilitate periodic cleaning or replace filter screen.

2. Equipment and Materials


ITEM

DESIGNATION

A.

Access Platform, 2 m (6,5 ft)

B.

ITEM 20-15-01

Circuit Breaker Safety Clips and Tags

C.

Pipe Blanks

D.

Low Pressure Air Supply

E.

Z-23.139

Cleaning Solvent

F.

NAS1593-118

Preformed Packing

G.

Warning Notices

Referenced Procedures:
- 21-51-26, P. Block 401

- Water Filter

3. Procedure
A.

Job Set-Up
(1) Remove filter assembly from aircraft
(Ref. 21-51-26, P. Block 401).

Effectivity: See TOC

21-51-26

Pag. 301
Mar. 31/00

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


B.

Cleaning (Fig. 301)


(1) Clean filter element mesh carefully, using solvent Z-23.139 .
(2) Clean other metal parts as required with solvent Z-23.139 . Air
dry parts.

C.

Close-Up
(1) Replace preformed packing of the water filter.
(2) Install filter assembly to aircraft
(Ref. 21-51-26, P. Block 401).

Effectivity: See TOC

21-51-26

Pag. 302
Mar. 31/00

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


Water Filter

CM1.21.51.26.3AO.00.00-02

Fig. 301 Water Filter

Effectivity: See TOC

21-51-26

Pag. 303
Mar. 31/00

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

Effectivity: See TOC

21-51-26

Pag. 304
Mar. 31/00

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


WATER FILTER
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
WARNING:

BEFORE POWER IS SUPPLIED TO THE AIRCRAFT, MAKE SURE THAT CIRCUITS


UPON WHICH WORK IS IN PROGRESS ARE ISOLATED.

1. Equipment and Materials


ITEM

DESIGNATION

A.

ITEM 20-15-01

Circuit Breaker Safety Clips and Tags

B.

Warning Notice

C.

Blanks

D.

S2L-113

Preformed Packing

E.

Access Platform, 2 m (6,5 ft)

F.

MS20995

Stainless Steel Lockwire, 0,8 m (0,032 in)

Referenced Procedures:
- 06-41-57, P. Block 1
- 21-51-27, P. Block 401
- 21-61-00, P. Block 501

- Access Provisions - Wings


- Spray Nozzle
- Temperature Control System

2. Procedure
A.

Job Set-Up
(1) Put warning notice in flight compartment telling personnel not to
use the air conditioning system.
(2) Open, safety and tag the following circuit breakers:
PANEL

SERVICE

FIN

MISCELLANEOUS

AIR CONDITIONING

HF1 (HF2)

MISCELLANEOUS

AIR CONDITIONING

HF3 (HF4)

(3) Put access platform in position.


(4) Remove access panel (Ref. 06-41-57, P. Block 1) to get to water
filter.

Effectivity: See TOC

21-51-26

Pag. 401
Mar. 31/00

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


B.

Removal (Fig. 401)


(1) Disconnect water drain pipe nut (8) and install blank on pipe nut
(8).
(2) Remove lockwire.
(3) Remove and keep spray nozzle (1) (Ref. 21-51-27, P. Block 401).
Remove and discard preformed packing (2).
(4) Remove water filter assembly (6) from hole (4) in mounting
bracket (3).
(5) Install blanks on water filter (6) inlet (7) and outlet (5).

C.

Installation (Fig. 401)


(1) Remove blanks on water filter (6) inlet (7) and outlet (5).
(2) Install water filter (6) outlet (5) thru hole (4) of mounting
bracket (3). Install preformed packing over outlet (5).
(3) Install spray nozzle (1) (Ref. 21-51-27, P. Block 401).
(4) Safety water filter and spray nozzle assembly with lockwire.
(5) Remove blank and connect pipe nut (8) to water filter inlet (7).
Torque tighten pipe nut (8).

D.

Test
(1) Remove safety clips and tags and close circuit breakers HF1, HF2,
HF3, HF4.
(2) Do temperature control system functional test
(Ref. 21-61-00, P. Block 501) and inspect water spray nozzle for
correct operation.

Effectivity: See TOC

21-51-26

Pag. 402
Mar. 31/00

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


Water Filter

CM1.21.51.26.4AO.00.00-00

Fig. 401 Water Filter

Effectivity: See TOC

21-51-26

Pag. 403
Mar. 31/00

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


E.

Close-Up
(1) Make sure that work area is clean and clear of tools and
miscellaneous equipment.
(2) Install access panel (Ref. 06-41-57, P. Block 1).
(3) Remove access platform.
(4) Remove warning notice.

Effectivity: See TOC

21-51-26

Pag. 404
Mar. 31/00

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


SPRAY NOZZLE
SERVICING
WARNING:

BE CAREFUL WHEN YOU USE SOLVENTS/CLEANING AGENTS, SEALANTS AND


OTHER MATERIALS.
OBEY THE MATERIAL MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS AND THE LOCAL
REGULATIONS.
MAKE SURE THAT THERE IS A GOOD FLOW OF AIR THROUGH THE WORK AREA.
DO NOT BREATHE THE FUMES. DO NOT SMOKE.
DO NOT USE THESE MATERIALS NEAR A FLAME, SPARKS OR SOURCES OF HEAT.
USE PROTECTIVE CLOTHING, GOGGLES AND GLOVES.
IF YOU GET ONE OF THESE MATERIALS:
- ON YOUR SKIN OR IN YOUR EYES, FLUSH IT AWAY WITH A FLOW OF CLEAN
WATER.
- IN YOUR MOUTH, GET IMMEDIATE MEDICAL AID.
IN GENERAL, THESE MATERIALS ARE POISONOUS, FLAMMABLE AND SKIN
IRRITANTS.

CAUTION:

DO NOT ENLARGE ORIFICE OR BEND IMPINGEMENT PIN DURING CLEANING.

1. Restoration of the Spray Nozzle


A.

Reason for the Job


- To facilitate periodic cleaning.
- To do the 21.50.00.03 MRB task (MRB Document PV02M) , "Remove Spray
Nozzle for cleaning".

B.

Equipment and Materials


ITEM

DESIGNATION

(1)

Standard Tool

Low Pressure Air Supply

(2)

Standard Tool

Warning Notices

(3)

Z-23.139

Solvent

Referenced Procedures:
- 21-51-27, P. Block 401

Effectivity: See TOC

- Spray Nozzle

21-51-27

Pag. 301
Nov. 15/14

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


C.

Procedure
(1) Job Set-Up
(a) Put the warning notices.
(b) Remove spray nozzle from aircraft
(Ref.21-51-27, P. Block 401).
(2) Cleaning
(a)
WARNING:

BE CAREFUL WHEN YOU USE THE MATERIAL Z-23.139.


OBEY THE MATERIAL MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS.

Clean as required with solvent, Z-23.139.


(b) Make sure orifice is not plugged with the low pressure air
supply.
(3) Close-Up
(a) Install spray nozzle to aircraft
(Ref.21-51-27, P. Block 401).
(b) Remove the warning notices.
(c) Remove all tools and equipment from the work area. Make sure
that the work area is clean.

Effectivity: See TOC

21-51-27

Pag. 302
Nov. 15/14

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


SPRAY NOZZLE
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
WARNING:

BEFORE POWER IS SUPPLIED TO THE AIRCRAFT, MAKE SURE THAT CIRCUITS


UPON WHICH WORK IS IN PROGRESS ARE ISOLATED.

1. Removal /Installation of the Spray Nozzle


A.

Reason for the Job


To remove and install the spray nozzle when it is unserviceable or to
get access to other components.

B.

Equipment and Materials


ITEM

DESIGNATION

(1)

ITEM 20-15-01

Circuit Breaker Safety Clips and Tags

(2)

Standard Tool

Warning Notices

(3)

Standard Tool

Pipes Blanking Plugs and Caps

(4)

Standard Tool

Access Platform, 2 m (6,5 ft)

(5)

CAN67374L113

Preformed Packing

(6)

LN9424-1F3504SA

Lockwire

Referenced Procedures:
- 06-41-57, P. Block 1
- 21-00-00, P. Block 201
- 21-61-00, P. Block 501
C.

- Access Provisions - Wings


- Air Conditioning
- Temperature Control System

Procedure
(1) Job Set-Up
(a) Put warning notices in flight compartment to tell personnel
not to use the air conditioning system.

Effectivity: See TOC

21-51-27

CONFIG. 1
Pag. 401
May 15/12

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


(b) Open, safety and tag with ITEM 20-15-01 these circuit
breakers:
PANEL

SERVICE

FIN

MISCELLANEOUS

AIR CONDITIONING

HF1 (HF2)

MISCELLANEOUS

AIR CONDITIONING

HF3 (HF4)

(c) Put the access platform in position.


(d) Remove the relevant access panel to get access to the spray
nozzle (Ref. 06-41-57, P. Block 1).
(2) Removal (Fig. 401)
(a) Remove the lockwire.
(b) Remove the spray nozzle (1).
(c) Remove and discard the preformed packing (2)
(Ref.21-00-00, P. Block 201).
(d) Install blank on the water filter outlet port (4).
(3) Preparation of the Replacement Component
N/A
(4) Preparation for Intallation
N/A
(5) Installation (Fig. 401)
(a) Remove blank and install the new preformed packing
CAN67374L113 (2) on the water filter outlet port (4)
(Ref.21-00-00, P. Block 201).
(b) Install the spray nozzle (1) on the water filter outlet port
(4), torque tighten the spray nozzle against the mounting
bracket (3).
(c) Safety the spray nozzle and the water filter assembly with
lockwire.

Effectivity: See TOC

21-51-27

CONFIG. 1
Pag. 402
May 15/12

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


(6) Test
(a) Remove the safety clip and tag ITEM 20-15-01 and close these
circuit breakers:
PANEL

SERVICE

FIN

MISCELLANEOUS

AIR CONDITIONING

HF1 (HF2)

MISCELLANEOUS

AIR CONDITIONING

HF3 (HF4)

(b) Do the Temperature Control System functional test


(Ref. 21-61-00, P. Block 501) and inspect the spray nozzle
for correct operation.
(7) Close-Up
(a) Install the access panel previously removed
(Ref. 06-41-57, P. Block 1).
(b) Remove the access platform.
(c) Remove the warning notices.
(d) Make sure that work area is clean and clear of tools and
miscellaneous equipment.

Effectivity: See TOC

21-51-27

CONFIG. 1
Pag. 403
May 15/12

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


Spray Nozzle

CM1.21.51.27.4AO.00.01-00

Fig. 401 Spray Nozzle

Effectivity: See TOC

21-51-27

CONFIG. 1
Pag. 404
May 15/12

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


TEMPERATURE CONTROL
DESCRIPTION/OPERATION

1. General
Temperature control includes those units and components used to control,
sense and indicate the temperature of the air within the pressurized area
of the aircraft.

Effectivity: See TOC

21-60-00

Pag. 1
Sep. 01/94

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

Effectivity: See TOC

21-60-00

Pag. 2
Sep. 01/94

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


TEMPERATURE CONTROL SYSTEM
DESCRIPTION/OPERATION

1. General
The aircraft temperature control system includes dual systems which give
the level of cooling or heating within the pressurized area.
Each system (LH or RH) includes components which operate with either the
LH or RH cooling system. Each system (LH or RH) includes a temperature
selector, an area (flight compartment or passenger compartment)
temperature sensor and duct sensor, and a dual temperature control valve.
Temperature sensors in the flight compartment and passenger compartment
send signals to a temperature indicator to show respective compartment
temperature as necessary.
2. Component Location (Fig. 1)
ITEM

FIN

1.

HF55
(HF56)

DESIGNATION

Duct Supply
Temperature Sensor

ZONE

ACCESS
PANEL

REFERENCE

243
(244)

21-61-13

** On A/C: All, except POST.SB.235-21-14M, IR01 POST.SB.235-21-19M


2.

HF64

Passenger
Compartment
Temperature Sensor

242

21-61-20

252

21-61-20

Passenger
Compartment
Temperature Sensor

232

21-61-20

Flight Compartment
Temperature Sensor

211

21-61-19

243
(244)

21-61-16

** On A/C: POST.SB.235-21-14M
2.

HF64

Passenger
Compartment
Temperature Sensor

** On A/C: IR01 POST.SB.235-21-19M


2.

HF64

** On A/C: All
3.

HF77

4.

HF57
(HF58)

Effectivity: See TOC

Cabin Supply
Overtemperature
Switch

21-61-00

CONFIG. 1
Pag. 1
Jul. 15/10

ITEM

FIN

5.

HF39
(HF40)

6.

DM4

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


DESIGNATION
ZONE

ACCESS
PANEL

REFERENCE

911
(912)

911AT

21-61-11

212

21-61-18

242

21-61-18

Passenger
Compartment
Free Air Sensor

252

21-61-18

AIR CONDITIONING
Control Unit

210

21-11-18

Dual Temperature
Control Valve
Flight Compartment
Free Air Sensor

** On A/C: All, except POST.SB.235-21-14M


7.

DM5

Passenger
Compartment
Free Air Sensor

** On A/C: POST.SB.235-21-14M
7.

DM5

** On A/C: All
8.

ZD124
HF31
(HF32)

O/TEMP/MAN Lighted
Switch

HF33
(HF34)

HOT/OFF/COLD Switch

HF37
(HF38)

Temperature Selector

DM2

Temperature
Indicator

21-61-17

DM3

CKPT/CAB Switch

9.

HF7

Temperature
Controller

211

21-61-12

10.

HF8

Temperature
Controller

212

21-61-12

** On A/C: IB01, EA01F, SERIES 100, FR02 (09-13), FR03, CL02


11.

HF102

Microfan

211

21-61-14

PC14

MISCELLANEOUS C/B
Panel

213

24-58-11

HF1

AIR CONDITIONING
Circuit Breaker

HF3

AIR CONDITIONING
Circuit Breaker

** On A/C: All
12.

Effectivity: See TOC

21-61-00

CONFIG. 1
Pag. 2
Jul. 15/10

ITEM

13.
14.

FIN

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


DESIGNATION
ZONE

HF2

AIR CONDITIONING
Circuit Breaker

HF4

AIR CONDITIONING
Circuit Breaker

ZD101

Relay Box

HF15

Relay

ZD102

Relay Box

HF16

Relay

ACCESS
PANEL

REFERENCE

221

221CL

24-58-14

222

222CR

24-58-14

252

21-61-15

** On A/C: POST.SB.235-21-14M
15.

HF200

Microfan

** On A/C: All

3. Description
A.

Control
Engine bleed air flow from the compression system thru the cooling
system is controlled by an electrically operated dual temperature
control valve, HF39 (HF40). The dual temperature control valve is
installed on brackets attached to the fuselage skin and longeron
between STA 9200 and STA 9708. Operation of the dual temperature
control valve can be either automatic or manual.
In automatic operation, the temperature controller, HF7 (HF8),
installed in the flight compartment LH (RH) console between STA 3584
and STA 3826, supplies electrical signals to the respective dual
temperature control valve, HF39 (HF40).

Effectivity: See TOC

21-61-00

CONFIG. 1
Pag. 3
Jul. 15/10

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


Temperature Control System - Component Location

CM1.21.61.00.0AO.01.01-02

Fig. 1 Temperature Control System - Component Location (Sheet 1 of 3)

Effectivity: See TOC

21-61-00

CONFIG. 1
Pag. 4
Jul. 15/10

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

CM1.21.61.00.0AO.02.01-04

Fig. 1 Temperature Control System - Component Location (Sheet 2 of 3)

Effectivity: See TOC

21-61-00

CONFIG. 1
Pag. 5
Jul. 15/10

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

CM1.21.61.00.0AO.03.01-00

Fig. 1 Temperature Control System - Component Location (Sheet 3 of 3)

Effectivity: See TOC

21-61-00

CONFIG. 1
Pag. 6
Jul. 15/10

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


Temperature sensors, HF55 (HF56), installed in the supply ducting at
the top of the fuselage between STA 9200 and STA 9708, flight
compartment sensor, HF77, (passenger compartment sensor HF64) and
temperature selector, HF37 (HF38), on the AIR CONDITIONING control
unit ZD124, supply electrical signals to the temperature controller,
HF7 (HF8).
** On A/C: IB01, EA01F, SERIES 100, FR02 (09-13), FR03, CL02
The microfan, HF102, makes sure the air flow to the flight
compartment sensor, HF77.
** On A/C: POST.SB.235-21-14M
The microfan, HF200, makes sure the air flow to the flight
compartment sensor, HF64.
** On A/C: All
The AIR CONDITIONING control unit ZD124, selects controls and
indicates passenger and flight compartment temperatures in either
automatic or manual control modes.
In the manual mode of operation, the temperature controller, HF7
(HF8) is bypassed. The flight and passenger compartment temperatures
are controlled by a HOT/OFF/COLD switch HF33 (HF34), installed on the
AIR CONDITIONING control unit.
The HOT/OFF/COLD switch, HF33 (HF34), can be set to the HOT or COLD
position as necessary which in turn operates the respective dual
temperature control valve.
Overtemperature switch, HF57 (HF58), supplies a signal to the AIR
CONDITIONING control unit causing the overtemperature annunciator to
come on.
B.

Indication
Sensor, DM4, installed in the flight compartment and sensor, DM5,
installed in the passenger compartment, sense surrounding air
temperature and send electrical signals to the temperature indicator
DM2 installed on the AIR CONDITIONING control unit ZD124. The
temperature indicator can be selected to show either the flight
compartment or passenger compartment temperature by a switch
installed on the AIR CONDITIONING control unit ZD124.

Effectivity: See TOC

21-61-00

CONFIG. 1
Pag. 7
Jul. 15/10

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

4. Component Description
A.

Temperature Sensor, HF55 (HF56), HF64, HF77 (Fig. 2)


The duct supply temperature sensor, HF55 (HF56), the passenger
compartment temperature sensor, HF64, and the flight compartment
temperature sensor, HF77, are similar.
Each temperature sensor includes an electrical receptacle and a
shielded probe. The probe has a white-glass bead thermistor at its
tip. The bead is connected internally to the receptacle pins by fine
wire.
Air temperature sensed by the probe alters the electrical resistance
of the sensor circuit. Resistance lowers as temperature increases,
and the varying signal is supplied to the temperature controller for
use in the automatic mode.

B.

Cabin Supply Overtemperature Switch, HF57 (HF58) (Fig. 3)


The cabin supply overtemperature switch is a single-pole, normally
open, thermal switch with a bimetallic element. When duct air
temperature increases to more than 185-195F in manual or automatic
mode, the switch closes and completes an electrical circuit to supply
a signal to a warning annunciator on the AIR CONDITIONING control
unit. The switch will open at a decreasing temperature of 180F.

Effectivity: See TOC

21-61-00

CONFIG. 1
Pag. 8
Jul. 15/10

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


Temperature Sensor

CM1.21.61.00.0BO.00.01-00

Fig. 2 Temperature Sensor


Overtemperature Switch

CM1.21.61.00.0CO.00.01-00

Fig. 3 Overtemperature Switch

Effectivity: See TOC

21-61-00

CONFIG. 1
Pag. 9
Jul. 15/10

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


C.

Dual Temperature Control Valve, HF39 (HF40) (Fig. 4)


(1) Description
The dual temperature control valve includes an electrical
actuator which moves two butterfly valves in opposing directions
thru a mechanical linkage. The actuator includes a dc electric
motor moving an output shaft thru reduction gearing. Limit
switches provide a facility for open circuiting the power supply
at the extremities of the actuator travel. Electrical filtering
circuitry is included.
The valve assembly controls the temperature of the conditioned
air supplied to the flight or passenger compartment by opening
and closing the butterfly valves to control the flow of hot and
cold air thru the refrigeration pack as necessary.
The actuator operates in response to electrical signals from the
temperature controller or the manually operated switches on the
AIR CONDITIONING control unit.
The mechanical linkage, interconnecting actuator and both
butterfly valves, lets the valves be opened and closed in
response to the rotational movement of the actuator to give a
complete temperature range from maximum heating to maximum
cooling.
(2) Operation
For maximum cooling, pack valve is open, and bypass valve is
closed, causing the total bleed air flow from the compression
system to pass thru the heat exchanger and air cycle machine
(ACM) sections of the refrigeration pack.
When less cooling is necessary, the actuator turns clockwise to
move the bypass valve towards the OPEN position and causes a
proportion of the compression system airflow to bypass the heat
exchangers and ACM.
As the demand for heat increases, the actuator continues to turn
clockwise, simultaneously moving the bypass valve towards OPEN
and the pack valve towards CLOSED until, at maximum heat, the
bypass valve is fully OPEN and the pack valve fully CLOSED.

Effectivity: See TOC

21-61-00

CONFIG. 1
Pag. 10
Jul. 15/10

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


Dual Temperature Control Valve

CM1.21.61.00.0DO.00.01-00

Fig. 4 Dual Temperature Control Valve

Effectivity: See TOC

21-61-00

CONFIG. 1
Pag. 11
Jul. 15/10

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


As the demand for heat is decreased, the actuator begins to turn
counterclockwise, moving the bypass valve towards the CLOSED
position to decrease the supply of hot bleed air from the
compression system to the ACM turbine outlet. Simultaneously, the
pack valve moves back towards the OPEN position causing more hot
bleed air to pass thru the heat exchanger.
D.

Free Air Temperature Sensor, DM4 (DM5) (Fig. 5)


The flight compartment free air temperature sensor, DM4, and the
passenger compartment free air temperature sensor, DM5, are similar.
Each free air temperature sensor includes an electrical receptacle on
a base which shields the temperature sensing element. An electrical
signal proportional to temperature is supplied to the temperature
indicator. Sensitivity of the sensing element is 0.5C.

E.

AIR CONDITIONING Control Unit, ZD124


The AIR CONDITIONING control unit includes switches and indicators
that control the LH and RH air conditioning systems. The upper half
controls ON/OFF, cross feed and air recirculation.
The lower half controls the temperature of the air used in the
passenger and flight compartments, either in the automatic or manual
mode of operation.
Temperature selector, HF37 (HF38), is a rotary switch which selects
desired temperature from full cool to full heat.
The overtemperature manual/annunciator/switch O/TEMP caption comes on
automatically in the event of an overtemperature condition. When the
O/TEMP/MAN lighted switch cover is pushed, it causes the system to
bypass the temperature controller, HF7 (HF8), and the MAN caption to
come on.
In this configuration, temperature is controlled manually by
operating HOT/OFF/COLD switch, HF33 (HF34), to HOT or COLD as
necessary, when released it is spring loaded to the OFF position.

Effectivity: See TOC

21-61-00

CONFIG. 1
Pag. 12
Jul. 15/10

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


Free Air Temperature Sensor

CM1.21.61.00.0EO.00.01-00

Fig. 5 Free Air Temperature Sensor

Effectivity: See TOC

21-61-00

CONFIG. 1
Pag. 13
Jul. 15/10

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


The temperature indicator shows passenger or flight compartment
temperature depending on CKPT/CAB switch being in the CKPT or CAB
position.
F.

Temperature Indicator, DM2 (Fig. 6)


The temperature indicator is a facility for showing passenger
compartment or flight compartment temperature, depending upon signals
which are transmitted from temperature sensors and routed thru a
temperature indication selector on the AIR CONDITIONING control unit
adjacent to the indicator.
The black dial face is calibrated from 0 to 40C and marked in
white. The white pointer attached to the output shaft of the coil
mechanism shows the prevailing temperature in the passenger
compartment or flight compartment.
With electrical power off, the indicator will show off scale below
0C. Speed of pointer response when selector switch is operated is
two seconds.

G.

Temperature Controller, HF7 (HF8) (Fig. 7)


(1) Description
The temperature controller is an electronic unit which includes a
controller module encased in an aluminum housing.
The controller module assembly includes an interconnect board,
two electronic printed circuit boards, front end board, and a
driver and power board.
The interconnect board is connected to a standard electrical
receptacle installed on the aluminum outer case of the
temperature controller.

** On A/C: IB01, EA01F, SERIES 100, FR02 (09-13), FR03, CL02


H.

Microfan HF102
The microfan is for the temperature sensor HF77 and is installed in
the flight compartment, under the LH console. It is connected to a
duct support on which the temperature sensor HF77 is mounted.
The microfan has a 24VDC motor and an extraction rate of 2,5 l/s.

Effectivity: See TOC

21-61-00

CONFIG. 1
Pag. 14
Jul. 15/10

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


Temperature Indicator

CM1.21.61.00.0FO.00.01-00

Fig. 6 Temperature Indicator


Temperature Controller

CM1.21.61.00.0GO.00.01-00

Fig. 7 Temperature Controller

Effectivity: See TOC

21-61-00

CONFIG. 1
Pag. 15
Jul. 15/10

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


** On A/C: POST.SB.235-21-14M
J.

Microfan HF200
The microfan is for the temperature sensor HF64 and is installed in
passenger compartment, on the galley. It is connected to a duct
support on which the temperature sensor HF64 is mounted.
The microfan has a 24VDC motor and an extraction rate of 2,5 l/s. (
0.025 gal/s)

** On A/C: All
5. Operation
The LH temperature control system is described, the RH temperature control
system is similar.
A.

Automatic Mode (Fig. 8 and Fig. 9)


The temperature selector, HF37, supplies an electrical signal to the
temperature controller, HF7, via connector ZD124a (A) pins 19 and 20,
and connector, HF7a pins A and C. This electrical signal is
proportional to the desired temperature within a range of 65F to
85F (18.3C to 29.4C).
The refrigeration pack outlet duct temperature sensor, HF55, supplies
an electrical signal to the temperature controller, HF7, via
connector, HF55a pins A and B, and connector, HF7a pins G and F, to
give temperature limits of 37F to 175F (2.7C to 79.4C).
Temperature sensor, HF77, senses the temperature of the conditioned
air leaving the flight compartment (temperature sensor, HF64, senses
the temperature of the air leaving the passenger compartment). An
electrical signal from the temperature sensor is supplied to the
temperature controller, HF7, via connector, HF77a pins A and B, and
connector, HF7a pins D and E, for normal operation of the dual
temperature control valve, HF39.
The temperature controller, HF7, compares the input signal from the
temperature selector, HF37, with the signals from temperature
sensors, HF55 and HF77. If the temperature selector, HF37, is turned
(i.e. change in temperature requirement), the temperature controller,
HF7, gives an error signal.

Effectivity: See TOC

21-61-00

CONFIG. 1
Pag. 16
Jul. 15/10

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


The error signal is supplied to move the dual temperature control
valve actuator, HF39, via connector, HF7a pins B, M and L, relay box
No. 1 and connector, HF39a pins A, B and D. When the dual temperature
control valve actuator moves, the refrigeration pack supplies hotter
or colder conditioned air to the flight compartment. The flight
compartment temperature changes until the temperature sensor, HF77,
signal is in agreement with the temperature selector, HF37, input
signal.
Cabin overtemperature switch, HF57, operates whenever duct air
temperatures increases to more than 185F-195F (85C-90C) in either
automatic or manual mode. When the switch closes, an electrical
signal causes annunciator switch, HF31, caption O/TEMP to come on via
connector, HF57a pins B and A, and connector, ZD124a (A) pin 10.
B.

Manual Mode (Fig. 8 and Fig. 9)


The manual mode is for use in the event that the automatic mode does
not operate correctly. Manual mode is selected by pushing lighted
switch O/TEMP/MAN, HF31, and MAN caption will come on. The cabin
temperature controller HF7, is bypassed by a relay, HF15, in relays
box ZD101, and temperature sensors, HF55 and HF77 do not operate. The
temperature selector HF37 (HF38) controls the temperature.
When the HOT/OFF/COLD switch, HF33, is held to HOT or COLD, a signal
is supplied to the dual temperature control valve, HF39, actuator via
connector ZD124a (B) pins 1, 2 or 3, relay box No. 1 and connector,
HF39a pins A, B or D to move it in the correct direction. When
HOT/OFF/COLD switch, HF33, is released, it goes to the central
position disconnecting the electrical supply to the dual temperature
control valve, HF39. The dual temperature control valve actuator will
then stay in the position selected until a signal is again supplied
to it.
The dual temperature control valve, HF39, actuator travel time is
approximately 15 seconds from fully closed to the fully open
position.

C.

Temperature Indication (Fig. 10)


The temperature indicator, DM2, shows the temperature of the flight
compartment or passenger compartment depending on the position of
CKPT/CAB switch, DM3.
When CKPT/CAB switch, DM3, is set to the CKPT position, electrical
signals from the flight compartment sensor, DM4, are supplied to the
temperature indicator, DM2, via connector, DM4a pins A and B, AIR
CONDITIONING control unit connector, ZD124b (B2) pins 12, 14 and pins
16, 17 and connector, DM2a pins D and C.

Effectivity: See TOC

21-61-00

CONFIG. 1
Pag. 17
Jul. 15/10

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


Control and Indication Schematic

CM1.21.61.00.0HO.00.01-00

Fig. 8 Control and Indication Schematic

Effectivity: See TOC

21-61-00

CONFIG. 1
Pag. 18
Jul. 15/10

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


Temperature Control - Electrical Schematic

CM1.21.61.00.0JO.00.01-04

Fig. 9 Temperature Control - Electrical Schematic

Effectivity: See TOC

21-61-00

CONFIG. 1
Pag. 19
Jul. 15/10

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


When CKPT/CAB switch DM3, is set to the CAB position, electrical
signals from the passenger compartment temperature sensor, DM5, are
supplied to the temperature indicator, DM2, via connector, DM5a pins
A and B, AIR CONDITIONING control unit connector, ZD124b (B2) pins
13, 15 and pins 16, 17 and connector, DM2a pins D and C.
The temperature indicating system is supplied with electrical power
from GEN BUS No. 2 thru circuit breaker HF4.

Effectivity: See TOC

21-61-00

CONFIG. 1
Pag. 20
Jul. 15/10

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


Temperature Indication - Electrical Schematic

CM1.21.61.00.0KO.00.01-00

Fig. 10 Temperature Indication - Electrical Schematic

Effectivity: See TOC

21-61-00

CONFIG. 1
Pag. 21
Jul. 15/10

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

Effectivity: See TOC

21-61-00

CONFIG. 1
Pag. 22
Jul. 15/10

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


TEMPERATURE CONTROL SYSTEM
TROUBLESHOOTING

1. General
CAUTION:

THE MAXIMUM CURRENT THRU THE TEMPERATURE SENSORS MUST BE


LIMITED TO 35 MICRO-AMPS OR PERMANENT DAMAGE CAN BE DONE TO
TEMPERATURE SENSOR.

A.
CABIN TEMPERATURE IS NOT
CONTROLLED IN AUTOMATIC MODE.

SUPPORT EQUIPMENT REQUIRED:


- MULTIMETER

ON AIR CONDITIONING CONTROL


UNIT ZD124, PUSH 0/TEMP/MAN
LIGHTED SWITCH HF31 (HF32).

REFER TO TROUBLESHOOTING
PROCEDURE PARA C.
YES

IS MANUAL MODE DEFECTIVE?

NO
CONNECT TEMPORARILY A
SERVICEABLE AIR CONDITIONING
CONTROL UNIT ZD124.

YES

REPLACE AIR CONDITIONING


CONTROL UNIT ZD124
(Ref. 21-11-18, P. Block 401).

IS THE DEFECT CORRECTED?

NO
CONNECT TEMPORARILY A
SERVICEABLE TEMPERATURE
CONTROLLER HF7 (HF8).

YES

REPLACE TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER


HF7 (HF8)
(Ref. 21-61-12, P. Block 401).

IS THE DEFECT CORRECTED?


NO
1

Effectivity: See TOC

SEE NEXT PAGE

21-61-00

CONFIG. 1
Pag. 101
Nov. 30/97

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


1

FROM PREVIOUS PAGE

NO
EXAMINE DUCT SENSOR HF55 (HF56)
(Ref. TO FUNCTIONAL TEST 21-6100, P. Block 501).

REPLACE DUCT SENSOR HF55 (HF56)


(Ref. 21-61-13, P. Block 401).
YES

IS FAULTY?
NO
EXAMINE TEMPERATURE SENSOR
HF77(HF64)
(Ref. TO FUNCTIONAL TEST 21-6100, P. Block 501).

YES

REPLACE TEMPERATURE SENSOR HF77


(HF64)
(Ref. 21-61-19, P. Block 401,
21-61-20, P. Block 401).

IS FAULTY?
NO
DO A CONTINUITY TEST BETWEEN
RECEPTACLE ZD101F(B) PINS 8, 9,
10 (ZD102E(B) PINS 3, 4, 5) AND
RECEPTACLE ZD101E PINS 20, 18,
19 (ZD102A(B) PINS 16, 17, 18).

REPLACE RELAYS BOX ZD101


(ZD102)
(Ref. 24-58-14, P. Block 401).
YES

IS THERE OPEN CIRCUIT?

NO
EXAMINE INTERCONNECTING WIRING
AND REPAIR OR REPLACE AS
NECESSARY

Effectivity: See TOC

21-61-00

CONFIG. 1
Pag. 102
Nov. 30/97

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


B.
CABIN TEMPERATURE IS NOT
CONTROLLED IN MANUAL MODE.

SUPPORT EQUIPMENT REQUIRED:


- MULTIMETER

ON AIR CONDITIONING CONTROL


UNIT ZD124, PUSH 0/TEMP/MAN
LIGHTED SWITCH HF31 (HF32).

REFER TO TROUBLESHOOTING
PROCEDURE PARA C.
YES

IS AUTOMATIC CONTROL DEFECTIVE?

NO
CONNECT TEMPORARILY A
SERVICEABLE AIR CONDITIONING
CONTROL UNIT ZD124.

YES

REPLACE AIR CONDITIONING


CONTROL UNIT ZD124
(Ref. 21-11-18, P. Block 401).

IS THE DEFECT CORRECTED?.

NO
SET HOT/OFF/COLD SWITCH HF33
(HF34) TO HOT OR COLD. DO A
VOLTAGE TEST ON CONNECTOR HF39a
(HF40a). BETWEEN PIN A AND
GROUND OR PIN B AND GROUND.

REPLACE DUAL TEMPERATURE


CONTROL VALVE HF39 (HF40)
(Ref. 21-61-11, P. Block 401).
YES

IS THERE 282VDC?
NO
1

Effectivity: See TOC

SEE NEXT PAGE

21-61-00

CONFIG. 1
Pag. 103
Nov. 30/97

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


1

FROM PREVIOUS PAGE

NO
EXAMINE THE INTERCONNECTION
WIRING.

YES

REPAIR OR REPLACE WIRING


(Ref. 24-00-10, P. Block 401).

IS DEFECTIVE?
NO
RELAY HF15 (HF16) IS DEFECTIVE
REPLACE RELAYS BOX ZD101
(ZD102)
(Ref. 24-58-14, P. Block 401).
C.
CABIN TEMPERATURE IS NOT
CONTROLLED IN AUTO OR MANUAL
MODES.

SUPPORT EQUIPMENT REQUIRED:


- MULTIMETER

ON MISCELLANEOUS C.B. PANEL,


LOOK AT AIR CONDITIONING
CIRCUIT BREAKER HF3 (HF4).

CLOSE CIRCUIT BREAKER HF3


(HF4).
YES

IS CIRCUIT BREAKER OPEN?


NO
CONNECT TEMPORARILY A
SERVICEABLE AIR CONDITIONING
CONTROL UNIT ZD124.

YES

REPLACE AIR CONDITIONING


CONTROL UNIT ZD124
(Ref. 21-11-18, P. Block 401).

IS THE DEFECT CORRECTED?

NO
1

Effectivity: See TOC

SEE NEXT PAGE

21-61-00

CONFIG. 1
Pag. 104
Nov. 30/97

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


1

FROM PREVIOUS PAGE

NO
INSPECT THE DUAL TEMPERATURE
CONTROL VALVE HF39 (HF40).
IS VALVE ACTUATOR DEFECTIVE OR
VALVES STUCK IN FULLY COLD OR
FULLY HOT POSITION?

YES

REPLACE DUAL TEMPERATURE


CONTROL VALVE HF39 (HF40)
(Ref. 21-61-11, P. Block 401).

NO
INSPECT WIRING BETWEEN DUAL
TEMP. CONTROL VALVE HF39 (HF40)
AND RELAYS BOX ZD101 (ZD102).

REPAIR OR REPLACE WIRING


(Ref. 24-00-10, P. Block 401).
YES

IS WIRING DEFECTIVE?.

NO
RELAYS BOX ZD101 (ZD102) IS
DEFECTIVE. REPLACE RELAYS BOX
(Ref. 24-58-14, P. Block 401) .
D.
TEMPERATURE INDICATOR DM2
POINTER REMAINS BELLOW 0.

Effectivity: See TOC

SUPPORT EQUIPMENT REQUIRED:


- NONE

SEE NEXT PAGE

21-61-00

CONFIG. 1
Pag. 105
Nov. 30/97

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


1

FROM PREVIOUS PAGE

ON MISCELLANEOUS C.B. PANEL,


LOOK AT AIR CONDITIONING
CIRCUIT BREAKER HF4.

CLOSE CIRCUIT BREAKER HF4.


YES

IS CIRCUIT BREAKER OPEN?


NO
CONNECT TEMPORARILY A
SERVICEABLE INDICATOR DME2

YES

REPLACE TEMPERATURE INDICATOR


DM2
(Ref. 21-61-17, P. Block 401).

IS THE DEFECT CORRECTED.


NO
CONNECT TEMPORARILY A
SERVICEABLE AIR CONDITIONING
CONTROL UNIT ZD124.

YES

REPLACE AIR CONDITIONING


CONTROL UNIT ZD124
(Ref. 21-11-18, P. Block 401).

IS THE DEFECT CORRECTED?

NO
REPLACE SENSOR DM4 OR DM5
(Ref. 21-61-18, P. Block 401).

Effectivity: See TOC

21-61-00

CONFIG. 1
Pag. 106
Nov. 30/97

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


TEMPERATURE CONTROL SYSTEM
ADJUSTMENT/TEST
WARNING:

BEFORE POWER IS SUPPLIED TO THE AIRCRAFT, MAKE SURE THAT ELECTRICAL


CIRCUITS UPON WHICH WORK IS IN PROGRESS ARE ISOLATED.

1. Operational Test during Engine Ground Run


A.

Reason for the Job


To make sure that a replacement unit is serviceable after
installation on the aircraft and that, where applicable the
associated electrical circuits are serviceable. Where the LH and RH
units or systems are identical or similar, the instructions for the
LH single unit or system only will be described.

B.

Equipment and Materials


ITEM

DESIGNATION

(1)

Warning Notices

(2)

ITEM 24-40-01 or
ITEM 24-40-02

Ground Power Unit (GPU)

Referenced Procedures:
- 24-40-00, P. Block 501
- 71-00-00, P. Block 501
C.

- External Power
- Powerplant

Procedure
(1) Job Set-Up
(a) Put warning notices in and around aircraft telling personnel
that air conditioning system test is in progress.
(b) Connect the GPU and switch on aircraft electrical system
(Ref. 24-40-00, P. Block 501).

Effectivity: See TOC

21-61-00

CONFIG. 2
Pag. 501
Mar. 31/00

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


(c) Close the following circuit breakers:
PANEL

SERVICE

FIN

MISCELLANEOUS

AIR CONDITIONING

HF1 (HF2)

MISCELLANEOUS

AIR CONDITIONING

HF3 (HF4)

(2) Test
ACTION
(a) Close and lock all cabin and
cargo doors.

RESULT
DOOR UNLKD annunciator on
central warning panel (CWP)
red warning goes off.

(b) Do engine start procedure


using right engine and
propeller braking facility
(Ref. 71-00-00, P. Block 501)
** On A/C: All, except POST.SB.235-21-14M
(c) On AIR CONDITIONING control
unit, ZD124, set R ENGINE
bleed air ON/OFF switch,
HF26, to ON.

R ENGINE bleed air magnetic


indicator, HF20, goes
"in-line".

** On A/C: POST.SB.235-21-14M
(c) On AIR CONDITIONING control
unit, ZD124, set R ENGINE
bleed air ON/OFF switch,
HF26, to ON.

R ENGINE bleed air magnetic


indicator, HF20, goes
"in-line" and fan, HF200,
operates.

(d) Inspect fan, HF200, for


vibration and excessive
noise.

No vibration apparent. Noise


level satisfactory.

** On A/C: All
(e) Push and release APU X BLEED
annunciator switch, HF71.

Effectivity: See TOC

APU X BLEED annunciator


switch on caption comes on.
Passenger and flight
compartment conditioned air
flow starts.

21-61-00

CONFIG. 2
Pag. 502
Mar. 31/00

ACTION

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


RESULT

(f) Set automatic mode.

MAN caption is off.

(g) Move temperature selector


HF37, to full cold position.
(h) Set CKPT/CAB switch, DM3, to
CKPT and CAB in turn.

Conditioned air temperature


decreases in flight crew
compartment and passenger
compartment as shown on
temperature indicator, DM2.

(j) Move temperature selector,


HF37, to full hot position
and set CKPT/CAB switch, DM3,
to CKPT and CAB in turn.

Conditioned air temperature


increases in flight crew
compartment and passenger
compartment as shown on
temperature indicator, DM2.

(k) Set L ENGINE bleed air


ON/OFF switch, HF25, to ON.

L ENGINE bleed air magnetic


indicator, HF19, goes
"in-line" and fan, HF102,
operates.

(l) Inspect fan, HF102 for


vibration and excessive
noise.

No vibration apparent. Noise


level satisfactory.

(m) Push O/TEMP/MAN lighted


switch, HF31.

O/TEMP/MAN lighted switch,


HF31, MAN caption comes on.

(n) Set and hold HOT/OFF/COLD


switch, HF33, to COLD
position for at least 15
seconds, then release.

Conditioned air temperature


decreases in flight crew
compartment and passenger
compartment.

(p) Set CKPT/CAB switch, DM3, to


CKPT and CAB in turn.

Temperature decreases as
shown on the temperature
indicator DM2

(q) Set and hold HOT/OFF/COLD


switch, HF33, to HOT position
for at least 15 seconds then
release.

Conditioned air temperature


increases in flight crew
compartment and passenger
compartment as shown on
temperature indicator, DM2.

(r) Set CKPT/CAB switch, DM3, to


CKPT and CAB in turn.

Effectivity: See TOC

21-61-00

CONFIG. 2
Pag. 503
Mar. 31/00

ACTION

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


RESULT

(s) On AIR CONDITIONING control


unit, ZD124, push and release
X-FEED lighted switch, HF71,
and set RIGHT ENGINE bleed
air ON/OFF switch, HF26, to
OFF.

X-FEED lighted switch, HF71,


ON caption goes off. RIGHT
ENGINE bleed air magnetic
indicator, HF20, goes
"cross-line". Passenger and
flight compartment
conditioned air flow stops.

(t) Do engine shutdown procedure


(Ref. 71-00-00, P. Block 501)
WARNING:

MAKE SURE THAT RESIDUAL CABIN PRESSURE HAS DISSIPATED


BEFORE PROCEEDING.

(u) Open cabin door.

DOOR UNLKD annunciator on


central warning panel comes
on.

(3) Close-Up
(a) Make sure that work area is clean and clear of tools and
miscellaneous equipment.
(b) Switch off aircraft electrical system and disconnect GPU
(Ref. 24-40-00, P. Block 501).
(c) Remove warning notices.
2. Automatic Mode Functional Test (Fig. 501)
A.

Equipment and Materials


ITEM

DESIGNATION

(1)

ITEM 24-40-01 or
ITEM 24-40-02

Electrical Ground Power Unit (GPU)

(2)

GS 20220-2

Test Box

Referenced Procedures:
- 24-40-00, P. Block 501

Effectivity: See TOC

- External Power

21-61-00

CONFIG. 2
Pag. 504
Mar. 31/00

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


B.

Procedure
(1) Job Set-Up
(a) Put warning notices in and around aircraft telling personnel
that air conditioning system test is in progress.
(b) Connect the GPU and switch on aircraft electrical system
(Ref. 24-40-00, P. Block 501).
(2) Test
ACTION

RESULT

(a) Install GS20220-2 test box


(or equivalent) between
temperature controller and
aircraft electrical connector
HF7a. Set resistor position
switch on test box to the OUT
position. Close circuit
breakers AIR CONDITIONING,
HF1 (HF2), HF3 (HF4).
(b) Set O/TEMP/MAN lighted
switch HF31, to AUTO.

MAN caption is off.

(c) Move temperature selector


HF37, to full cold position.

Dual temperature control


valve moves to full cold
position with audible pulsing
sound from actuator.
(Actuator initially moves
rapidly, then slows and
pulses before stopping).
White indicator light
operates intermittently on
test box.

(d) Move temperature selector,


HF37 to full hot position.

Dual temperature control


valve moves to full hot
position with audible pulsing
sound from actuator similar
to step (c) except red
indicator light operates.

Effectivity: See TOC

21-61-00

CONFIG. 2
Pag. 505
Mar. 31/00

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


RESULT

ACTION

NOTE:

Temperature selector, HF37, range is approximately 65 F


to 85 F. Temperature selector range may only have
authority in one direction if compartment temperature is
at the high or low limit.
In these cases it is necessary to simulate temperatures
at temperature sensors or ground run the aircraft engines
to raise or lower compartment temperature to do a
complete operational test during engine ground run.

(3) Close-Up
(a) Disconnect and remove GS20220-2 test box and connect
electrical connector HF7a to temperature controller.
(b) Make sure that work area is clean and clear of tools and
miscellaneous equipment.
(c) Switch off aircraft electrical system and disconnect GPU
(Ref. 24-40-00, P. Block 501).
(d) Remove warning notices.

Effectivity: See TOC

21-61-00

CONFIG. 2
Pag. 506
Mar. 31/00

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


Temperature Control System - Test Schematic

CM1.21.61.00.5AO.00.02-00

Fig. 501 Temperature Control System - Test Schematic

Effectivity: See TOC

21-61-00

CONFIG. 2
Pag. 507
Mar. 31/00

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


3. Alternate Automatic Mode Functional Test (Fig. 501)
NOTE:
A.

Do this test when necessary to simulate temperatures at the


compartment temperature sensors.

Equipment and Materials


ITEM

DESIGNATION

(1)

ITEM 24-40-01 or
ITEM 24-40-02

Electrical ground power unit (GPU)

(2)

Water Bath

(3)

Thermometer

(4)

GS20220-2

Test Box

Referenced Procedures:
- 24-40-00, P. Block 501
- 21-61-19, P. Block 401
- 21-61-20, P. Block 401
B.

- External Power
- Flight Compartment Temperature Sensor
- Passenger Compartment Temperature
Sensor

Procedure
(1) Job Set-Up
(a) Put warning notices in and around aircraft telling personnel
that air conditioning system test is in progress.
(b) Connect the GPU and switch on aircraft electrical system
(Ref. 24-40-00, P. Block 501).
(2) Test
ACTION

RESULT

(a) Get to and remove temperature


sensor
(Ref. 21-61-19, P. Block 401
or 21-61-20, P. Block 401).
Reconnect electrical
connector.

Effectivity: See TOC

21-61-00

CONFIG. 2
Pag. 508
Mar. 31/00

ACTION

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


RESULT

(b) Install GS20220-2 test box


(or equivalent) between
temperature controller and
aircraft electrical connector
HF7a. Set resistor position
switch on test box to the OUT
position. Close circuit
breakers AIR CONDITIONING,
HF1 (HF2), HF3 (HF4).
(c) Push O/TEMP/MAN lighted
switch, HF31.

O/TEMP/MAN lighted switch,


HF31, MAN caption comes on.

(d) Set temperature selector


switch, HF37, at mid-range.

O/TEMP/MAN lighted switch,


HF31 MAN caption goes off
(auto mode).

Push O/TEMP/MAN lighted


switch, HF31.
(e) Put sensor probe into water
Dual temperature control
at a temperature of less than valve goes to hot position
50 F (10 C).
with audible pulsing of
actuator.
Red indicator light operates
intermittently on test box.
(f) Remove sensor from water and
hold tip of probe between
fingers (to simulate
temperature of at least 90 F
(32 C).

Dual temperature control


valve goes to cold position
with audible pulsing of
actuator.
White indicator light
operates intermittently on
test box.

(g) Push O/TEMP/MAN lighted


switch, HF31.

O/TEMP/MAN lighted switch,


HF31, MAN caption comes on.

(h) Open circuit breakers AIR


CONDITIONING, HF1 (HF2), HF3
(HF4).
(j) Disconnect and remove
GS20220-2 test box. Install
aircraft wiring to
temperature controller.

Effectivity: See TOC

21-61-00

CONFIG. 2
Pag. 509
Mar. 31/00

ACTION

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


RESULT

(k) Remove electrical connector


from temperature sensor.
(l) Install temperature sensor
(Ref. 21-61-19, P. Block 401
or 21-61-20, P. Block 401).

(3) Close-Up
(a) Make sure that work area is clean and clear of tools and
miscellaneous equipment.
(b) Switch off aircraft electrical system and disconnect GPU
(Ref. 24-40-00, P. Block 501).
(c) Remove warning notices.
4. Manual Mode Functional Test
NOTE:

A.

A test box is not required in the manual mode because the


temperature controller, temperature selector and temperature
sensors are inoperative.

Equipment and Materials


ITEM
(1)

DESIGNATION
ITEM 24-40-01 or
ITEM 24-40-02

Electrical Ground Power Unit (GPU)

Referenced Procedures:
- 24-40-00, P. Block 501
B.

- External Power

Procedure
(1) Job Set-Up
(a) Put warning notices in and around aircraft telling personnel
that air conditioning system is in progress.
(b) Connect the GPU and switch on aircraft electrical system
(Ref. 24-40-00, P. Block 501).

Effectivity: See TOC

21-61-00

CONFIG. 2
Pag. 510
Mar. 31/00

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


(c) Close the following circuit breakers:
PANEL

SERVICE

FIN

MISCELLANEOUS

AIR CONDITIONING

HF1 (HF2)

MISCELLANEOUS

AIR CONDITIONING

HF3 (HF4)

(2) Test
ACTION
(a) Push O/TEMP/MAN lighted
switch, HF31.

RESULT
- O/TEMP/MAN lighted switch
HF31 MAN caption comes on.

(b) Set and hold HOT/OFF/COLD


- Dual temperature control
switch, HF33, to HOT position
valve actuator goes to hot
for at least 15 seconds.
end of travel.
(c) Set and hold HOT/OFF/COLD
switch, HF33, to COLD
position for at least 15
seconds.

- Dual temperature control


valve actuator goes to full
cold end of travel.

(d) Set and hold HOT/OFF/COLD


- Dual temperature control
switch, HF33, to HOT position
valve actuator goes to full
for at least 15 seconds.
hot end of travel.
(e) Push O/TEMP/MAN lighted
switch, HF31.

- O/TEMP/MAN lighted switch,


HF31, MAN caption goes off.

(3) Close-Up
(a) Make sure that work area is clean and clear of tools and
miscellaneous equipment.
(b) Switch off aircraft electrical system and disconnect GPU
(Ref. 24-40-00, P. Block 501).
(c) Remove warning notices.

Effectivity: See TOC

21-61-00

CONFIG. 2
Pag. 511
Mar. 31/00

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

Effectivity: See TOC

21-61-00

CONFIG. 2
Pag. 512
Mar. 31/00

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


DUAL TEMPERATURE CONTROL VALVE,

HF39 (HF40)

REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
WARNING:

BEFORE POWER IS SUPPLIED TO THE AIRCRAFT, MAKE SURE THAT ELECTRICAL


CIRCUITS UPON WHICH WORK IS IN PROGRESS ARE ISOLATED.

1. Removal/Installation of the Dual Temperature Control Valve


A.

Reason for the Job


To remove and install the dual temperature control valve, HF39
(HF40), when it is unserviceable or to get access to other
components.

B.

Equipment and Materials


ITEM

DESIGNATION

(1)

ITEM 20-15-01

Circuit Breaker Safety Clips and Tags

(2)

Standard Tool

Warning Notice

(3)

Standard Tool

Protective Caps

(4)

Standard Tool

Ducting Blanks

(5)

Standard Tool

Access Platform, 2 m (6,5 ft)

(6)

CAN67374L226

Packing

(7)

35-71202-0403

Seal

(8)

LN9424-1F3504SA

Lockwire

Referenced Procedures:
- 06-41-57,
- 20-21-00,
- 21-00-00,
- 21-61-00,
C.

P.
P.
P.
P.

Block
Block
Block
Block

1
1
201
501

- Access Provision - Wings


- Standard Torques
- Air Conditioning
- Temperature Control

Procedure
(1) Job Set-Up
(a) Put warning notice in flight compartment to tell personnel
not to use the air conditioning system.

Effectivity: See TOC

21-61-11

Pag. 401
May 15/12

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


(b) Put access platform in position.
(c) Remove access panel 911AT to get to dual temperature control
valve (Ref. 06-41-57, P. Block 1).
(d) Open, safety and tag with ITEM 20-15-01 these circuit
breakers:
PANEL

SERVICE

FIN

MISCELLANEOUS

AIR CONDITIONING

HF1 (HF2)

MISCELLANEOUS

AIR CONDITIONING

HF3 (HF4)

(2) Removal (Fig. 401)


(a) Disconnect the electrical connector (14) and install
protective caps on the connector (14) and receptacle (15).
(b) Cut and remove the lockwire from the bolts (7).
(c) Remove the bolts (7) and washers (8) and disconnect the pack
valve outlet duct (6).
(d) Remove and discard the packing (5)
(Ref.21-00-00, P. Block 201).
(e) Cut and remove the lockwire from the bolts (12).
(f) Remove the bolts (12) and washers (13) and disconnect the
bypass valve outlet duct (11).
(g) Cut and remove the lockwire from the bolts (1), (24).
(h) Remove the bolts (1), (24) and washers (2), (23) and
disconnect the valve inlet duct (3).
(j) Remove and discard the packing (4) and seal (21)
(Ref.21-00-00, P. Block 201 201).
(k) Remove and discard the seal (10).
(l) Remove the retaining screws (19) and washers (18).
(m) Carefully remove the valve assembly (17) from the mounting
brackets (16).
(n) Install blanks on the duct ends and valve orifices.

Effectivity: See TOC

21-61-11

Pag. 402
May 15/12

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


Dual Temperature Control Valve

CM1.21.61.11.4AO.00.00-01

Fig. 401 Dual Temperature Control Valve

Effectivity: See TOC

21-61-11

Pag. 403
May 15/12

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


(3) Preparation of the Replacement Component
N/A
(4) Preparation for Installation (Fig. 401)
(a) Remove blanks from the valve orifices and install new
packings (4) and (5) CAN67374L226 on the pack valve inlet
and outlet ports (Ref.21-00-00, P. Block 201).
(b) Remove blanks from the aircraft installation duct ends.
(5) Installation (Fig. 401)
(a) Install the valve assembly (17) on the mounting brackets
(16) and fasten with the washers (18) and screws (19).
(b) Torque the screws (19) to the standard valve
(Ref.20-21-00, P. Block 1).
(c) Fasten the pack valve outlet port duct (6) to the pack valve
with the washers (8) and bolts (7).
(d) Torque the bolts (7) to the standard value
(Ref.20-21-00, P. Block 1).
(e) Safety the bolts (1) with lockwire LN9424-1F3504SA.
(f) Install a new seal (10) 35-71202-0403 in the bypass valve
port housing (9).
(g) Fasten the outlet duct (11) to the bypass valve with the
washer (13) and bolts (12).
(h) Torque the bolts (12) to the standard value
(Ref.20-21-00, P. Block 1) and safety with lockwire
LN9424-1F3504SA.
(j) Install a new seal (21) 35-71202-0403 in the bypass valve
port housing (20).
(k) Fasten the duct (3) to the valve assembly (17) with the
washers (2) and (23) and bolts (1) and (24).
(l) Torque the bolts (1) and (24) to the standard value
(Ref.20-21-00, P. Block 1) and safety with lockwire
LN9424-1F3504SA.
(m) Remove protective caps and connect the electrical connector
(14) to the receptacle (15).
Effectivity: See TOC

21-61-11

Pag. 404
May 15/12

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


(6) Test
(a) Remove the safety clip and tag ITEM 20-15-01 and close these
circuit breakers:
PANEL

SERVICE

FIN

MISCELLANEOUS

AIR CONDITIONING

HF1 (HF2)

MISCELLANEOUS

AIR CONDITIONING

HF3 (HF4)

(b) Do the adjustment/test of the temperature control system


(Ref. 21-61-00, P. Block 501).
(7) Close-Up
(a) Install access panel 911AT (Ref. 06-41-57, P. Block 1).
(b) Remove access platform.
(c) Remove warning notice.
(d) Make sure that working area is clean and clear of tools and
miscellaneous equipment.

Effectivity: See TOC

21-61-11

Pag. 405
May 15/12

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

Effectivity: See TOC

21-61-11

Pag. 406
May 15/12

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER,

HF7 (HF8)

REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
WARNING:

BEFORE POWER IS SUPPLIED TO THE AIRCRAFT, MAKE SURE THAT ELECTRICAL


CIRCUITS UPON WHICH WORK IS IN PROGRESS ARE ISOLATED.

1. Equipment and Materials


ITEM

DESIGNATION

A.

ITEM 20-15-01

Circuit Breaker Safety Clips and Tags

B.

Warning Notice

C.

Protective Caps

Referenced Procedures:
- 06-41-51, P. Block 1
- 21-61-00, P. Block 501

- Access Provisions - Interior


- Temperature Control System

2. Procedure
A.

Job Set-Up
(1) Put warning notice in flight compartment telling personnel not to
use the air conditioning system.
(2) Open, safety and tag the following circuit breakers:
PANEL

SERVICE

FIN

MISCELLANEOUS

AIR CONDITIONING

HF1

MISCELLANEOUS

AIR CONDITIONING

HF2

MISCELLANEOUS

AIR CONDITIONING

HF3

MISCELLANEOUS

AIR CONDITIONING

HF4

(3) Remove LH or RH lateral console access panel to get to


temperature controller (Ref. 06-41-51, P. Block 1).

Effectivity: See TOC

21-61-12

Pag. 401
Jul. 15/04

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


B.

Removal (Fig. 401)


(1) Disconnect the electrical connector (6) and install protective
caps on the connector (6) and receptacle (5).
(2) Remove the retaining screws (1) and washers (2). Remove the
temperature controller (3) from mounting (4).

C.

Installation (Fig. 401)


(1) Install the temperature controller (3) on the mounting (4) and
fasten with the washers (2) and screws (1).
(2) Tighten the screws (1) to the standard torque value.
(3) Remove protective caps and connect the electrical connector (6)
to the receptacle (5).

D.

Test
(1) Do the adjustment/test of the temperature control system
(Ref. 21-61-00, P. Block 501).

E.

Close-Up
(1) Make sure that working area is clean and clear of tools and
miscellaneous equipment.
(2) Install side console access panels (Ref. 06-41-51, P. Block 1).
(3) Remove warning notice.

Effectivity: See TOC

21-61-12

Pag. 402
Jul. 15/04

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


Temperature Controller

CM1.21.61.12.4AO.00.00-01

Fig. 401 Temperature Controller

Effectivity: See TOC

21-61-12

Pag. 403
Jul. 15/04

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

Effectivity: See TOC

21-61-12

Pag. 404
Jul. 15/04

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


TEMPERATURE SENSOR,

HF55 (HF56)

REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
WARNING:

BEFORE POWER IS SUPPLIED TO THE AIRCRAFT, MAKE SURE THAT ELECTRICAL


CIRCUITS UPON WHICH WORK IS IN PROGRESS ARE ISOLATED.

CAUTION:

TEMPERATURE SENSOR MUST BE HANDLED WITH CARE TO AVOID DAMAGE TO THE


WHITE GLASS PROBE.

1. Removal/Installation of the Temperature Sensor


A.

Reason for the Job


- To remove and install the temperature sensor when it is
unserviceable or to get access to other components.
- To do the 21.60.00.01 MRB task, "Remove Duct Supply, Flight
Compartment, and Main Compartment Temperature Sensors for cleaning".

B.

Equipment and Materials


ITEM

DESIGNATION

(1)

ITEM 20-15-01

Circuit Breaker Safety Clips and Tags

(2)

Standard Tool

Warning Notice

(3)

Standard Tool

Protective Caps

(4)

Standard Tool

Ducting Blanks

(5)

CAN67374L115

Packing

Referenced Procedures:
- 06-41-57, P. Block 1
- 21-00-00, P. Block 201
- 21-61-00, P. Block 501
- CMM 21-61-24

Effectivity: See TOC

- Access Provisions - Wing


- Air Conditioning
- Temperature Control System
- CMM of Hamilton Sundstrand

21-61-13

Pag. 401
May 15/12

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


C.

Procedure
(1) Job Set-Up
(a) Put warning notice in flight compartment to tell personnel
not to use the air conditioning system.
(b) Open, safety and tag with ITEM 20-15-01 these circuit
breakers:
PANEL

SERVICE

FIN

MISCELLANEOUS

AIR CONDITIONING

HF1

MISCELLANEOUS

AIR CONDITIONING

HF2

MISCELLANEOUS

AIR CONDITIONING

HF3

MISCELLANEOUS

AIR CONDITIONING

HF4

(c) Remove the access panel 911AT to get to relevant temperature


sensor (Ref. 06-41-57, P. Block 1).
(2) Removal (Fig. 401)
(a) Disconnect the electrical connector (1) and install
protective caps on the connector (1) and sensor receptacle
(2).
(b) Remove the sensor (3).
(c) Remove and discard the packing (4)
(Ref.21-00-00, P. Block 201).
(d) Install blank to the duct sensor inlet (5).
NOTE:

If you removed the component to do the 21.60.00.01


MRB task, send it to the related shop for cleaning
(Refer to CMM 21-61-24 of Hamilton Sundstrand).

(3) Installation (Fig. 401)


(a) Remove blank from the duct sensor inlet (5).
(b) Install a new packing (4) CAN67374L115 on the sensor (3)
(Ref.21-00-00, P. Block 201).
(c) Install the sensor (3) into the duct sensor inlet (5).

Effectivity: See TOC

21-61-13

Pag. 402
May 15/12

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


Temperature Sensor

CM1.21.61.13.4AO.00.00-02

Fig. 401 Temperature Sensor

Effectivity: See TOC

21-61-13

Pag. 403
May 15/12

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


(d) Torque the sensor (3) to between 11,29 and 28,24 Nm (100 and
250 lbfin) .
(e) Remove protective caps and connect the electrical connector
(1) to the receptacle (2).
(4) Test
(a) Remove the safety clip and tag ITEM 20-15-01 and close these
circuit breakers:
PANEL

SERVICE

FIN

MISCELLANEOUS

AIR CONDITIONING

HF1

MISCELLANEOUS

AIR CONDITIONING

HF2

MISCELLANEOUS

AIR CONDITIONING

HF3

MISCELLANEOUS

AIR CONDITIONING

HF4

(b) Do the operational test procedure for the Temperature


Control System (Ref. 21-61-00, P. Block 501).
(5) Close-Up
(a) Install access panel 911AT (Ref. 06-41-57, P. Block 1).
(b) Remove warning notice.
(c) Make sure that working area is clean and clear of tools and
miscellaneous equipment.

Effectivity: See TOC

21-61-13

Pag. 404
May 15/12

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


MICROFAN

HF102

REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
WARNING:

BEFORE POWER IS SUPPLIED TO THE AIRCRAFT, MAKE SURE THAT ELECTRICAL


CIRCUITS UPON WHICH WORK IS IN PROGRESS ARE ISOLATED.

1. Equipment and Materials


ITEM

DESIGNATION

A.

ITEM 20-15-01

Circuit Breaker Safety Clips and Tags

B.

Standard Tool

Protective Caps

C.

Standard Tool

Warning Notices

Referenced Procedures:
- 20-21-00, P. Block 1
- 21-61-00, P. Block 501
- 33-11-16, P. Block 401

- Standard Torques
- Temperature Control System
- Flight Deck Lighting Control Unit

2. Procedure
A.

Job Set-Up
(1) Put warning notices in flight compartment to tell personnel not
to operate the air conditioning system.
(2) Open, safety clip and tag with ITEM 20-15-01 these circuit
breakers:
PANEL

SERVICE

FIN

MISCELLANEOUS

AIR CONDITIONING

HF1 (HF2)

MISCELLANEOUS

AIR CONDITIONING

HF3 (HF4)

(3) On the LH console, remove the necessary control units to get


access to the microfan (Ref.33-11-16, P. Block 401).

Effectivity: See TOC

21-61-14

Pag. 401
Dec. 01/09

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

B.

Removal (Fig. 401)


(1) Disconnect the electrical connector (5) and install protective
caps on the connector (5) and receptacle (4)
(2) Disconnect the wires (6).
NOTE:

Mark the wires to aid correct connection.

(3) Remove the screws (1), washers (2) and shim (3).
(4) Remove the duct with the microfan and sensor assembly (7).
(5) Remove the nuts (8), washers (9) and screws (12).
(6) Remove the plate and fan (11) from the duct support (10).
(7) Remove the nuts (13), washers (14) and screws (17).
(8) Remove the microfan (15) from the plate (16).
(9) Install blanks on all exposed orifices.
C.

Preparation of Replacement Component (Fig. 401)


(1) Examine the microfan (15) for signs of damage or corrosion.

D.

Preparation for Installation (Fig. 401)


(1) Examine the plate (16), the duct support (10) and the shim (3)
for signs of damage or corrosion.

E.

Installation (Fig. 401)


(1) Remove the blank and caps.
(2) Install the microfan (15) to the plate (16) with the screws (17),
washers (14) and nuts (13).
NOTE:

The arrow (18) in the microfan, shows the air flow


direction. Make sure that microfan is mounted correctly.

(3) Tighten the nuts (13) to the standard torque value


(Ref.20-21-00, P. Block 1).

Effectivity: See TOC

21-61-14

Pag. 402
Dec. 01/09

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


Microfan HF102

CM1.21.61.14.4AO.00.00-01

Fig. 401 Microfan HF102

Effectivity: See TOC

21-61-14

Pag. 403
Dec. 01/09

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


(4) Install the plate (16) and microfan (11) on the duct support (10)
with the screws (12), washers (9) and nuts (8).
(5) Tighten the nuts (8) to the standard torque value
(Ref.20-21-00, P. Block 1).
(6) Connect the wires (6).
(7) Install the duct with the microfan and sensor assembly (7) and
the shim (3) on the aircraft structure. Attach with the screws
(1) and washers (2).
(8) Tighten the screws (1) to the standard torque value
(Ref.20-21-00, P. Block 1).
(9) Connect the electrical connector (5) to the receptacle (4).
F.

Test
(1) Remove the safety clip and tag ITEM 20-15-01 and close these
circuit breakers:
PANEL

SERVICE

FIN

MISCELLANEOUS

AIR CONDITIONING

HF1 (HF2)

MISCELLANEOUS

AIR CONDITIONING

HF3 (HF4)

(2) Do temperature control system adjustment/test


(Ref. 21-61-00, P. Block 501).
G.

Close-Up
(1) On the LH console, install the control units removed.
(2) Remove warning notices.
(3) Make sure that working area is clean and clear of tools and
miscellaneous equipment.

Effectivity: See TOC

21-61-14

Pag. 404
Dec. 01/09

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


CABIN SUPPLY OVERTEMPERATURE SWITCH,

HF57 (HF58)

REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
WARNING:

BEFORE POWER IS SUPPLIED TO THE AIRCRAFT, MAKE SURE THAT ELECTRICAL


CIRCUITS UPON WHICH WORK IS IN PROGRESS ARE ISOLATED.

1. Removal/Installation of the Cabin Supply Overtemperature Switch


A.

Reason for the Job


To remove and install the Cabin Supply Overtemperature Switch when it
is unserviceable or to get access to other components.

B.

Equipment and Materials


ITEM

DESIGNATION

(1)

ITEM 20-15-01

Circuit Breaker Safety Clips and Tags

(2)

Standard Tool

Warning Notice

(3)

Standard Tool

Protective Caps

(4)

CAN67374L012

Packing

Referenced Procedures:
- 06-41-57,
- 20-21-00,
- 21-00-00,
- 21-61-00,
C.

P.
P.
P.
P.

Block
Block
Block
Block

1
1
201
501

- Access Provisions - Wings


- Standard Torques
- Air Conditioning
- Temperature Control

Procedure
(1) Job Set-Up
(a) Put warning notices in flight compartment to tell personnel
not to use the air conditioning system.

Effectivity: See TOC

21-61-16

Pag. 401
May 15/12

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


(b) Open, safety and tag with ITEM 20-15-01 these circuit
breakers:
PANEL

SERVICE

FIN

MISCELLANEOUS

AIR CONDITIONING

HF1

MISCELLANEOUS

AIR CONDITIONING

HF2

MISCELLANEOUS

AIR CONDITIONING

HF3

MISCELLANEOUS

AIR CONDITIONING

HF4

(c) Remove access panel 911A to get to relevant overtemperature


switch (Ref.06-41-57, P. Block 1).
(2) Removal (Fig. 401)
(a) Disconnect the connector (1) and install protective caps on
the connector (1) and receptacle (2).
(b) Loosen and remove the overtemperature switch (3).
(c) Remove and discard the packing (4)
(Ref.21-00-00, P. Block 201).
(d) Install blank to the duct overtemperature switch inlet (5).
(3) Preparation of the Replacement Component
N/A
(4) Preparation for installation (Fig. 401)
(a) Remove blank from the duct overtemperature switch inlet (5).
(b) Install a new packing CAN67374L012 (4) on the
overtemperature switch (3) (Ref.21-00-00, P. Block 201).
(5) Installation (Fig. 401)
(a) Install the switch (3) into the duct overtemperature switch
inlet (5). Torque to the standard value
(Ref.20-21-00, P. Block 1).
(b) Remove the protective caps and connect the connector (1) to
the overtemperature switch receptacle (2).

Effectivity: See TOC

21-61-16

Pag. 402
May 15/12

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


(6) Test
(a) Remove the safety clip and tag ITEM 20-15-01 and close these
circuit breakers:
PANEL

SERVICE

FIN

MISCELLANEOUS

AIR CONDITIONING

HF1

MISCELLANEOUS

AIR CONDITIONING

HF2

MISCELLANEOUS

AIR CONDITIONING

HF3

MISCELLANEOUS

AIR CONDITIONING

HF4

(b) Do the adjustment/test of the temperature control system


(Ref. 21-61-00, P. Block 501).
(7) Close-Up
(a) Install access panel 911AT (Ref.06-41-57, P. Block 1).
(b) Remove warning notice.
(c) Make sure that working area is clean and clear of tools and
miscellaneous equipment.

Effectivity: See TOC

21-61-16

Pag. 403
May 15/12

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


Cabin Supply Overtemperature Switch

CM1.21.61.16.4AO.00.00-02

Fig. 401 Cabin Supply Overtemperature Switch

Effectivity: See TOC

21-61-16

Pag. 404
May 15/12

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


TEMPERATURE INDICATOR

DM2

REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
BEFORE POWER IS SUPPLIED TO THE AIRCRAFT, MAKE SURE THAT ELECTRICAL
CIRCUITS UPON WHICH WORK IS IN PROGRESS ARE ISOLATED.

WARNING:

1. Equipment and Materials


ITEM

DESIGNATION

A.

ITEM 20-15-01

Circuit Breaker Safety Clips and Tags

B.

Protective Caps

C.

ITEM 24-40-01 or ITEM


24-40-02

Ground Power Unit (GPU)

Referenced Procedures:
- 24-40-00, P. Block 501

- External Power

2. Procedure
A.

Job Set-Up
(1) Open, safety and tag the following circuit breaker:

B.

PANEL

SERVICE

FIN

MISCELLANEOUS

AIR CONDITIONING

HF4

Removal (Fig. 401)


(1) On flight compartment air conditioning panel (1), loosen clamp
screw (2) and remove temperature indicator (5) sufficiently to
get to electrical connector (3).
(2) Disconnect electrical connector (3) and install protective caps
on connector (3) and receptacle (4). Remove indicator (5).

C.

Installation (Fig. 401)


(1) Remove protective caps from electrical connector (3) and
receptacle (4).

Effectivity: See TOC

21-61-17

Pag. 401
Mar. 31/00

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


(2) Connect electrical connector (3) to receptacle (4).
(3) Install indicator (5) in air conditioning panel (1) and fasten
with clamp screw (2).
D.

Test
The following post-installation test is to prove that indicator is
operating and is not intended as a test of accuracy of recorded
temperatures.
ACTION

E.

RESULT

(1)

Connect GPU and switch on


aircraft electrical system
(Ref. 24-40-00, P. Block 501).

(2)

Remove safety clip and tag and


close circuit breaker HF4.

(3)

On flight compartment overhead


air conditioning control unit,
set temperature indicator
selector switch to CKPT.

- Indicator pointer shows flight


compartment temperature within
two seconds of selection.

(4)

Set temperature indicator


selector switch to CAB.

- Indicator pointer shows main


compartment temperature within
two seconds of selection.

Close-Up
(1) Make sure that working area is clean and clear of tools and
miscellaneous equipment.
(2) Switch off aircraft electrical system and disconnect GPU
(Ref. 24-40-00, P. Block 501).

Effectivity: See TOC

21-61-17

Pag. 402
Mar. 31/00

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


Temperature Indicator

CM1.21.61.17.4AO.00.00-00

Fig. 401 Temperature Indicator

Effectivity: See TOC

21-61-17

Pag. 403
Mar. 31/00

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

Effectivity: See TOC

21-61-17

Pag. 404
Mar. 31/00

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


FREE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR,

DM4 (DM5)

REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
WARNING:

BEFORE POWER IS SUPPLIED TO THE AIRCRAFT, MAKE SURE THAT ELECTRICAL


CIRCUITS UPON WHICH WORK IS IN PROGRESS ARE ISOLATED.

1. Equipment and Materials


ITEM

DESIGNATION

A.

ITEM 20-15-01

Circuit Breaker Safety Clips


and Tags

B.

ITEM 24-40-01 or ITEM


24-40-02

Ground Power Unit (GPU)

C.

Standard Tool

Warning Notices

D.

Standard Tool

Electrical Blanking Plugs and Caps

Referenced Procedures:
- 20-21-00, P. Block 1
- 24-40-00, P. Block 201

- Standard Torques
- External Power

2. Procedure - Removal/Installation of Free Air Temperature Sensor DM4


A.

Job Set-Up
(1) Put the warning notices in position.
(2) Open, safety clip and tag with ITEM 20-15-01 this circuit
breaker:
PANEL

SERVICE

FIN

MISCELLANEOUS

AIR CONDITIONING

HF4

(3) Remove the necessary trim to get access to the temperature


sensor.

Effectivity: See TOC

21-61-18

CONFIG. 1
Pag. 401
Dec. 01/09

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


B.

Removal (Fig. 401)


(1) Disconnect the electrical connector (7) and install blanking
plugs and caps to connector (7) and the receptacle (6).
(2) Support the sensor (5) and remove the screws (3) and the washers
(2).
(3) Remove the sensor (5) and the preformed packing (4) from the
mounting (1).
(4) Keep preformed packing (4).

C.

Preparation of Replacement Component (Fig. 401)


(1) Examine the sensor (5) for signs of damage or corrosion.

D.

Preparation for Installation (Fig. 401)


(1) Examine the preformed packing (4) and the mounting (1) for signs
of damage or corrosion.

E.

Installation (Fig. 401)


(1) Install the sensor (5) and the preformed packing (4) on the
mounting (1) and fasten with the washers (2) and the screws (3).
(2) Tighten the screws (3) to the standard torque value
(Ref.20-21-00, P. Block 1).
(3) Remove blanking plugs and caps and from the connector (7) and the
receptacle (6). Connect the connector (7) to the receptacle (6).

F.

Preparation for Test


(1) Connect the GPU ITEM 24-40-01 or ITEM 24-40-02 and switch on the
aircraft electrical system (Ref. 24-40-00, P. Block 201).
(2) Remove the safety clip and tag ITEM 20-15-01 and close the
circuit breaker:
PANEL

SERVICE

FIN

MISCELLANEOUS

AIR CONDITIONING

HF4

Effectivity: See TOC

21-61-18

CONFIG. 1
Pag. 402
Dec. 01/09

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


Free Air Temperature Sensor, DM4

CM1.21.61.18.4AO.00.01-00

Fig. 401 Free Air Temperature Sensor, DM4

Effectivity: See TOC

21-61-18

CONFIG. 1
Pag. 403
Dec. 01/09

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


G.

Test
(1) The following post-installation test is to prove that the
indicator is operating and is not intended as a test for accuracy
of recorded temperatures.
ACTION

RESULT

(a) On air conditioning control


unit, ZD124, set the
temperature indicator
selector switch DM3 to CKPT.

H.

The indicator pointer shows


the flight compartment
temperature within two
seconds after the selection.

Close-Up
(1) Switch off aircraft electrical system and disconnect GPU ITEM
24-40-01 or ITEM 24-40-02 (Ref. 24-40-00, P. Block 201).
(2) Install trim previously removed.
(3) Remove warning notices.
(4) Make sure that work area is clean and clear of tools and
miscellaneous equipment.

3. Procedure - Removal/Installation of Free Air Temperature Sensor DM5


A.

Job Set-Up
(1) Put the warning notices in position.
(2) Open, safety and tag ITEM 20-15-01 the circuit breaker:
PANEL

SERVICE

FIN

MISCELLANEOUS

AIR CONDITIONING

HF4

(3) Remove the necessary trim to get access to the temperature


sensor.

Effectivity: See TOC

21-61-18

CONFIG. 1
Pag. 404
Dec. 01/09

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


B.

Removal (Fig. 402)


(1) Disconnect the electrical connector (6) and install blanking
plugs and caps to connector (6) and the receptacle (5).
(2) Support the sensor (4) and remove the screws (2).
(3) Remove the sensor (4) and the preformed packing (3) from the
mounting (1).
(4) Keep the preformed packing (3).

C.

Preparation of Replacement Component (Fig. 402)


(1) Examine the sensor (4) for signs of damage or corrosion.

D.

Preparation for Installation (Fig. 402)


(1) Examine the preformed packing (3) and the mounting (1) for signs
of damage or corrosion.

E.

Installation (Fig. 402)


(1) Install the sensor (4) and the preformed packing (3) on the
mounting (1) and fasten with the screws (2).
(2) Tighten the screws (2) to the standard torque value
(Ref.20-21-00, P. Block 1).
(3) Remove blanking plugs and caps from the connector (6) and the
receptacle (5). Connect the connector (6) to the receptacle (5).

F.

Preparation for Test


(1) Connect the GPU ITEM 24-40-01 or ITEM 24-40-02 and switch on the
aircraft electrical system (Ref. 24-40-00, P. Block 201).
(2) Remove the safety clip and tag ITEM 20-15-01 and close the
circuit breaker:
PANEL

SERVICE

FIN

MISCELLANEOUS

AIR CONDITIONING

HF4

Effectivity: See TOC

21-61-18

CONFIG. 1
Pag. 405
Dec. 01/09

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


Free Air Temperature Sensor, DM5

CM1.21.61.18.4BO.00.01-00

Fig. 402 Free Air Temperature Sensor, DM5

Effectivity: See TOC

21-61-18

CONFIG. 1
Pag. 406
Dec. 01/09

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


G.

Test
(1) The following post-installation test is to prove that the
indicator is operating and is not intended as a test for accuracy
of recorded temperatures.
ACTION
(a) On air conditioning control
unit, ZD124, set temperature
indicator selector switch,
DM3, to CAB.

H.

RESULT
The indicator pointer shows
the main compartment
temperature within two
seconds after the selection.

Close-Up
(1) Switch off the aircraft electrical system and disconnect the GPU
ITEM 24-40-01 or ITEM 24-40-01 (Ref. 24-40-00, P. Block 201).
(2) Install the trim previously removed.
(3) Remove the warning notices.
(4) Make sure that the work area is clean and clear of tools and
miscellaneous equipment.

Effectivity: See TOC

21-61-18

CONFIG. 1
Pag. 407
Dec. 01/09

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

Effectivity: See TOC

21-61-18

CONFIG. 1
Pag. 408
Dec. 01/09

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


FLIGHT COMPARTMENT TEMPERATURE SENSOR,

HF77

REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
WARNING:

BEFORE POWER IS SUPPLIED TO THE AIRCRAFT, MAKE SURE THAT ELECTRICAL


CIRCUITS UPON WHICH WORK IS IN PROGRESS ARE ISOLATED.

1. Removal/Installation of the Temperature Sensor


A.

Reason for the Job


- To remove and install the temperature sensor when it is
unserviceable or to get access to other components.
- To do the 21.60.00.01 MRB task, "Remove Duct Supply, Flight
Compartment, and Main Compartment Temperature Sensors for cleaning".

B.

Equipment and Materials


ITEM

DESIGNATION

(1)

ITEM 20-15-01

Circuit Breaker Safety Clips and Tags

(2)

Standard Tool

Protective Caps

(3)

Standard Tool

Warning Notices

(4)

CAN67374L115

Packing

Referenced Procedures:
- 20-21-00, P.
- 21-00-00, P.
- 21-61-00, P.
- 33-11-61, P.
- CMM 21-61-24
C.

Block
Block
Block
Block

1
201
501
401

- Standard Torques
- Air Conditioning
- Temperature Control System
- Flight Deck Lighting Control Unit
- CMM of Hamilton Sundstrand

Procedure
(1) Job Set-Up
(a) Put warning notices in flight compartment telling personnel
not to operate the air conditioning system.

Effectivity: See TOC

21-61-19

CONFIG. 2
Pag. 401
May 15/12

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


(b) Open, safety clip and tag with ITEM 20-15-01 these circuit
breakers:
PANEL

SERVICE

FIN

MISCELLANEOUS

AIR CONDITIONING

HF1 (HF2)

MISCELLANEOUS

AIR CONDITIONING

HF3 (HF4)

(c) On the LH console, remove the lighting control unit, ZD121,


to get access to the temperature sensor
(Ref.33-11-16, P. Block 401).
(2) Removal (Fig. 401)
(a) Disconnect the electrical connector (5) and install
protective caps on the connector (5) and receptacle (4).
(b) Remove the sensor (3) complete with the packing (2) from the
support (1).
(c) Remove and discard the packing (2)
(Ref.21-00-00, P. Block 201).
NOTE:

If you removed the component to do the 21.60.00.01


MRB task, send it to the related shop for
cleaning (Refer to CMM 21-61-24 of Hamilton
Sundstrand).

(3) Preparation of the Replacement Component (Fig. 401)


(a) Examine the sensor (3) for signs of damage or corrosion.
(4) Preparation for Installation (Fig. 401)
(a) Remove the packing from the electrical connector (5) and
receptacle (4).
(5) Installation (Fig. 401)
(a) Install the sensor (3) with a new packing CAN67374L115 (2)
on the support (1) (Ref.21-00-00, P. Block 201).
(b) Tighten the sensor (3) to the standard torque value
(Ref.20-21-00, P. Block 1).
(c) Install the electrical connector (5) to the receptacle (4).

Effectivity: See TOC

21-61-19

CONFIG. 2
Pag. 402
May 15/12

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


Flight Compartment Temperature Sensor

CM1.21.61.19.4AO.00.02-00

Fig. 401 Flight Compartment Temperature Sensor

Effectivity: See TOC

21-61-19

CONFIG. 2
Pag. 403
May 15/12

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


(6) Test
(a) Remove the safety clip and tag ITEM 20-15-01 and close these
circuit breakers:
PANEL

SERVICE

FIN

MISCELLANEOUS

AIR CONDITIONING

HF1 (HF2)

MISCELLANEOUS

AIR CONDITIONING

HF3 (HF4)

(b) Do Temperature Control System adjustment/test


(Ref. 21-61-00, P. Block 501).
(7) Close-Up
(a) On the LH console, install the lighting control unit, ZD121
(Ref.33-11-16, P. Block 401).
(b) Remove warning notices.
(c) Make sure that working area is clean and clear of tools and
miscellaneous equipment.

Effectivity: See TOC

21-61-19

CONFIG. 2
Pag. 404
May 15/12

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


PASSENGER COMPARTMENT TEMPERATURE SENSOR,

HF64

REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
WARNING:

BEFORE POWER IS SUPPLIED TO THE AIRCRAFT, MAKE SURE THAT ELECTRICAL


CIRCUITS UPON WHICH WORK IS IN PROGRESS ARE ISOLATED.

1. Reason for the Job


- To remove and install the Passenger Compartment Temperature Sensor,
HF64, when it is unserviceable or to get access to other components.
- To do the 21.021 MRB task (MRB Documents PV01 and PV01M), "Clean".
- To do the 21.60.00.01 MRB task (MRB Document PV02M), "Remove Duct
Supply, Flight Compartment, and Main Compartment Temperature Sensors for
cleaning".
2. Equipment and Materials
ITEM

DESIGNATION

A.

ITEM 20-15-01

Circuit Breaker Safety Clips and Tags

B.

Electrical Blanking Plugs and Caps

C.

Warning Notices

D.

MS28778-8

Preformed Packing

Referenced Procedures:
- 21-61-00, P. Block 501

- Temperature Control System

3. Procedure
A.

Job Set-Up
(1) Open, safety and tag the following circuit breakers:
PANEL

SERVICE

FIN

MISCELLANEOUS

AIR CONDITIONING

HF1 (HF2)

MISCELLANEOUS

AIR CONDITIONING

HF3 (HF4)

Effectivity: See TOC

21-61-20

CONFIG. 1
Pag. 401
May 15/13

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


(2) Put the warning notices in the passenger compartment telling the
personnel not to operate the air conditioning system.
(3) Remove any trim necessary to get access to the temperature sensor
in the RH side of the passenger compartment between STA 9200 and
STA 9708.
B.

Removal (Fig. 401)


(1) Disconnect the electrical connector (1) and install blanking
plugs and caps to the connector (1) and the receptacle (2).
(2) Remove the sensor (3) complete with the retainer (6) and the
preformed packing (5) from the duct port (4).
(3) Keep the retainer (6) and discard the preformed packing (5).

C.

Preparation for Installation (Fig. 401)


(1) Install the retainer (6) and the new preformed packing (5) on the
sensor (3).
(2) Remove blanking plug and caps from the electrical connector (1)
and the receptacle (2).
(3) Inspect the sensor (3) for any signs of damage.

D.

Installation (Fig. 401)


(1) Install the sensor (3) complete with the retainer (6) and the
preformed packing (5) in the duct port (4).
(2) Tighten the sensor (3) to the standard torque value.
(3) Connect the electrical connector (1) to the receptacle (2).

E.

Test
(1) Do the adjustment/test procedures of the temperature control
system (Ref. 21-61-00, P. Block 501).

F.

Close-Up
(1) Install the trim previously removed.
(2) Remove the warning notices.
(3) Make sure that the work area is clean and clear of tools and
miscellaneous equipment.

Effectivity: See TOC

21-61-20

CONFIG. 1
Pag. 402
May 15/13

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL


Passenger Compartment Temperature Sensor, HF64

CM1.21.61.20.4AO.00.01-00

Fig. 401 Passenger Compartment Temperature Sensor, HF64

Effectivity: See TOC

21-61-20

CONFIG. 1
Pag. 403
May 15/13

CN-235 MAINTENANCE MANUAL

INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

Effectivity: See TOC

21-61-20

CONFIG. 1
Pag. 404
May 15/13